\^^^ '*^'^.-t'^^' €ir" l-^-Y- HARVARD UNIVERSITY. LIBRARY OF THE MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY. .^XT^^ }^ ^L^^^A^^^ PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY HELD AT PHILADELPHIA FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE, VOL. XXXVII. JANUARY TO DECEMBER, 1898. PHILADELPHIA : THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY : '^1898. PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY Ij-HHf Mil) AT PHILADELPHIA FOE PROMOTING USEFUL RIWIEDGE. Vol. XXXVII. JuLr, 1898. No. 15T. CONTENTS. PAGE Stated Meeting^ January 7, 1898 3 The Altitude of the Aurora above the Earth's Surface. By Cleveland A bbe 4 Stated Meeting, January 21^ 1898 T Description of Four New Species of Bocinela, with a Synop- sis of the Genus. By Harriet Richardson 8 Specializations of the Lepidopterous Wing ; the Pieri-Nym- phalid8e(with plates). By A. Radcliffe Grote, A.M.. 17 An Old Broadside, with a Reference to the Throne of Con- gress (with plate). By Julius F. Sachse 45 Stated Meeting^ February ^, 1898 51 Stated Meeting, February 18, 1898 52 Stated Meeting, 3Iarch 4, 1898 53 Stated Meeting, March 18, 1898 54 Initiation Ceremonies of Australian Tribes (with plate). By R. H. Mathews, L.S 54 Preliminary Note on the Selenodont Artiodactyls of the Uinta Formation. By W. B. Scott ^ 73 Stated Meeting, April 1, 1898 81 Notes on Kansan Drift in Pennsylvania. By Prop. Ed- ward H. Williams, Jr 84 A Note on the History of the Jefferson Manuscript Draught of the Declaration of Independence in the Library of the American Philosophical Society. By I. Minis Ha^s, M.D. 88 The Genesis of Bitumens as Related to Chemical Geology. By S. F. Peckham 108 Herpetological Notes. By John Van Denburgh 139 Stated Meeting, April 15, 1898 142 A Journal Kept During the Siege of Fort William Henry, August, 1757. By I. Mknis Hays, M.D 143 Divisions of Australian Tribes. By R. H. Mathews, L.S . . 151 Stated Meeting, May 6, 1898 1 54 Adjourned Meeting, May 13, 1898 155 Stated Meeting, 3Iay 20, 1898 , 162 The Production of an Asphalt Resembling Gilsonite by the Distillation of a Mixture of Fish and Wood (with plate). By William C. Day 171 philadelphia : The American Philosophical Society, 104 South Fifth Street, 1898. Henry M. Phillips Prize Essay. Philadelphia, 104 South Fifth Street, April 5, 1897. THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY held at Philadelphia for Promoting Useful Knowledge has the honor to announce that an award of the Henry M. Phillips Prize will be made during the year 1899 ; essays for the same to be in the posses- sion of the Society before the first day of May, 1899. The subject upon which essays are to be furnished by competitors is : The development of the law, as illustrated by the decisions relating to the police power of the State. The essay shall not contain more than one hundred thousand words, excluding notes. Such notes, if any, should be kept sepa- rate as an Appendix. The Prize for the crowned essay will be two thousand dollars lawful gold coin of the United States, to be paid as soon as may be after the award. The Society invites attention to the regulations governing said prize, which accompany this circular. William V. McKean, Craig Biddle, Mayer Sulzberger, C. Stuart Patterson, Joseph C. Fraley, Frederick Fraley, President of the Society, Horace Jayne, M.D.,^ Ireasurer of the Society, Conwtittee on the Henry M.. Phillips Prize Essay Fund. The essays must be sent addressed to Frederick Fraley, President of the American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia. * Elected Treasurer American Philosophical Society, January 7, 1898, in place of J. Sergeant Price, Esq., deceased, August 16, 1897. RKGUIvATIONS. Competitors for the prize shall affix to their essays some motto or name fnot the proper name of the author, however), and when the essay is forwarded to the Society it shall be accompanied by a sealed envelope, containing within, the proper name of the author, and, on the outside thereof, the motto or name adopted for the essay. At a stated meeting of the Society, in pursuance of the advertisement, all essays received up to that time shall be referred to a Committee of Judges, to consist of five persons, who shall be selected by the Society from nomination of ten persons made by thf Standing Committee on the Henry M. Phillips Prize Essay Fund. 1 iv may be written in English, French, German, Dutch, Italian, Spanish or I- if in any language except English, must be accompanied by an English tr. T i\e same. or essay shall be entitled to compete for the prize that has been ! ^>r printed, or for which the author has received already any prize, piofil, or lionur, of any nature whatsoever. All pssavs mu3t be c/earij; and legibly written or printed on one side of the paper ' '"'■ ioperty of such essays shall be in their authors, subject to the right ' publish the crowned essay in its Transactions or Proceedings. AUG 2 iggs PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOE PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol. XXXVII. Januaky, 1898. No. 157. Stated Meeting^ January 7, 1898. Dr. J. 0. MoREis in the Chair. Present, 17 members. Dr. T. J. J. See and Mr. S^^dney Geo. Fisher, newly elected members, Avere presented tv. .ae Chair and took their seats. Acknowledgments of election to membership were read from Messrs. Charles De Garmo, Arnold E. Ortmann, Thomas J. J. See, Alden Sampson, Sydney George ¥isher, Benjamin Kendall Emerson, Francis L, Patton, Edward S. Holden, and Ethelbert Dndley Warfield. x\n invitation was received from the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, to participate in a memorial meet- ing commemorative of Harrison Allen, M.D., and George H. Horn, M.D., to be held at the Academy on December 31, at 8 o'clock. The Judges and Tellers of the annual election reported the following officers elected for the ensuing year : President. Frederick Fraley. Vice- Presidents. E. Otis Kendall, William Pepper, Coleman Sellers. Secretaries. Persifor Frazer, I. Minis Hays, Frederick Prime, S. P. Sadtler. Curators. J. Cheston ^[orris, Benjamin Smith Lyman, Henry Pettit. 4 ABBE — THE ALTITUDE OF THE AURORA. [Jan. 7, Treasurer. Horace Jayne. Councillors for three years. Henry C. Baird, Isaac J. Wistar, Jacob M. DaCosta. Councillor for one year^ to fill an unexpired term. Georsje F. Edmunds. Dr. I. Minis Hajs was nominated for Librarian for tlie ensuing year. Prof. Cleveland Abbe read a paper on " The Accepted Altitude of the Aurora Borealis." Mr. Sachse and Mr. Cook offered some remarks in dis- cussion. Dr. T. J. J. See presented a paper for the Transactions on " The Evolution of the Stellar Systems," which was dis- cussed by Prof. Doolittle, Prof. Sn3^der, Dr. See and Prof. Abbe. The Society was adjourned by the presiding member. THE ALTITUDE OF THE AURORA ABOVE THE EARTH'S SURFACE. BY CLEVELAND ABBE. (Mead January 7, 1S9S. ) During the past three centuries numerous observers and physicists, astronomers and magneticians have endeavored to contribute to our knowledge of the altitude of the region whence the auroral light proceeds, and still the greatest diversity of opinion seems to prevail on this subject. Some observers have seen the light in such posi- tions between themselves and neighboring objects as to demonstrate that the aurora, like the lightning, descends to the very surface of the earth and may even be entirely confined to the lowest stratum : prominent among these are Captain Parry, Sir James Clark Ross and Sir John Ross, his uncle. Dr. Walker and Prof. J. P. Lesley. Others, such as Dr. Richardson, Sir John Franklin, Silbermann, have seen it so located among the clouds that its origin must be placed at or below their level and, therefore, within a few thousand feet of the earth's surface. On the other hand, those who have calcu- 1898.] ABBE — THE ALTITUDE OF THE AURORA. 5 lated the altitudes of specific beams and arches by trigonometrical or equivalent methods have generally found figures indicating alti- tudes between twenty and a hundred miles. Perhaps the highest altitudes that have been deduced were the following : Dalton, 150 miles; Loomis, 400 to 600; Bergman, 468; Boscovich, 825; Fournerius, 1006; Twining, iioo ; Boiler, 2000 kilometers, or 1243 miles. Those who delight in numerical calculations accept these larger altitudes and content themselves with saying that the altitude of the aurora ranges from 50 miles upward to 1000. The experimental physicists, by studying the analogies between the auroral light and the discharge of electricity through vacuum tubes, have shown that the auroral phenomena harmonize in part at least with those observed in vacua such as might occur at moderate altitudes. Thus, Miller and De La Rue give altitudes of from ten to forty miles. Espy and Bache maintained that observers a few miles apart did not and could not have observed the same arches. The most care- ful observers have in many cases defended the accuracy of the observations made under circumstances that admit of no doubt that the auroral light in the free atmosphere often emanates from points within a few yards of the observer. Lemstrom has sought to reconcile the diverse conclusions by maintaining that while many auroras are quite high up and belong to the upper air, yet those in extreme northern latitudes most generally belong to the lowest strata and follow the unevenness of the ground, appearing as glows around the mountain top, or as rays directed toward prominent objects. The object of the present paper is to study some of the numerous observations, calculations and opinions bearing on the nature and the altitude of the auroral light. We shall not especially consider the electrical origin, or the source of the electricity, but simply ac- quiesce in the universal conviction that it really is one form of electrical discharge, our main object being to ascertain whether we can in any way definitely fix its locus in the atmosphere. The most instructive method of procedure consists in taking up the consideration of a number of authorities in chronological order, by which means one is led to appreciate the slow progress of knowl- edge and the difficulty which many investigators have felt, from time to time, in giving up preconceived views without having any- thing better to accept in their place. There is nothing more diffi- 6 ABBE — THE ALTITUDE OF THE AUEOEA. [Jan. 7, cult than to recognize the fact that all our ideas are wrong, and that we are wholly in the dark with regard to the nature of that which our eyes behold so plainly. How many thousands of years elapsed before modern science gave us any clue to the true nature of the rainbow, and how difficult it has been to eradicate from our text- books the crude ideas of Descartes, Huyghens and Sir Isaac Newton which made the rainbow to be a phenomenon of dispersion and substitute the correct view of Thomas Young, who showed it to be a phenomenon of interference. Possibly we must go through a similar series of changes in our views with regard to the auroral light until we recognize that each observer sees his own aurora as a so-called optical illusion. There are several forms of optical illusion that are evidently con- nected with the aurora. Some of these were recognized long since, while others are still deceiving our senses and perplexing our calculations. As we pursue our reading chronologically, among the different authorities, we shall perceive how one after another is led to suspect and fully recognize some one or other of these optical or perspec- tive illusions, while others, inattentive thereto, plunge deeper into misleading calculations. If, at the end of our consideration of the subject, we sum up all that has been shown to be probable or demonstrated to be true, we shall almost necessarily conclude that the determination of the altitude of the aurora is a much more delicate problem and perhaps also a more indefinite problem than we have hitherto believed. After reviewing the literature of the subject since the time of Halley, we find that the methods of determining the altitude of specific features of the aurora may be enumerated as follows: (i) Parallax method ; (2) Galle's first method ; (3) Galle's second method ; (4) Bravais' method of amplitudes and its modifications by Fearnley, Newton, Nordenskiold and Bergmann ; (5) Bravais' method by the apparent breadth of the arch ; (6) Bravais' velocity method ; (7) my method, by the simultaneous motion of waves at the zenith and beam.s above an arch; (8) Gyllenskiold's method, by the apparent length of the auroral beam. All these agree in one fundamental assumption, that the observed beams and arches have an individual existence and a definite locus. But this assumption is negatived by the equal frequency of negative and positive parallaxes whenever the parallax method is applied. 1898.] MINUTES. 7 The only conclusion possible is that the observers do not see the same object, partly because the aurora is too low down and partly because there are optical illusions due to alignment. We are view- ing a luminous sheet which is folded and refolded. We are also viewing a great collection of bright beams and bright pencils of light parallel to each other like the trees in a forest. Every slight change in the position of the observer alters the collective appear- ance of the pencils and the folds. The only method of determining parallaxes with any- confidence consists in requiring two or more observers to start at the same point, fixing their attention upon one feature ; separate to a short distance in opposite directions and re- turn until they have satisfied themselves that the illusions due to perspective and alignment are not sufficient to nullify the influence of parallax. Stated Meeting^ January 21^ 1898. Vice-President Sellers in the Chair. Present, l-i members. Mr. Alden Sampson, a neAvly elected member, was pre- sented to the Chair and took his seat. Acknowledgments of election to membership Ave re received from Eichard Olney, William H. Dall, Leroj^ W. McCa3\ Mr. Rosengarten read an obituary notice of the late Treas- urer, J. Sergeant Price, Esq. Dr. Hays was elected Librarian for the ensuing year. The appointment of the Standing Committees Avas referred to the President. The following papers were presented : For the Transactions : Posthumous papers of the late Dr. Harrison Allen on " The Glossophagin^e ' ' and on " The Skull and Teeth of the Ectophylla alba." ; For the Proceedings : " Specializations in the Lepidopterous Wing — Pieri- Nymphalidae," by Mr. A. R. Grote. 8 EICHARDSOX — FjUR XEW SPECIES OF ROCINELA. [Jau. 21, " Description of Four Xew Species of Rocinela, with a Synopsis of the Genus," by Miss Harriet Eicharclson. " An Old Broadside, with a Keference to the Throne of Congress," by Mr. Julius F. Sachse, which was discussed by Messrs. McKean, Kosengarten, Ilildeburn and Sellers. The meeting was adjourned by the presiding officer. DESCRIPTION OF FOUR NEW SPECIES OF ROCINELA, WITH A SYNOPSIS OF THE GENUS. BY HARRIET RICHARDSON. {Uead January 21, 1898.) I. The species of Rocinela here described were collected by the steamer Albatross, of the U. S. Fish Commission, during its various cruises in different localities. One of the species herein described comes from the Alaskan coast ; another is from the coast of Cuba, off Havana, and the third comes from the southern part of the Gulf of California. The new species exhibit unique characters not found in any other representatives. One, R. cormita, has the antero-lateral angles of the first thoracic segment extended forward on each side of the eyes, but not touching them, thus giving the head the appearance of being immersed or deeply set in this segment. Another, R. tuberculosa, presents a row of small tubercles on the posterior margin of each one of the thoracic and abdominal segments of the body. In R. cubensis, the frontal margin of the head is greatly pro- duced into a large rounded process with a concave surface. The genus Rocinela is now known to include nineteen species,^ of which nine were included in the monograph published in i88o ' A*, lilljeborgii Bovallius {Bihang Sv. Ak. Hand!., 1 885, Vol. x, No, lo, pp. 3-10, Pis, I, 2) has been referred to the genus Syscenus Harger, and identi- fied with S. injlexisy Harger's type species (G. O. Sars, "An Account of Ihe Crustacea of Norway," Vol. ii, Isopoda, Pis. in, iv, pp. 67, 68). 1898.] RICHAKDSOX — FOUR NEW SPECIES OF ROCINELA. 9 by Schioedte and Meinert,' and the others in the order hereinafter noted. R. dajimoniensis (pp. 383-389, Tab. xi, Fig. i). R. insularis (p. 390, Tab. xii, Figs. 1-3). R. diimerilii {^'^. 391-393, Tab. xii, Figs. 4-6). R. maculata (pp. 393, 394, Tab. xii. Figs. 10-12). R. amertcana (pp. 394, 395, Tab. x, Figs. 16-18). R. orientalis (pp. 395, 396, Tab. xiii. Figs, i, 2). R. australis i^"^. 397-399, Tab. xii. Figs. 13-15). R. signatci (pp. 399-401, Tab. xiii-. Fig. 3). R. aries (pp. 401-403, Tab. xiii, Figs. 7, 8). R. alaskensis (= /^ga alaskensis Lockington). '^ Description of Seventeen New Species of Crustacea," Lockington, Pro. Cal. Acad, of Sciefices, 1876, Vol. vii, Pt. i, p. 46, 1877. R. vigilans. '' On Some New Australian Marine Isopoda," W. A. Haswell, Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales, 1880, Vol. v, p. 472, PI. t6. Fig. 2. R. ociilata. " Reports on the Results of Dredging, under the Super- vision of Alexander Agassiz, on the East Coast of the United States, during the Summer of 1880, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer Blake, Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N., Com- manding," xxiii, "Report on the Isopoda," Oscar Harger, Bull. Mus. C. Z., 1883, ^^o\. ix. No. 4, pp. 97-99, PI. 3, Fig 2. R. spongiocola. " Notes on Tasmanian Crustacea with Descriptions of New Species," George M. Thomson, Papers and Proceed- ings of the Royal Society of Tasmania, 1892 (1893), pp. 57, 58, PL 3, Figs. 2>~^. R. laticauda. '* Reports on the Dredging Operations off the West Coast of Central America to the Galapagos, to the West Coast of Mexico, and in the Gulf of California, in charge of Alexan- der Agassiz, carried on by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross, during 1891, Lieut. -Commander Z. T. Tanner, U. S. N., Commanding," xxii, "The Isopoda," H. J. Hansen, Bull. Mus. C. Z., 1897, Vol. xxxi. No. 5, p. 108, PI. 3, Figs. 2, 3- R. niodesta., op. cit., p. 109. R. cornuta, sp. nov. iSymbolaead monographiani Cymothoarum, Crustaceorum, Isopodum, Fami- liae," J. C. Schioedte et Fr. Meinert, Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift, 1879 — 1880, Vol. xii, pp. 383-403, Pis. 10-13. 10 EICHARDSON — FOUR NEW SPECIES OF ROCIXELA. rJau.21, R. ciibensis, sp. nov. R. japonica, sp. nov. R. tubei'culosa, sp. nov. II. Analytic key of all the known species of Rocinela, with the addi- tion of four new species. . a. Eyes contiguous. b. Head produced into process in front . . . R. oculata Harger. b' . Head not produced into process in front. c. Flagellum of second pair of antennae as long as peduncle. . R. spo7igiocola Thomson. d . Flagellum of second pair of antennae more than twice as long as peduncle R. vigilans Haswell. a . Eyes not contiguous. b. Flagellum of second pair of antennae with 14-16 joints. c. Eyes close together. d. Head with frontal area excavated, bicarinated, front roundly produced with raised margin R. da7wioiiiensis Leach. d' . Head without median excavation, not bicarinated . . . R. insularis Schioedte and Meinert. (f . Eyes widely separated. d. Propodus of prehensile legs with two to four spines. e. First thoracic segment with antero-lateral angles pro- duced horn-like at sides of head R. cornuta, sp. nov. /. First thoracic segment normal. /. Frontal margin of head produced. g. Head tuberculated R. cubensis, sp. nov. ^ . Head not tuberculated. h. Head with frontal excavation. /. Front bicarinated. . . . R. dunierilii Leach. /'. Front not bicarinated . R. japonica, sp. nov. //. Head without frontal excavation R. modes fa Hansen. f. Frontal margin of head not produced. g. Terminal segment of body linguate ; both branches of the uropods crenulate on their exterior margins. /. 1898.] RICHARDSON — FOUR NEW SPECIES OF ROCINELA. 11 //. Spots present on both sides of the fourth thoracic segment 7?. viaculata Schioedte and Meinert. //. Spots wanting on fourth thoracic segment. i. Spots present on fourth and fifth abdominal segment and base of terminal segment. . R. alaskensis'^ (Lockington). /'. Spots wanting on fourth and fifth abdominal segments and terminal segment .... R. a7nericana Schioedte and Meinert. Terminal segment of body subtriangular ; branches of uropods not crenulate on their exterior margins . R. orientalis Schioedte and Meinert. d'. Propodus of prehensile legs with five or six spines. e. Increase in breadth of abdomen from base to fourth segment R- laticauda Hansen. /. No increase in breadth of abdomen from base to fourth segment . . , R. aiLstralis Schioedte and Meinert. b' . Flagellum of second pair of antennae with ten or eleven joints. c. Tubercles developed on all the segments of the body . . . R, tuberculosa, sp. nov. c' . No tubercles developed on body. d. Terminal segment of body ornamented with a pair of narrow semi-lunar bands separated by a longitudinal stripe R- signata Schioedte and Meinert. d'. Terminal segment of body ornamented with a very wide crescentiforrn band, from whose posterior border three large hastiform stripes project backwards. R. aries Schioedte and Meinert. ^ga belUceps Stimpson {^Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia, 1864, xvi, p. 15s) J is also undoubtedly a Rocinela and may even prove to be identical with Rocifiela alaskensis (Lockington) in which case the proper name will be Rocinela belliccps. ^ALga alaskensis Lockington {Froc. Cal. Academy of Sciences, 1876, Vol. vii, PI. i, p. 46, 1877) must be referred to the genus Rocinela, as it agrees in every respect with the characteristics of that genus. When identifying yEga alasken- sis Lockington with Rocinela, I found in conversation with Dr. Benedict that he had already recognized this relation. 12 EICHARDSOX — FOUR NEW SPECIES OF ROCINELA. [Jan. 21, III. Rocinela cornuia, sp. nov. Figs. 1,2. Length of body, two and one-quarter times its greatest breadth. Outline, oval; surface smooth, with scattered points of depression. Head subtriangular, having a medium excavation. Its frontal margin is produced forward in a long and broad projection, widely rounded at its ex- tremity, and curving upward. Eyes large and Fig. I. — Head, situated at some distance apart. The first antenna X i^' "" reaches the anterior margin of the first thoracic segment ; its flagellum contains six articles. The second antenna extends to the posterior margin of the second thoracic segment ; Its flagellum is sixteen-jointed. The thoracic segments are subequal. The antero-lateral angles of the first segment are greatly produced and extend forward a little less than half the length of the head, including the projection. These antero-lateral projections of the first segment do not follow closely the lines of the head, but rather extend out straight in a direction which is parallel to that of the frontal projection of the head. The extremities of these projections are rounded. The epimera of all the segments point downward and do not extend beyond the post-lateral angle of their respective segments with the exception of the sixth and seventh ones. The first segment of the abdomen is almost entirely covered by the seventh thoracic segment. The last segment is rounded posteriorly and is faintly crenulate. The two branches of the uropods are similar in shape and size ; the inner branch, being the longer, reaches the extremity of the abdomen. The uropods as well as the abdominal segment are furnished with hairs. The propodus of the prehensile feet is armed with three spines, Fig. 2. — a. Rocinela cor- nutay ^, slightly reduced. b. Leg of first pair, X 4. c. Leg of fourth pair, x 4- 1898.] EICHARDSOX — FOUR NEW SPECIES OF KOCIXELA. 13 Fig. 3. — Head. and three blunt ones are found oa the merus. The gressorial feet are long and slender and covered with spines. Type. — The type specimen was found off Shumagin Bank, Alaska, Station ^il'h^^ 625 fathoms (U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 20086). Roci?iela cubensis, sp. nov. Figs. 3, 4. Outline of body oval, surface smooth. Head with rounded lateral margins. Its anterior margin is \)Yo- duced forward in a large rounded projection, whose breadth is equal to its length, and whose upper sur- face is deeply concave with upturned edges. This projection extends forward for about half its length and then upward, the change in direction being gradual. Eyes large and composed of ten rows of ocelli. Two small tubercles are situated between the eyes, and in the middle of the head and back of these is an arc-shaped depression. The first antenna reaches the posterior margin of the head ; its flagellum contains six articles. The second antenna extends to the posterior margin of the third thoracic segment ; its flagellum contains fifteen articles. The thoracic segments are subequal in length. The epimera are long and narrow, with very acute posterior angles. The first segment of the abdomen is almost entirely concealed by the last thoracic seg- ment. The fifth is likewise covered at the sides by the fourth segment. The last abdominal segment is triangular in shape with a rounded posterior margin. The outer branch of the uropods is very broad and oar-shaped, with a rounded extremity. The inner branch is long and slender, of equal breadth throughout its length and rounded on its posterior margin. Tlie inner branch is the longer one. Both are fringed with hairs. In the prehensile legs of this species the basis presents a row of tubercles on its superior margin two spines on this propodus and three on the merus. sorial legs are but slightly spinulose. Fig. 4. — a. Ro cine la ctibensts, (j^, X 2^. d. Leg of first pair, X 45- ^. Leg of fourth pair, X 43- There are The gres- 14 EICHARDSON — FOUR NEW SPECIES OF ROCINELA. [Jan. 21, Fig. 5. — Head X 2i. Type. — The type specimen was found off Havana, lat. N. 23° 11', long. W. 82° 19^ 6", Station 2341, 143 fathoms (U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 20087). Rocinela laticauda, Hansen^ Fig. 5, 6. Head, with a median projection, long and broad, extending slightly downward and having a blunt extremity. Eyes large, with ten rows of ocelli. The first an- tenna, with a flagellum containing six articles, reaches the posterior margin of the head. The second antenna extends to the middle of the second thoracic segment; its flagellum contains fifteen articles. The thoracic segments are equal in length. The first is deeply bi- sinuated, its antero-lateral angles extending up the side of the head to about the middle of the eyes. The epimera of the second, third and fourth segments are rounded posteriorly; those of the remaining segments have pointed extremities. The first segment of the abdomen is almost entirely covered by the last thoracic segment. The fifth segment, as well as this one, is nar- rower than the intervening segments, and not as broad as the base of the terminal segment. The last segment is widely rounded posteri- orly and is fringed with rough hairs which almost conceal its crenulated margin ; at the base it is impressed on either side of a keeled centre ; the outer branch of the uropods is almost twice as broad as the inner branch ; they are about equal in length. Both are fringed with hairs and indistinctly crenulate. Fig. d.—a. Rocinela la- The prehensile legs are stout and short. ticauda, ^, slightly There are four spines on the propodus and reduced, b. Leg of first f][yg qj^ ^\^q merus, besides numerous hairs. I ''^4- ^- ^g o The gressorial lesrs are likewise stout and fur- fourth pair, X 4. • u ^ -.1 • ^ u • nished with spmes and hairs. 1 he description of the above species was written and the drawings made when Dr. Hansen's type specimen was returned to the U. S. Nat. Mus., and his manuscript sent to the press. As there are a few differences in the specimens, it was thought best to publish the new description. 1898.] RICHARDSON — FOUR NEW SPECIES OF ROCINELA. 15 The specimen described came from Alaska, off Unimak Island, Station 32:55, 85 fathoms (U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 20088). Distribuiion. — One specimen was found off San Luis Obispo Bay, California, Station 3195, 252 fathoms; one off Esteros Bay, California, Station 3194, 92 fathoms, and another at Puget Sound, Washington, Station 3067, 82 fathoms. The specimens from the coast of California are smaller in size and of very much lighter color than the other specimens. They are similar in other respects. Dr. Hansen's type specimen is from Acapulco, Mexico, Station 3418. It differs from the specimen herein described in the length of the second pair of antennae, which extend to the middle of the third thoracic segment, while in the specimen we have described they extend only to the middle of the second thoracic segment ; in the broader and longer terminal segment of the body, and in the in- creased number of spines on the propodus, and the decreased num- ber of spines on the merus of the prehensile legs. Rocifiela japonica, sp. nov. Fig. 7-9. Surface of body punctate and covered with black or brown dots. Color yellow, marked lightly in such a way as to present a mottled appearance. At the base of the terminal segment of the body, there are two small spots of brown, separated by a distance equal to half the width of the segment. Head subtriangular, excavated in the centre between the eyes and havingthe lateral margin in front of the eye produced into a lobe ; the extreme front being trun- cate with rounded angles and curving slightly upward. The lobe in front of the eye extends half way between the eye and the extreme front. The eyes, which are small, are separated by a distance of half the width of j^^^^ '^ ^-^^ the head. The first antenna, with a flagellum of six joints, reaches the posterior margin of the head. The second antenna, with a flagellum of fifteen joints, extends to the posterior margin of the second thoracic segment. Tlie epimera of all the segments of the thorax are acute, the pos- terior angles more rounded in the first two, but sufficiently pointed, in the remaining four. The epimera of the last two segments take a more oblique direction than the preceding ones, and extend lat- erally as far as the outer margins of the abdominal segments. The first abdominal segment is almost entirely covered. The ■posterior angles of these segments are very acute and are produced 16 RICHARDSOX — FOUR NEW SPECIES OF ROCINELA. [Jan. 21, Fig 8. — Rocinela japonica, ^, X l|^- at the sides beyond the terminal segment and the basal joints of the uropods. The terminal segment is liriguate and obscurely crenulate on its posterior margin. The internal branch of the uropods is somewhat longer than the external one, but the two are equal in width. They are both armed with spines on their outer margins. The prehensile legs are slender. There are three or four hair-like spines on the propodus and five blunt ones on the merus. The gressorial legs are likewise slender and spinulose. Of this species a single individual was found at Hakodate Bay, Japan, Station 3659, depth fifteen and a half fathoms (U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 20651). This species is closely related to R. modesta Hansen. It differs from that species in the length of the first pair of antennae, which extend only to the middle of the last joint of the peduncle of the second pair of antennas, while in R. modesta Han- sen they extend a little beyond the peduncle of the second pair of antennae ; in the greater develop- ment of the lateral margin of the head in front of the eye into lobes ; in the excavation in the frontal area of the head ; in the extreme front being directed upward ; in the number of spines on the Fig. 9. — Leg of first merus of the prehensile legs, five spines being pair, X 3. Leg of characteristic in our species, three or four in Dr. ^ ^' ^' Hansen's species ; in the markings on the surface of the body of small black dots and the presence of two larger spots at the base of the terminal segment of the body. Rocinela tuberculosa, sp. nov. Fig. 10. Surface of body punctate and marked with small black dots. The posterior margin of each of the tho- racic and abdominal segments is lined with a row of tiny tubercles, above which is a row of small black dots. Head subtriangular, rounded in front. Eyes large and situated at a distance of one-third of the head apart. The first antenna, with a flagellum of five articles, reaches the posterior margin of the head ; the second vela tiibercii- antennae extends to the posterior margin of the second o^ci,^, X 2y. thoracic segment; its flagellum contains eleven articles. Fig. 10. — Rod 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 17 The posterior margin of all the thoracic segments is edged with a row of small tubercles. The epimera are narrow, those of the second, third and fourth segments being rounded at the top, while those of the last three segments are more acute. The first abdominal segment is entirely concealed by the last thoracic segment. The second, third, fourth and fifth segments are likewise edged with a row of small tubercles. The last segment is widely rounded. The outer branch of the uropods is somewhat narrower and shorter than the inner one and is rounded at its extremity. The inner one is bluntly rounded. Both are fringed with hairs, and on their exterior margins are armed with spines. The prehensile legs have three long, stout spines on the merus and two on the propodus. The gressorial legs are covered with spines. Two individuals of this species were found in the southern part of the Gulf of California, at Station 2824, eight fathoms, type (U.S. Nat. Mus., No. 20652), and Station 2828, ten fathoms. SPECIALIZATIONS OF THE LEPIDOPTEROUS WING ; THE PIERI-NYMPHALID^. (Plates I-III.) BY A. RADCLIFFE GROTE, A.M. {Read January 21, ISOS.) An immediate incentive to the present study is the statement, in Evolution and Taxonomy, that we find, in the Nymphalidae, '^an even greater specialization of the wings than exists in the Pieridae." It may be premised that Prof. Comstock's classification unites in one family two seemingly distinct types under the term Nymphalidae. Also that the neurational character given in the more recently issued '' Manual" of the same author for the Pieridae would exclude the Leptidian^. The two wing types of the Nymphalidae of Mr. Scudder and Prof. Comstock overlap. The Nymphalidae proper, as I would limit the family, have vein iii^ of the fore wings thrown off upon the external margin below apices through- out all the leading groups. But in the Fritillaries, which seems to be the most generalized group, there are genera, like Euptoieta, in which this vein reaches the apex, as in all the other brush- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXXVII. 157, A. PRINTED MAY 17, 1898. 18 GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. [Jau. 21, footed butterflies. But, commonly, we can tell a Nymphalid from a Satyrid by this character. Again, on the hind wings, the Nym- phalidae proper show vein ivg entirely joined to the cubitus, and not issued from the cross-vein. In the Limnadidae, Heliconidae and Agapetidae, which appear to form another branch of the "brush-footed" group of butterflies, this latter condition of vein ivg is only reached in a small group of specialized Satyrids, the Pararginae. This character is plainly secondary, one which might occur independently in diff'erent groups not immediately phylo- genetically connected. The specializations of the lepidopterous wing, here chiefly considered, are visible among what I have called the "movable veins " and cannot be relied upon as decisive in general phylogeny. Their study leads to an arrangement of genera and species, in most cases upon a more positive basis, by supplying us with a gauge by which we may distinguish the younger from the older form. The norm by which these specializations are apprehended lies in the principle we have already set forth : the amount of the absorption is the measure of the specialization. The two principal directions in which the specialization is manifested are: i. the suppression of the media, common to both wings, and 2. the suppression of the branches of the radius, confined to the fore wings in most Lepidoptera and occurring sporadically. The latter is probably reminiscent of that action which has completed its task upon the hind wings of such Lepi- doptera which have the radius already reduced to a single un- branched vein.^ Nomenclature. The application of literary terms to structural groups, wider in extent than specific, has become uncertain through the publication of varying and subjective opinion. It has, therefore, become neces- sary to associate the generic title with a single specific type, ascer- tained by historical methods, in order to go safely. The failure to employ the name of the genus in this manner renders Mr. Renter's recently published volume at times unintelligible. The same remark applies to Dr. Chapman's admirable paper on butterfly 1 Consult, " Mittheilungen a. d, Roemer Museum," 8, February, 1897; "The Hind Wings of the Day Butterflies," Can. Ent., 29, 174; also several other papers more recently issued. 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 19 pupae, where exactly what is meant by the terms ^'Satyrus, Epine- phele, Hipparchia," does not appear {Entom. Record, vi, 152). So far as the diurnals are concerned the authority I recognize is Mr. Scudder's Historical Sketch, Salem, 1875. Since, in exceptional cases, this work has been seemingly properly corrected and even in one case by the author himself, a republication up to date would be one of the most grateful of literary helps to the systematist, to whom it is a matter of comparative indifference what term he uses so that it is correct and exactly conveys his meaning, while it should be one necessarily understood. Since the difference between genera and spe- cies is quantitative, the limitations of the former will be always more or less a matter of opinion. As matters are now and unless a standard is recognized, the object of nomenclature will be defeated so far as generic titles used by themselves are concerned. Both to give greater endurance to his work and to make it a useful addition to generic definitions extant in literature, the systematist might confine his studies to species used for generic types as far as possible and neglect those not yet so favored. To locate and compare genera their types need alone be considered ; by clearly explaining the structure of these incidental help will be afforded to reach an approximative agreement as to the limitation of generic groups. Generic terms should always have the same meaning attached to them, and this meaning can only be derived from the structure of their types. I remember that Moeschler, disputing the validity of the genera allied to Smerinthus and wishing to discredit minute generic differentiation, asked triumphantly. To what genus, then, do the hybrids between species belonging to these different allied genera belong? A little reflection might have led him to ask the question also. And to what species ? For although, to Moeschler, a genus would seem to have constituted a fixed quality, yet it is seen not to be so and that the genus idea is an extension of the species idea, and both ideal categories having a relative being without sharp outlines. In the formation of generic categories the idiosyncrasy of the describer comes easier to the surface, as in Mr. Scudder's genera ; but for the purposes of the systematist these are as good as any, and better than most ; all that is wanted being a certain name attached to a certain thing. The describers of species are the avant couriers of the systematists, one no more useful than the other, and any adverse criticism of the former class, who throw the first light upon our darkness, must be due to a lack of thought and considera- 20 GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. [Jan. 21, tion. Nomenclature itself belongs to letters and is part of the machinery which biologists must use to work with. And we may remember here the fact that we possess no entire and satisfactory definition for the term i?tdividual as used in biology. So that it perhaps naturally follows that we are at a loss to define adequately groups or associations of which the individual forms the unit. The following notes explain the changes made by me in The Nomenclature of the Pieri-Nymphalid^. Agapetidce. — I use this term instead of Satyridae because the generic title Satyrus Latreille is preoccupied (Scudder, /. ^., 265), and is properly replaced by the title Agapetes Bilberg, 1820 (/. c, 104), with the same type, A. galathea. It is impossible to separate the name of a higher group from that of the genus upon which it is based. If Satyrus properly falls then Satyridae must also go. But the type of Satyrus remains and the new generic title of this type by natural right replaces the old title in all its various modifications. It appears that the more modern title Satyrid^ replaces the Satyri of older authors who antedate the Tentamen in the use of a plural form, thus in recognizing a group or family in our sense. In addi- tion the term Oreas (Oreades) used by Hiibner in 1806 is itself pre- occupied. So that the claim of Agapetidae to designate the family, with Agapetes galathea as its type, seems indisputable. Arge of Esper and also of Hiibner would be preoccupied by Schrank (/. c, 117). LimiiadidcB.—'Y\\^ earliest plural form applied particularly to a member of this group is Limnades of Hiibner, 1806, based upon Li7nnas chrysippiis as type. This must, therefore, replace the term Danaidae of modern writers, a term based upon the later Danaus {ptex- ippus) of Latreille, 1809, for which Scudder proposes to retain Dan- aidaof the same author of 1805 (/. c, 153), perhaps disputably, since Latreille's change seemed warranted at that time. Once a synonym always a synonym. In any case the modern Danaidse cannot claim any connection directly with the JDanaifesiivi, etc., of Linne, since that group had no legal standing ; no genus of that name upon which it could be based having been published. Cuvier's similar use of " Danai " included also the Pieridce (/. c, 154), and, there- fore, Limnadidse has a clear right to recognition. N. B. — I take the opportunity here to change my term Capis to Capisella since there is an earlier genus, Capys of Hewitson, which 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 21 interferes (Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc, xxxiv, 434). I also resume my name for Lomanaltes Icsiulus, since from the description it must be that Mr. Walker's species differs. General Descriptions. These are limited to the holarctic fauna, of which the principal genera appear to have been examined. There remain, however, several types I have been unable to obtain. Pieridce. Pierina. — Primary wings, specialization by suppression of the media : Traces of the base of the media in the shape of scars I have found in Eurymus and Callidryas. In Colias rhavini, a mimetic form springing evidently from the same line, I fail to find the least impression. Backward spurs occur in Aporia and faint traces in Callidryas. The cell nowhere completely opens. The cross-vein becomes partially degenerate in a number of instances. In all the genera yet examined, vein iv^ , the upper branch of the media, leaves the cross-vein and is given off, outside of median cell, from the lower branch of radius. This character I only find again on the hind wings of Nemeobius. The middle branch of media leaves cross-vein above the middle and is radially inclined. Primary wings, suppression of radial branches : End forms of spe- cialization in this direction are offered by Mancipium, Pontia and Nathalis, where the five branches are reduced to three. The bulk of the forms: Pieris, Eurymus, Colias, Callidryas, Eurema, etc., are four-branched. As yet I find only certain of the Anthocharini, therefore the more generalized group, five-branched. Secondary wings, suppression of media : Taking the homologies as given, the vein iv^ assumes function and position of iiij on pri- maries; usually the piece between its base and the issuance of iiig from radius must be reckoned to cross-vein. The inauguration of the movement of the movable veins appears to take place on sec- ondaries generally, since in a number of Lepidoptera vein ivo re- mains central on primaries, while on secondaries of same wings it inclines radially or cubi tally. As on primaries, the cross- vein nowhere disappears in the Pierinse and the cell remains closed. Other features of specialization by absorption of veins : On pri- maries, vein viii is present, either as a scar or, in some instances, as an apparently functional, ''tubular" vein. It takes the aspect of a short, oblique, more or less rigid piece, running from vein vii to internal angle. It has usually lost here the appearance of being 22 GEOTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEEOUS WING. [Jan. 21, originally a longitudinal vein rooting in base of wing and, as in the Limnadidae, appears more as a ^pporting strap. However, in Terias, where it is reduced, it assumes nearly the loop-like shape. The minute study of this vein is a matter of some difficulty. The appearance of vein viii in the Hesperiadae corresponds essentially with that in the Sphingidae and Saturniades, where it has the loop- like shape. These quaiititative changes are probably correlated with mechanical function. On the secondaries of the Pieridae, there are but slight differences in the amount of absorption of veins ii and iii at base ; on the whole, the absorption is small and herein is the wing generalized. Vein i, the so-called ''prascostal spur,'^ is usually present ; it vanishes in the Eurymini and in Colias (Gonepteryx); it may be seen in Callidryas. There is no equality of specialization, no exact and equal step in all these instances and the position of a genus or group can here not be assigned with cer- tainty from any one character. Better, as a guide, is the radial specialization on primaries^ where it may be laid down as an axiom that the five-branched forms cannot possibly have been derived from the three or four-branched, and that they are consequently descendants of older types and clearly more generalized insects. But neither may we group all the three or four-branched species to- gether, since these specializations are reached upon what are other- wise evidently independent phylogenetic lines, in all cases neces- sarily succeeding a five-branched ancestor. Thus the three-branched Pontia is clearly an offspring from the five-branched Anthocharini ; the three-branched Nathalis is more immediately connected with the four-branched Terias and Eurema. LeptidiancB. — So different is this butterfly and so isolated its present position, that we must almost leave it out of sight in dis- cussing the specialization of the Whites. The suppression of the media is nearly limited to the extinction of the basal portion. The position of vein ivo is central, or very nearly so, on fore wings, cubital on hind wings; we have here an exceptional parallelism with Papilio. The radius is generalized, five-branched. No trace of vein viii appears on fore win^s. The median cells are small, re- treating; the veins long. In comparison with the other whites, the wings are in a generalized state, but the chances are that in Leptidia (Leucophasia) we have a survival of what was a more extended group at one period and that the generalization is strictly relative. The disappearance of vein viii points in this direction. 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALTZAT.IOXS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS^WIXG. 23 A feature of generalization is offered by ii and iii of secondaries which appear completely separate. NymphalidcB. — This term is used in a restricted sense, equivalent to the Nymphalina; of Comstock, or typical Nymphalids, apparently taken from Scudder. Nymphalince. — Characterized by the position of i, ii and iii, of hind wings, which spring from one point owing to the fact that ii and iii are absorbed or fused up to the origin of i, which remains nearly constant in all the butterflies examined. This character is secondary in its nature and I have not yet studied the phylog- eny of the genera fully. In this subfamily the suppression of the media reaches its widest extent and is only paralleled again in the Attacinae. In the most specialized forms the cell entirely opens, all trace of the cross-vein vanishes on both wings. Vein ivo be- comes radial. Vein ivi leaves upper angle of cell and does not fuse with radius. ArgynnificB. — Characterized by the fusion of ii and iii on hind wings not attaining the point of origin of i. No taxonomical features of neuration clearly define the minor groups, which are generally bound together by steps in the grade of specialization shown in the gradual suppression of the media. The "Goat Weed Butterflies " belong probably to the Charaxinse, a specialized form having lost the '' long fork " through absorption, but are not so specialized as the Nymphalinae or ''Purples," as might be inferred by their position in Comstock's Manual. In this work, as well as Mr. Scudder's, the sequence, as based on a specialization of the wings (and no other characters or class of characters allow of such fine distinction) is irregular. In the Check List of Dr. Skinner (1891) the disarrangement is nearly complete. AgapefidcB {'idXynd^e). — Wings (except in the Pararginae) as in Pieridae, but vein viii of fore wings entirely absent ; vein iii4 of fore wings to apex. The veins in many forms show a secondary sexual character in the enlargement of vein ii, the cubitus, or vii at base in male. This character is indicated in the Nymphalidae, in Potamis and some Fritillaries and in the Ager. ParargincB. — The cross-vein of hind wings, or its traces, joins the cubitus ; in other words the union of vein ivg with cubitus is complete, since this branch of the media has left the cross-vein. Here there is, in this apparently restricted group, a complete paral- lelism with the Nymphalidae, from which the butterflies differ by 24 GROTE — SPECIALIZATIOXS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WIXG. [Jan. 21, the position of vein iii^ of fore wings. Cross-vein degeneral e between iva and ivj or cubitus, as might be expected, on hind wings, while on fore wings the specialization has not proceeded so far. Genera : Pararge and Lasiommata. AgapetincB (Type : Agapetes galatliea). — Vein ivg of hind wings springs from cross-vein as in Pieridse and next two succeeding fami- lies. All the North American genera I have yet examined (but many remain), and most European Satyrids belong here. The cross-vein is partially degenerate, but as long as vein ivg keeps its position and does not fuse with cubitus this may not here disap- pear. Vein i of hind wings varies in expression and, almost van- ishing in Coenonympha, is quite absorbed in Pyronia. It is diminished in Cercyonis. Probably its study may give us a better arrangement of the European forms. In Eumenis it terminates squarely as in the Parargin^e, and again in Nymphalis. In the other genera it is pointed. Owing to the inequality and slight nature of the specializations in the Agapetin^, it will require a minute and patient comparison to straighten them out. Any rough classi- fication or sequence attempted on "general principles" must be always nearly valueless. CEneis is evidently a generalized form. HeliconidcB. — Study of the type : Heliconiiis antiochus. As in all the " brush-footed " butterflies, the radius on fore wings is in a five-branched generalized state, while iv^ springs from upper corner of median cell. Cells completely closed, the cross-vein merely thinning a little below iv^. No trace of vein viii, hence more specialized than Limnadid^e and agreeing with Agapetido^. Vein ivj nearly central, a little radially inclined on fore wings and con- siderably more so on hind wings, where the cell is small, retreating, the veins long. Vein i determinate, pointed. The radius of fore wings is more specialized than in Limnas, where \\\^ leaves the stem opposite cross-vein. Here vein iii._, arises beyond the cell. A more generalized wing than that of the Agapetidce, more distinctly a Limnad type. All traces of the base of media disappeared ; no trace of backward spurs from cross- vein. LtmnadidcB. — Study of the type : Limnas chrysippus. On the five-branched radius of primaries vein iii.^ springs from a point oppo- site cross-vein. Vein viii on fore wings present strongly developed. Veins strong ; cells closed ; a backward spur from cross-vein on fore wings opposite iv._,, the position of which is central. On hind wings this vein is slightly radial. Vein i of hind wings imperfectly 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 25 fused with radius at base ; cross-vein angulate. The curious stigma below v., is attended by a rounded retreat of the vein, which is here slightly swollen. On comparing this type with that of Heliconius it is seen to be the more generalized. To separate Danaus from Limnas we must encroach apparently upon specific characters. Libytheidce. — Vein iii^ to costa before apex ; cross-vein partially degenerate ; vein iv_, on primaries central, on secondaries radial ; vein viii of fore wings strongly developed as in Limnadidae. Outline similar to Polygonia. On secondaries the cross- vein reaches vein ivg just immediately before cubitus. Specialization here almost like the Pararginae. This isolated group, with its strongly devel- oped labial palpi, cannot be referred to the stem of the Nymphalidae proper (in sensu iniJii) on account of the position of iii4 and the presence of viii of primaries. It must be referred back on an in- dependent line to the matrix from which the "brush-footed" but- terflies originally sprang. It is now a specialized form as is seen by the extent of absoption of ii and iii, on hind wings, to the point of issuance of i, thus equaling the Pararginae. NemeobiidcB. — Not a typical *' brush-foot," but with the fore feet reduced in the male on the Riodinid type. Special examinations of this structure are needed to bring out the points clearly. Wings of the Pieri-Nymphalid pattern, not of the Lycseni-Hesperid. Radius five-branched, generalized. It is thus impossible to bring the butterfly into the Lycseni-Riodinid series in which the radius is specialized, three to four-branched, while the other neurational features contradict the supposition that it could represent a gener- alized type of the series. The neuration runs parallel with Liby- thea and the resemblances lie between this butterfly and Pieris. Vein iii4 seems to join costa just before apex. Cross-vein entire, cells closed; "on fore wings vein ivo is central, on hind wings radial. Vein viii of primaries seems to be degenerate and I represent it by dots in my original figure. Subsequent studies lead me to believe it wholly or partially tubular. Veins ii and iii of secondaries at base fused nearly to point of issuance of i, hence nearly as special- ized as Libythea, much more so than in any Riodinid or Lycaenid yet examined. When writing my original paper (in 1896) I failed to note that the family Nemeobiidse had been recognized, though I have found no description and the study of the neuration seems to have been neglected. To unite this butterfly with the Lycaeni- Hesperid branch appears to me a physiological impossibility. It 26 GROTE— SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEKOUS WING. [Jan. 21, must rather be relegated to a distinct line, running parallel with the Libytheid^e and leading to the main stem of the Hesperiades. Its affinity with the Pieridae is marked by the position of iv^, which,, on secondaries, has left the upper angle of cell and is fused with the radius to a point much beyond the median cell, as in the Pieri- nae. Since there is a parallelism in the specialization between the Lycaenid group and the Pieridae in the reduction of the radial branches, a further parallelism might be made to account for this, especially as on primaries vein ivi is fused with radius as in the Theclinae. But this will not explain the position of vein iiig on exter- nal margin, the radial position of iv2 and the more unequal spacing. We might appeal to the imperfection of the geological record and conjure up extinct and intermediate series ; but, independent of the fact that such flights of the imagination would lead us nowhere and would excuse even the arrangements proposed by Mr. Meyrick, we cannot do away with the main difficulty, that the wing of Nemeo- bius is developed upon the Pieri-Nymphalid pattern and that we should not logically graft it upon the Lycaeni-Hesperid. The radius is also generalized, five-branched and cannot be derived from a three to four-branched group, which it should have preceded. But the five-branched Hesperiadae are formed upon another pattern and could hardly have given rise to Nemeobius. The five-branched Hesperiadae have most plainly produced the three to four-branched Riodinidae and Lycaenidae. The wing of the latter is just what we might expect from a reduction of the radial branches of Hesperia. The conclusion we may come to is, that we should seek for the origin of Nemeobius in an independent line, and that the structure of the fore feet has been probably independently acquired. There is no difficulty in this, since aborted fore feet are also characteristic of cer- tain moths belonging to the Hypeninae, notably of Pallachini bivittata Grt. There seems ro be a latent tendency in this direc- tion whicli has broken out strongly in the day butterflies. General Comparisons. Before entering upon any comparison as to the amount of speciali- zation in the Pieridae and the ^' brush-footed " butterflies (^Nym- phalid^e of Scudder and Comstock) it will be well to get a mental picture of the neuration of the Pieri-Nymphalid^e as a whole. This can best be obtained by contrasting it with that of an allied wing group in the same structural series, the Lycaeni-Hesperidae. Inde- 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 27 pendent of relative breadth or shape of wing we have in the latter a simpler pattern, the veins more equidistant, an indisposition to fuse and furcate shown by the retention of a central position by vein ivj ; so that as the suppression of the media takes its course this branch tends to degeneration in situ, from resisting the attraction of either radius or cubitus. As opposed to this we have a willingness in the Pieri-Nymphalidae to preserve vein iv.,, which latter tends every- where to become radial, except in the isolated case of Leptidia, where it becomes cubital. We have a spreading of the veins and abundant traces of unequal specialization. Except in the lycaenid reduction of the radial branches, the Lyc?eni-Hesperiad^ offer few neurational changes to aid our formation of classificatory categories ; the Pieri-Nymphalidse plenty. United by the presence of the loop- ing vein viii, or its traces unequally expressed and sometimes quite vanished, the Hesperiades offer in this way two groups characterized by the peculiar neurational wing pattern ; giving us also an instance of parallelism in specialization, in that the Pieridae sustain an analogous position with regard to the ''brush-footed" butterflies (Nymphalid?e, etc.), to that the Riodinid-Lycsenids show with re- spect to the Hesperids or ''Skippers." In both these groups the reduction of the radius takes place; the Pierids still showing phases embracing and intermediate between the five 'and three-branched radius, while no five-branched Lyc?enid is yet known to me. Thus the gap in the Lycaeni-Hesperiadse between the subgroups is greater than that between the subgroups of the Pieri-Nymphalidae. But the fact that the reduction of the radial branches has been indepen- dently taken up by the two main wing groups of the Hesperiades comes clearly out. I have been unable to find any characters which will always distinguish the neuration of the Hesperiades from the moths. Not so with the Parnassi-Papilionidae, a distinct major division entirely left out of sight in the present studies. Having thus endeavored to trace the outlines of the neuration of the Pieri-Nymphalidae as a whole and to enable the reader to grasp more or less fully the wing structure of this waste of butterflies, we may more in detail compare the wings of the " Whites " with those of the other butterflies in their group. That the radius is special- ized in the Pieridae and generalized in all the other families is the first and obvious difference, one which strikingly throws the bal- ance of specialization to the side of the " Whites." So that in this direction of secondary specialization, which the Pieridae share with 28 GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. [Jan. 21, the Parnassiinae, the Riodini-Lycsenidse, as well as the Saturniades among the moths, the "brush-footed " butterflies (Nymphalidae of Scudder and Comstock) as well as the Nemeobiidse have no share and are ho7's de concurs. We now come to the direction of the suppression of the media. Herein the Pierid^ lag behind the Nymphalidae {in sensu mihi') with one remarkable exception in the position of vein ivi, the upper branch of the media, which ascends the radius (iiis) to a point beyond the cell, a character repeated only on the hind wings of Nemeo- bius. In all the ''brush-footed" butterflies this vein never leaves the cross-vein at the extreme upper corner of the median cell. Though the latter open and the disappearance of the media by the distribution of its branches between radius and cubitus become complete, still vein ivi never fuses directly with the radius. Did it do so its passage to a point beyond the cell in the process of specialization might be logically expected to follow. What power is it which keeps this vein apart, even in Nymphalis and Potamis, where, in the latter especially, the approximation is carried out so completely? Undoubtedly all these retained and abandoned posi- tions for the veins indicate the action of the dynamical force which fits the wing for variations in the mode of flight. The field observa- tions which are compared with the structure of the wings are as yet scanty in the extreme. I have only brought the opening of the cell and the radial position of iv., into a probable relation with a lofty and sailing flight, a tree life like that led by Potamis iris or Philo- samia cynthia. The passage of ivi along iiig does not seem to help the wing to extended flights. We find it again in the moths, in the Smerinthinae and Citheroniadae. The bunching of the two upper branches of the media near the radius at this point seems, on the other hand, to strengthen the primaries. As these veins are retired from the radius and retain their original generalized position on the cross-vein, closing the cell, so does a more modest terrestrial habit of flight seem to prevail ; so that it seems probable that the Lepi- doptera were not originally high flyers, and that those which now disport among the tree tops are the latest arrivals on their respective and differing lines of phylogenetic descent. To return to our immediate subject, the comparison of the special- izations of the Pieridas and Nymphalidae proper. So far as the sup- pression of the media is concerned, the advantage of the Nympha- lidae is quite clear when the most specialized forms are compared, but 1898.] GHOTE — SPECIALIZATION'S OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 2^ even when we descend to the '' Fritillaries," where the cell of fore wings closes and vein ivj becomes quite central, the superiority is kept up. For everywhere on the hind wings of the Nymphalidoe does the lowest branch of the media, vein iv,,, completely fuse with the cubitus. The cross-vein above it is always very weak, and even vanishes in Araschnia, Melitcea or Euptoieta. Leaving the two principal directions in which the movable veins show the effects of specialization, we can compare the Pieridae and Nymphalidce upon other points. The most important of these is the fusion of ii and iii upon the hind wings at base. Here the Nymphalidas continue their advantage. In the Nymphalinae the absorption extends even to the point of issuance of i, and this mea- sure is attained in the most specialized of the Agapetid?e or " Meadow Browns," the Pararginae. In the mass of the Nympha- lidas this excess is not reached and the point of absorption falls varyingly short. But still it is always carried to a further point than in the PieridjE, where the union is very brief and apparently quite wanting in Leptidia. This character is plainly secondary and cannot of itself determine the phylogeny. Again, the amount of ab- sorption of i may be compared, a vein which is relatively constant in its position upon ii, from which it issues. It did not always probably do so, for I have observed in Papilio, Zerynthia (=:Thais) and Par- nassius, the process by which it has come to be fused with ii, and in the present group traces of its independence may be found in the Limnads or " Milk Weed " butterflies. In the Pieridae this vein i, the so-called ^'praecostal spur," tends to be absorbed and disap- pears in Eurymus (Colias) and Colias (Gonepteryx). Here the parallelism in specialization with the ''Blues" is continued. But in the Nymphalid?e it appears everywhere to be strong and well-de- veloped ; it is here more generalized. Evidently the strong flight continued to call for a strengthening of the shoulder of the secondary wings. In the fiutterings of the ''Whites," the "Meadow Browns," the "Blues," this need was not so felt and the vein would tend to disappear. So much we may say in comparing the Pieridae with the Nym- phalidce proper, and we may pass more quickly over our comparisons of the " Whites " with the remaining families of " brush-footed " butterflies, the " Nymphalidse " of Scudder and Comstock. After we leave the Pararginae, the scale of specialization comes to a stand- still or turns gradually against the latter. In the Agapetinse, con- 80 GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. [Jan. 21, taining the mass of holarctic forms of the *' Meadow Browns," the lower branch of the media on the hind wings no longer fuses with the cubitus, but, as in the Pieridae, springs from the cross-vein, the piece between this branch and the cubitus varying in length, and by so much marking here the grade of specialization. Except that vein viii of primaries seems to have been entirely absorbed in the Aga- petidae, it becomes difficult to distinguish their wings from the Whites. In both groups the position of the radial branches is similar. In the male sex the Agapetids show very frequently a bladder-like swelling at the base of ii, iii and vii of primaries, or the swelling may be confined more or less to the first-mentioned veins. In Agapetes it seems confined to ii ; I do not find it in my preparations of Oeneis aello, of which, however, I am uncertain as to the sex. It is a secondary sexual specialization, of which traces occur also in the Nymphalidae. Like the Pierids, the Meadow Browns tend to lose vein i of secondaries by absorption ; I believe, on the whole, that Pyronia represents the most specialized form. The amount of fusion of ii and iii at base still continues greater as against the Pieridae, but hardly holds its own in comparison with the Argyn- ninas. In the Morphinae, which appear to me to be specialized Agapetidae, the cell opens on hind wings, but remains closed on primaries. They resemble thus the Pararginae at present rather than the Agapetinae, and have sprung apparently from the latter. Else, in our holarctic forms, the cell does not open on either wing, while it becomes, in the specialized forms, partially degenerate. In the Heliconidae and Limnadidae the generalization makes itself more and more evident. The strong veining, closed cells, central position of ivo all tell against them. Heliconius still lacks vein viii of primaries, but in Limnas it is stronger than in any Pierid. At the close Libythea recovers somewhat of the lost terri- tory, but this isolated butterfly, difficult to intercalate in a sequence, cannot probably alter the average result. Taking this all in all, we must find I believe that the excess of specialization in the direction of the suppression of the media, and in the subsequent points here explained, on the part of the brush-footed butterflies, as a whole, cannot outweigh the absence of specialization by reduction of the branches of the radius ; seeing also that only in one family, the typical Nymphalids, is that specialization of the media carried to an excess. We have also the difficulty of estimating the morphological value of the shifting of vein ivi in the Pieridae. While we cannot 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 31 thus assent to the conclusion expressed by Prof. Comstock in Evo- lution and Taxono?ny, that we find in the Nymphalidae an even greater specialization of the wings than exists in the Pieridae, we admit that the point of view from which this is regarded may influ- ence any conclusion, while the unequal presentation of the changes in the wings renders a just weighing of the differences a matter of some difficulty. It will be sufficient for my present purpose if the impression left on the mind of the reader is that rank is a relative conception and that it is owing to the constitution of our minds that we, are impelled to string one natural object after another, while we are apt to fortify a classificatory preference for a special group out of several lying nearly abreast, by reasons which, suffi- ciently telling as far as they go, are apt to reflect only one side of a complex subject, I think, then, we may believe that the specializa- tion of the " brush-footed " butterflies is more apparent in the feet than in the wings, and that, if we are not inclined to give them pre- eminence on that account in our sequences, we shall not be induced to do it upon the statement of Prof. Comstock herein discussed and illustrated. Phylogenetic Lines Among Pierid Genera. I have previously shown that coincidence in the number of the radial branches in reduction does not determine common descent, but that a three-branched condition of the originally five-branched radius has been reached independently, not only in different fami- lies, but on different generic lines within the same group. It may be assumed that three-branched species, differing otherwise unes- sentially, are correctly associated by this character ; but to use this character anywhere alone for taxonomic purposes, or to assign it a commanding value, would be plainly to go wrong. It is probable, for instance, that the three-branched radius correctly indicates that the species of Thecla (^in sensu iniht, with the type given by Scud- derj are monophyletic and that the four-branched Zephyrini stand, at least constructively, as representing the original condition of their ancestors. Under these views we may sort out several different lines of prob- able descent in the holarctic Pieridae, in which the examples of extreme reduction have been independently developed. It is clear, since nature does not proceed by jumps, that the missing stages between the five-branched ancestors and the three-branched de- 82 GEOTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEKOUS WING. [Jau. 21, scendants have existed and that forms, which have retained the ini- termediate character and thus represent an earlier condition, may yet be found and correctly identified. So that we must seek out forms whose main disparity consists in their respective state of specialization of the wings. Referring to the accompanying phylogenetic table, we may com- mence our brief study with the so-called ''Yellows." In Eury- mus (Colias) the second branch of the radius has passed from its normal position before to one removed beyond the cross-vein. In Meganostoma this branch has only progressed to a point opposite the cross-vein. Clearly, Eurymus is the more specialized and younger form since this passage of iiia along the main branch of the radius is one indicated on different phylogenetic lines and is evi- dently a phase of general process by which the radial branches are reduced in number. The normal five-branched radius has this branch, following iiii, before the cross-vein. Under this view Meganostoma is the representative of the primitive form of Eury- mus. The '' dog's head " pattern has probably yielded to the ter- minal band, straightly margined and the reappearance of the ''dog's head" in species of Eurymus is due to "reversion." In other words, such species are the more generalized. But, while in the type, hyale, the distance which the vein iiij has traveled is a considerable one, it is much reduced in another species, edusa}, which is more generalized in this way than E. hyale. From the multiplicity of species of Eurymus, especially in North America, it is not improbable that intermediate grades occur uniting the ex- tremes E. hyale and M. ccesonia. I have not yet found them and Eurymus is yet separable from Meganostoma on this character. For purposes like the present study it is immaterial, so far as the use of the two generic names is concerned, whether such forms are found or not. The systematist needs both terms to designate dif- ferent grades of specialization. The change in pattern involves a loss of black and not improbably does there exist a tendency, in the direction of specialization, to lose this and perhaps other darker colors upon the same immediate lines. It is hardly probable that Callidryas is on the direct line of Eury- mus, but it represents, in the holarctic fauna, an ancestral phase of development. It has the same four-branched radius, but vein 1 Mr. Mey rick's figure of ediisa (^Handbook ^ 35o) is too inaccurately drawa to be of service. 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 33 iiij has not moved at all from the original position within the cell. It is thus more generalized than either of its associates. From Callidryas-like ancestors may rather have sprung the curious form Colias rhatn?ii, belonging to the genus Rhodocera, or again Gonep- teryx of authors, but, according to Scudder, wrongly so referred. In this genus in which the wings have probably been transformed by mimicry to copy the shape of a leaf, vein iii.^ keeps its original place of exit before the cross-vein ; consequently it cannot have been derived from forms among which this vein was shifting. It must have been thrown off before Meganostoma-like forms appeared and probably Callidryas represents very nearly its direct line of descent. It is more specialized than Callidryas, not only in the remarkable shape of its wings, but because it has lost by absorption vein i of hind wings, the '' praecostal spur" of some writers, which is still retained by Callidryas. The specialization runs in this respect parallel with the branch Eurymus-Meganostoma. In the latter genus a remainder of the vanishing vein i is to be seen which has become lost in Eurymus. The specialization on this phylo- genetic line of the typical '' Yellows " has not apparently developed a three-branched descendant, at least in the holarctic fauna, and so far as my studies now go. Nor have I yet found the five-branched generalized form, which might represent its more remote ancestry. Turning to the next line of non-typical "Yellows," the Euremini, we find the three-branched descendant reached in Nathalis. This form has evidently emerged from four-branched ancestors, represented in America by Eurema and Terias, forms which so very nearly agree that I am even at a loss to distinguish them. I make out vein viii of primaries to be quite distinct and relatively strong in Terias, and conclude this may be the sub- speciahzed form of the two. I cannot now connect this line with the typical *' Yellows," and its ancestry must be apparently sought for in more southern regions. We will now take up the '' typical Whites." The three-branched condition is attained by Mancipmin brassicce. Here the little remain- ing branchlet iii34.4 of Pieris has at last vanished. But the vein iii3+4^5 in which it has lost itself is a little bent at this place. I should not wonder if examples of the "large Cabbage White " might be found retaining some trace of this vanished veinlet. In Pieris I have examined rapcE and napi, while Prof. Comstock's beautiful figure of protodice appears to agree (yEvoluiio)i and Taxono?ny, PI. ii. Fig. 3). PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXXVII. 157. C. PRINTED MAY 18, 1898. 34 GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. [Jan. 21, In all these the little vein iiis^.^ remains distinct and has not been lost. Evidently Pieris represents the ancestral form of Mancipium and has perhaps been thrown off before the specialization of Pieris has progressed so far. Notwithstanding the similarity of the orna- mentation I am not sure that P. rapce is on the direct line of descent. As between rapcedXi^ napi I incline to considerthe latter at present the more specialized. Aporia cratcegi is evidently a more generalized form, standing a little apart. Vein iii3^4 is quite a long furcation, and measures its distance from Pieris. The skele- ton of the wing is more powerfully built and vein viii of primaries stronger than in Pieris, in which it seems little better than a scar. The gradation by which this vein, which appears usually like a loop, strap or support to vii at the base, passes into obliteration is so entire that the exact statement of its condition is often difficult either to correctly grasp or record. The ''tubular" character dis- appears by minute gradations ; the ''scar" aspect and the "tubu- lar" shape are easy to detect, but where the one commences and the other ends it is often hard for me to say. In the holarctic fauna I do not find any form to represent the probably actual five- branched condition of Pieris, but here several types are wanting to me which I should like to have examined. In the genealogical tree of the holarctic butterflies the more generalized Anthocharini must take the place of the common five-branched ancestor of the whole Pierinae. But this seems to me to stand upon a separate immediate phylogenetic line of its own, notwithstanding some common fea- tures of color and marking. With this Anthocharid line we must now in concluding concern ourselves. Among the Anthocharini, or what we may call the " non-typical Whites," we have, in Poniia daplidice, the attainment of the three- branched condition. This butterfly appears to me to have no immediate connection with the "typical Whites," but to be a descendant of Anthocharid ancestry. It is true that Mr. Meyrick refers it without comment to the genus Pieris {Handbook, 353), but it is also true that Mr. Meyrick, in the same publication, precedes Pieris by Leptidia (Leucophasia) and this again by Euchloe, and, to make the mixture complete, Gonepteryx (Colias). This sort of work appears to me to prove that Mr. Meyrick's studies are not yet sufficiently "correlated" with the actual facts of structure. If, indeed, the picture which Mr. Meyrick has received of the neuration at all resembles the figures with which his publications are adorned. 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 35 no proper judgment could, in my opinion, be formed upon it, and this would perhaps account in part for the seemingly extraordinarily unnatural sequences adopted by him. The coincidence between the neuration of Pontia daplidice and that of Alancipium brassicce is so great, that I am at a loss to give good characters of distinction. But showing, as I do, that the three-branched character of the Pierid primary wing is attained upon obviously distinct lines (^. g,, Euremini), this coincidence will not of itself determine the phylogeny. The shape of the wings and the pattern of ornamentation of Pontia are both Anthocharid. It is not conceivable how either could have been derived from Pieris and the ^' typical Whites." We should have to suppose that the four-branched Pieris threw off the three-branched Mancipium and also the three-branched Pontia ; an inference which, consider- ing the want of any near resemblance in the shape and pattern of the wings between the two descendants, or between one of these (Pontia) and the supposed parent stem, must be set down as unten- able. More than this, we have in Pontia a similar secondary sexual character in the shape and extent of the wings to that we find in the Anthocharini, no trace of which is evident in Pieris or Mancipium. This character has evidently been retained by Pontia, through an ancestry of which I find one existing representative form, extending back to the five-branched representative of a remote phase which is brought before us now in Anthocharis and Euchloe. I believe that these facts show, that the phylogenetic position here- tofore assigned to Pontia, is a discordant one and should be cor- rected. We may now leave Pontia and look over the more generalized and the typical Anthocharini with their five-branched radius. Mr. Scudder {Historical Sketch, 113) says, regarding the use of the ofeneric term Anthocharis : '* As Euchloe must be used for the European species, getiutia should be considered the type of this genus." This would seem to imply that all the European species were generically distinct from all the American and that the latter should alone be referred to Anthocharis. I do not agree with this statement at all, and I can show grounds for referring American species, with orange blotch in the male, to Euchloe, and for con- sidering that the white species of both continents are slightly more specialized and might be kept under the separate title of Antho- charis. I regret not to have genutia to examine and I use Antho- 36 GROTE — SPECIALIZATION'S OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. [Jan. 21, charis for the type belemia, which is, perhaps, identical. The subjective question of whether there are two '' genera " to be con- sidered is not of any importance to me at all. I recognize two five-branched types : the one specialized, which I seem warranted in calling Anthocharis under Boisduval's original use of that term; the other, relatively generalized, which I call Euchloe, with the type given by Mr. Scudder of cardamines. The white Anthocharids differ from the type of Euchhe carda- mines in that vein iii2 has moved from the original position and is given off opposite, or even beyond the cross-vein. \wA. ausomdes, which is slightly the more specialized of the three examined, it has even passed the extremity of the cell for a considerable distance. Therefore the specialization runs here upon the same line as in the case of Meganostoma and Eurymus. The generic title Anthocharis should have, I believe, the type belemia, in case genutia does not share these essential characters and is not, in the sense here pro- posed, an Anthocharis. It is clear from the above citation from the Historical Sketch, that Mr. Scudder has misapprehended the state of affairs in this group ; for I am quite unable to find any neurational differences between the North American E. stella and the European type of Euchloe. In both insects vein iiia retains its original position above the cell. And the chances seem to be that this will be the case with most of the species, carrying an orange blotch on the male primary, irrespective of locality. In any case, that which interests us here especially is the development of a specializing movement tending generally in the direction of a reduction in the number of the radial branches, but here taking a special and, looking through the day butterflies, perhaps an unusual direction. I find it, besides in these two instances, in the Pieridae, in Euptoieta, Melitaea, Euphydryas, Araschnia and Heliconius. But when we examine Pontia, we find that, although the five- branched radius has become a three-branched, still vein iii.^ has not changed its place. The reduction has been effected by other means than the shifting of iiij in the direction of the apex of the wing. Into the details of the physiological process of absorption I cannot now enter, sufficient for my present purpose is the fact, that Pontia represents a clean descent from Euchloe-like forms and that it has not passed through Anthocharid-like forms upon its way. The absorption of iii^ has proceeded to a varying extent in these species of Anthocharis. The little branch remaining has 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 37 become very short indeed in A. ausonides. A. belemia would be the most generah'zed form, since \\\^ has not, or hardly, passed the cross-vein. In both belia and ausonides this halting place has been passed by. But in Tetracharis (n. g.) cethura Feld., sp., we have a four-branched Euchloe ; one which represents an intermediate stage between the five-branched Euchloe and the three-branched Pontia. Tetracharis may be represented also by other spe- cies, since I have not been able to examine all the. forms of the Anthocharini. This survey of the Pierinae has shown us that the Anthocharini represent the most generalized forms apparently in the holarctic fauna, and that they are probably the survivors, not on the direct line, of a former five-branched condition of the family. There remains one more five-branched form to examine : Leptidia (Leucophasia), but this presents so strange a neurational pattern, that it must have come into its present company by a vastly different route. Of its peculiar type it may be a specialized form, although, in comparison with the Pierin^e, it seems generalized. Its white color has come to it, I think, subsequently ; as to its origin — unde et quomodo — I have no idea which is not imaginary. To touch finally another aspect of our subject — a study of the dynamics of the butterfly wing has been somewhat neglected. From the details of the changes in the position of the veins, it may be concluded that the movements have a mechanical cause. Since this inquiry belongs to a department of direct observation upon which we can obtain absolute knowledge, without employing recon- structive methods, it may be painfully followed up, in field and cabinet, until the subject becomes clear. The butterflies certainly owe a part of their attractiveness to the fact of their seasonal appearance. They recur at a certain niveau in the biological circle, thus relieving the mind through their plain testimony from doubting that the principle of existence is succession. 38 GROTE — SPECIALIZATION'S OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. [Jan. 21, U I— I H O < o H U t— I H W ;s w o o _] » <; I— ( Pi H W m <: m o Pi (^ o •J OS .2 'o PL, in tn O CI ^ > S "a, 'D .E3 ■<-• a o Ph :§ ^ I O 03 s W3 O >% c ;_ cd Hi bO il 03 (-' >-> )-< M Uc }-i ,n rO ,::) rQ ^ ^ ro r:?- ^ ^ lO lO ^ O 'a, ■*-» C! O U O X^ G <: tn S > > > 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF l.EPIDOPTEROUS WING. 39 The Charaxin^. The Nymphalidae proper appear dichotomous. The main ascend- ing branch is represented by the Argynninae, running up into the NymphalincX. This branch is characterized by a short furcation of iii^ with iiig, and the genera may be called the "short forks." The second branch represents an earlier condition of the Nympha- lids in which this furcation is more or less extended and the genera may be known as '* long forks." Just as the passage from the Argyn- ninae to the Nymphalinae by the continued greater absorption of ii and iii of hind wings may be considered to have gradually occurred, so the transformation of the ''long forks" into "short forks" is inevitable by the progress of iii^ toward the outer margin of the wing. But, other characters considered, the existing "long forks" seem to hold together on a distinct phylogenetic line. In Anaea we have an existing "long fork" which has lost its taxonomic character in this direction. In Euschatzia (type morvus) we have an allied Charaxid which still retains the character. Mr. ^cudder having in 1875 (^- ^-^ i^^) fixed the type of Anaea as iroglodyia, this action could not be properly subverted by Schatz, who subse- quently made the same species the type of his genus " Pyrrhandra," which name must fall. For ?norvus, more generalized than the species of Anaea, I choose the generic name Euschatzia. Genera like Aganisthos, Kallima and Anaea appear to represent in succession Consul, Charaxes, Hypna, Prepona, typical "long forks." In Charaxes veins iii4 and iii^ fuse at base for a short space, only about one-sixth of the length of iii3. If this short fusion were absent we should have a wing agreeing so far with that of Hesperia, that all the veins are separate, and no furcation, conse- quent upon the absorption of iii4 by iiig, has taken place. Thus in the primitive Nymphalidae, represented more nearly by the Charaxinae, the veins were probably all separate. And probably also in the whole group Hesperiades. In fact the hypothesis sug- gests itself that the lepidopterous wing may have originally shown a series of longitudinal and independent veins, connected by a system of cross veins and without furcations. The disappearance of the cross veins would allow of the contact of the longitudinal veins. This state of affairs would in turn lead to their partial absorption and consequent furcation. We may have in the Hesperiadae and Tortricidae existing stages of this evolutionary change in the lepidopterous wing. 40 GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. [Jan. 21, To resume : Butterflies like Athyma and even Adelpha seem to find their natural place in the Nymphalinse. But^ when we come to the west coast of South America, we find in Megalura a form which shares the taxonomic character of the secondaries with the Nymphalinae, while iii^ of primaries reaches apex. Perhaps here we come upon a fresh phylogenetic line, and the meeting of i, ii and iii of the hind wings at one point is no longer a reliable index of a nearer blood relationship. A Strange African Pierid. A genus which has reached the grade of specialization of Nathalis, Mancipium and Pontia, and even gone beyond it, is represented by the strange little African butterfly Gonophlebia faradoxa. In his recent work Mr. Renter has classified this butterfly as follows : *' Papiliones : Pierididse : Pseudopontiinse : Pseudopontiidi : Pseu- dopontia." The major clamp in this declensional series — Papiliones — we can at once discard, since no proof has, nor apparently can ever be offered, that the Whites are phylogenetically connected with the Swallowtails. Further, if we may trust Mr. Scudder, the whole series of etymological changes must go by the board, since Pseudo- pontia is a synonym of Gonophlebia. Two common butterflies will help us in understanding the vena- tion of Gonophlebia : rJiamni and sinapis. How the veins may be twisted to sustain the new shape of the wing, here assumed very probably under the influence of mimicry, is certainly taught us by rhanini, in which the branches of the radius are bent upward to sustain the expanded costa of primaries. Our strange African butterfly has the veins still more strongly bent out of their normal course to meet the required shape of its funny round wings. In Gonophlebia veins iviand iv.have left the cross vein and spring, one following the other, from the main branch of the radius, vein iiig -|- 4 -[" 5? outside of the closed cell. This is an amplification of the usual Pierine movement of the upper branches of the median system of veins. This, not the whitish color, stamps Gonophlebia as an offshoot of the Pierid stem. Gonophlebia is even more easily recognized as a Pierid than Leptidia sinapsis, in which ivj has not left the cross vein. But, despite the contrasted shape of their wings, it is not impossible that Leptidia and Gonophlebia are isolated survivors of the same phylum. The extraordinary movement of the middle branch of the median 3898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 41 series, vein ivj, in following the lead of iv^, proves Gonophlebia to be a highly specialized form. The neuration shows us that there is no contradiction offered to the view that Gonophlebia is a special- ized Pierid and, in order to make this still plainer, we will study it a little closer. What gives the pattern of the veining its singularity, and affords a faint reminiscence of the Pericopids, is the tendency to run apart which the veins display in Gonophlebia. The veins are bent more or less out of their usual course, and this is especially the case with Vg on both wings. But all this effort is clearly exerted in order to sustain the circular shape of the wings and keep the thin membrane taut. On the secondaries the expansion of the rounded costal margin has to be performed solely by the radius, in its single special- ized condition, without branches. And how is this infrequent task accomplished? The simple vein is bent upwards, near the middle, at a nearly right angle, supporting and anastomosing with vein ii ; thence again, less abruptly descending, the radius runs outwardly to external margin below the apices, while vein ii itself is continued to the apex of the wing. Nature wished to make a spherical wing with no greater number of sustaining rods than go to support the longer wings of other butterflies, or even the narrow and extended wings of Leptid^a. And thus, with the same economy of material, is the end attained. There arise no new veins, no complexity of machinery astonishes. We have the old veins in new position, but still showing the Pierine movement in specialization. If Gonophlebia is the pattern of the veining so transformed, it is small wonder that Mr. Butler should deny and Mr. Scudder question its being a butterfly. Added to this the antennae lack the regulation knob, which would allow Mr. Butler to place it among the '' Rhopalocera. " A puzzle to the classificators and a seduction to Mr. Reuter to a waste of category, this frail butterfly has evidently suffered many 'Vicissitudes of the voyage" along the road it has traveled and which may not be so very far now from its ending. This strange butterfly is the only diurnal I have yet met with in which vein ix is retained on hind wings. 42 GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. [Jan. 21, Explanation of Plate I. The figures are obtained by combined photographic process. The veins are numbered according to the system Redtenbacher-Comstock, iii =rz radius, iv = media, v = cubitus. Fig. I. Pontia daplidice. Type of genus. Attention is called to the three- branched radius. A specialized type. Vein iiig in original position. Fig. 2. Tetracharis cethura. Type of genus. Compare the four-branched radius with the five-branched radius of Euchloe. Vein \\\^ in original position. Fig. 3. Anthocharis ausonides. Vein iii2 has moved forward to a point con- siderably beyond the cross-vein. Attention is called to the dimin- ished extent of vein iii^. A more specialized form than A. belemia. For this type Mr, Scudder uses Synchloe, but contrary to custom. The reason for rejecting Midea for genutia does not seem to me tenable. Fig. 4. Euchloe cardamines. Type of genus. The five-branched radius shows vein \\\^ in original position above the cell. E. stella agrees. A generalized type of the group. Fig. 5. Nathalis iole. Type of genus. A specialized type with three- branched radius. Fig. 6. Terias hecabe. Type of genus. A subspecialized type with four- branched radius. Vein viii of primaries fairly distinct. A mere rudiment of vein i of hind wings. Fig. 7. Gonophlebia paradoxa. Type of genus. Vein viii of primaries pres- ent, short, close to vii. On secondaries three internal veins. Type of subfamily Gonophlebianue. Compare text. 1898.] GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. 43 Explanation of Plate II. The figures are obtained by a combined photographic process. The veins are numbered according to the system Redtenbacher-Comstock. iii = radius, iv = media, v = cubitus. Fig. 8. Eurymtis ediisa. Attention is called to the slipping forward of iiij. If a comparison is made with my figure of Euryi7ius hyale (/. c. Fig. 7) it will be found that in this type of the genus the distance traversed by this vein along radius is slightly greater than in edusa, which is so far the more generalized form. A specialized type. Fig. 9. Meganostoma ccesojiia. Type of genus. Attention is called to the remains of i on secondary wings. On primary wing vein \\\^ halts opposite cross-vein. A subspecialized type on the direct line to Eury- mus. Mr. Scudder prefers zerene for this genus. Fig. 10. Callidryas eubule. Type of genus. A generalized four-branched type. Vein iii2 in original position. Fig. II. Nymphalis lucilla. Type of family, subfamily and genus. Vein iii^ given off upon external margin. Attention is called to the gener- alized state of the radius, common to all brush-footed butterflies. Also to the specialized condition of the median branches, which have joined the radial and cubital systems respectively. The cross-vein has vanished and the media, as a system, has virtually disappeared from the wing. Veins ii and iii on hind wings absorbed to point of issue of i. Fig. 12. Para7'ge cegeria. Type of genus and subfamily. Attention is called to position of cross-vein on hind wings and to the fact that ivg has joined cubitus. Compare with the following figure in this respect. Fig.1^13, Agapetes galathea<^ . Type of genus, subfamily and family. A more generalized type than the preceding. The lower branch of media, vein ivg, arises from cross-vein and is not permanently joined to the cubital system. 44 GROTE — SPECIALIZATIONS OF LEPIDOPTEROUS WING. [Jan. 21, Explanation of Plate III. The figures are obtained by combined photographic process. The veins are numbered according to the system Redtenbacher-Comstock. iii =z radius, iv = media, v = cubitus. Fig, 14. Oeneis noma. Type of genus. Attention is directed to the fact that this is a more generahzed form, belonging to the Agapetinae with iv^ from cross- vein, by the strongly closed cell and equidistance of the branches. The position assigned by Mr, Scudder, " at the head " of the brush-footed butterflies, cannot be a proper one. The genus seems related to Erebia (/, c, Fig. 23). Fig, 15. Heliconius antiochus. Type of genus and family. From its total characters a more generalized type than that of the Agapetidae. Fig. 16, Lininas chrysippus. Type of genus and family. Still more gener- alized. Attention is drawn to the strong condition of vein viii on fore wings. Fig. 17. Libythea celtis. Type of genus and family. Outline of wings resem- bling Polygonia. Vein viii of primaries strong and position of ivj nearly central. In other characters specialized, ii and iii on hind wings fused to issue of i. Fig. 18. Etischatzia morvus. Type of genus. The radial branches have in- tersected with subcosta. A long fork ; furcation of iii^ and iii^ long» but shorter than in Charaxes, Compare text. 1898.] SACHSE — AX OLD BROADSIDE. 45 AN OLD BROADSIDE, WITH A REFERENCE TO THE THRONE OF CONGRESS. (Plate IV.) BY JULIUS F. SACHSE. (Mead January 21, 1898. ) A short time ago our efficient Librarian, Dr. I. Minis Hays, during his investigations among the miscellaneous property of the Society, discovered a bundle of old papers which bore the legend, " Of not much value." Upon opening the parcel almost the first paper ex- amined proved to be a small German broadside over a century old. It was printed upon what is known as a quarto sheet, measuring seven by nine inches ; it was without date or imprint, and the title simply told that it was a description of a silk serviette or handker- chief. Certainly not one to attract any special attention. Closer examination, however, showed that this advertisement or broadside was really the description of a fine specimen of the weaver's art, exe- cuted in silk damask or brocade, which had been made and dis- tributed either in France or Germany, or perhaps in both countries, during the darkest days of the American struggle for freedom, with the express purpose of furthering America's interests in her battle for liberty. The whole design appears to have been elaborate and symbolical, in which the portrait of Benjamin Franklin, Minister to the Court of France and President of the American Philosophical Society, occupied the most prominent position. Diligent inquiry among scholars well versed in Revolutionary matters, both historical and pictorial, has failed in bringing to light any other notice of either the broadside or the allegorical handkerchief which was the basis for its publication ; and it is but fair to assume that the printed sheet now brought to your notice, to say the least, is unique. The date of the making of our serviette, as it appears from the incidents and inscriptions woven in the fabric, must have been during the summer of 1778, evidently but a short time after the news of the British evacuation of Philadelphia reached the continent. Another peculiarity of it is that it is couched in that peculiar kind of German, largely interspersed with French words and sentences. 46 SACHSE — AN OLD BROADSIDE. [Jan. 21, which was prevalent in Germany at the period, when every petty- princeling in that divided country aimed to maintain a court pat- terned after that of Louis XV of France. We now come to the description of this symbolical relic as set forth in the broadside, and it is the fervent wish of the writer that this paper may be the means of bringing to light, or at least locating, one of these handkerchiefs of the Revolutionary period, should one have survived. From the detailed description it appears that the handkerchief or serviette was of silk. In the centre was a rattlesnake, divided into thirteen parts, whereof the last part or tail end was supposed to be in a state of accretion, a prophetic allusion since realized. This symbol referred to the thirteen American Colonies then struggling for independence. It was patterned after one which appeared in Franklin's Pennsylvania Gazette as early as 1754, when he printed in his paper the cut of a severed snake and the motto, " Unite or Die," to show the necessity of Colonial union against the French and Indians. In 1775 this emblem was printed at the head of the Pennsylvania Jom'nal, and the idea of the resemblance between the Colonies and the rattlesnake was often brought up in the literature of the day. The name of one of the different Colonies appeared over each segment. The broadside further goes on to state that this peculiar reptile was chosen as the symbol of the new nation because it was held to be the noblest of its genus : it never strikes without first giving due warning to its enemies, and for this reason, says the broadside, it has been emblazoned upon the arms and flags of the American Provinces. The word Provinces evidently refers to such provincial flags as bore a rattlesnake upon their folds. The most noted one of this series was the celebrated flag of Paul Jones, with its warning motto, " Don't Tread on Me." Within the circle formed upon the handkerchief by the seg- ments of a divided rattlesnake was portrayed a large globe upon a pedestal, so turned as to show North America. Within the outlines of the continent was prominently displayed a portrait of Benjamin Franklin, Ambassador at th^ Court of France, beneath which appeared the legend, ''The Wonder of Our Times." Above this portrait appeared the throne of Congress, together with the Book of the Law and a drawn sword, symbolizing the supreme power. Upon the pages of tliis book were inscribed, Les Treize Provinces Unies 1898.] SACHSE — AN OLD BROADSIDE. 47 (The Thirteen United Provinces) and Indcpendance le 4 Juillet, lyyd (Independence, July 4, 1776). In the foreground appeared a palmetto tree, upon both sides of which were placed the flags of France, to indicate the treaty so lately negotiated with that country. A wreath of laurel formed the outside border of the handkerchief, to signify the reward of bravery. The four corners were interlaced with the lilies of France, which the broadside informs us also formed a part of the arms of the United Colonies. Here again we have an allusion to at least one of the many flags carried during the early part of the Revolution, prior to the adoption of the Stars and Stripes. As corner-pieces there appear to have been four allegorical designs, whose chief motive were leading commanders in the armies of the United Colonies. The difl"erent Generals were supported by the goddess Minerva and surrounded by trophies of war and figures representing Prudence, Courage and Strength. In the first medallion we have Washington ; upon his left the god Mars who, with his sword, strikes off the shackles from a slave and announces to him emancipation, while he crushed under foot slavery and envy. Upon Washington's right was Minerva, extending toward him a wreath of oak as an emblem of strength. Genius reclines at her feet and proclaims peace. The legend over this medallion. General Washington 11 a peu (T Egaux en Bravoiire, Prude fice et dans V Art Militaire, informs the world that General Washington has but few equals in courage, prudence and the military art. The second medallion shows a portrait of General Charles Lee. At his side are divers American prisoners of war bewailing their fate, and, pointing to the British arms, they implore Mars for succor. General Lee's late career is indicated by a dungeon upon whose walls are exhibited his arms, accoutrements and chains. The accompanying legend. General Lee, Tatitot Vainqiienr Tantot Vaincu, signifies, '^Betimes Conqueror, betimes Conquered." The third medallion contains a profile of General Richard Mont- gomery. It is flanked by Sorrow, who points to an urn containing the ashes of the patriot. Below tlie portrait are seen a coffin and a monument. A mourning genius, with torch reversed, beside the ceno- taph, represents death. Mars consoles him by pointing with his sword to a battle scene in the distance. The allegory is explained 48 SACHSE — AN OLD BROADSIDE. [Jan 21, by the legend, Ge?ie7-al Mo?itgommery , [i-/V] Thou do' st fall, but Freedom shall build her Throne on thy Grave. The central figure of the fourth medallion is General Gates, sup- ported by Wisdom and Liberty, whereof the latter points with Mercury's wand toward the naval and military forces of the United Provinces. The fertility and affluence of our country are indicated by a scene on the river Nile. Above all appears the legend, General Gates, Vainqueur de ses Ennemis (General Gates, Van- quisher of his Enemies). In connection with these four medallions there remain to be noticed four battle scenes ingeniously wrought into the fabric. 1. The battle of Quebec, where General Montgomery was killed. {La Bataille devant Quebeck, ou le General Mo?ttgo7?unery fut tue.) 2. The battle of Trenton, where the Hessian troops were defeated December 25, 1776. Curiously enough our broadside gives the credit for the victory to General Lee : La Bataille de Trentvice, oic les Llessois furent def aits par le General Lee, le 26 Decembre, 1776. 3. The battle of Saratoga, October 17, 1777, showing the sur- render of Lord Burgoyne to General Gates. The legend reads : La Bataille de Saratoga, le 17 d' October, 1777, dans laquelle le General Bourgoyne fut fait Prisonnier par I e General Gates. 4. The retreat of the British from Philadelphia by way of the Jerseys June, 1778. With the inscription : Les Trouppes Angloises se retiretit de Philadelphia a Jerseys f an 1768 [sic']. Finally, there is shown a horizon with forked lightning, from which descend two crowns, each formed of thirteen parts, one divided, the other united ; emblematical of the dependence and independence of the North American Colonies. From the above description it will be seen that this specimen of the textile art was one of no mean order, either in its poetical con- ception or the artistic execution. It further brings to our knowledge a heretofore unknown means used to interest foreign people of the better classes in our favor during what may well be called the criti- cal time of our revolutionary struggle. Historically, our old broadside is of the greatest importance in one particular, especially so at this time, when the old State House and Independence Hall are undergoing another siege of '* restora- tion;" our broadside gives us a definite clue to a representation of a hitherto forgotten or overlooked accessory to the furnishings of the east room of the State House. 1898.] SACHSE — AN OLD BROADSIDE. 49 I allude to the canopied throne in Independence Hall, a piece of ornamental furniture occupied by the Speaker of the Continental Congress at the time when Independence was declared, and which remained a feature of the historic room until some time after the Revolution. Nothing can be farther from our idea of the birth of American liberty than the introduction upon the scene of a throne with royal emblazonment. The mere suggestion would seem like a desecra- tion of our most cherished sanctuary, where assembled the noble patriots who declared these Colonies free and independent. It certainly does seem like an incongruity to picture John Hancock, him of the bold signature, descending from a throne or anything that savored of monarchy ^to affix his autograph to the immortal Declaration. No painting or engraving, so far as known to the writer, portrays anything like such an accessory to the equipment of the chamber. No artist appears to have had the temerity to give us a true view of the Chamber of Assembly, with its gallery for the public and the ornate trappings over the windows and Speaker's chair. The memorable scene of signing the Declaration is generally depicted as one of extreme republican simplicity, in fact painfully so, giving the generations of the present day the impression that the interior of the State House, the finest public building in the Colonies, was as plain and devoid of ornamentation as a Quaker meeting-house, and in every case, as it now appears, incorrect in most vital detail. Now, in the face of the accepted pictures of the Chamber of Assembly, or east room of the State House, we here have the state- ment of a picture of this throne, or, as it is called, " The Throne of Congress," supported by the Book of Laws and the Sword. And this picture appears as described on the handkerchief. Unsupported by corroborative evidence, this statement would most likely, in the absence of the original, be received as a piece of artistic or poetic license on the part of the artist who sketched the design, and who for purposes of his own inserted a symbol of royalty so distasteful to patriots of all nations. I will now read a piece of evidence in support of the existence of a throne in the east room. It was written by an eye-witness, the Prince de Broglie, who visited the State House in 1782 : ''The State House, where Congress assembles, as does the Coun- cil of Pennsylvania, and where also the Courts of Justice are held, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXXVII. 157. D. PRINTED MAY 17, 1898. 50 SACHSE — AN OLD BROADSIDE. [Jan. 21, is a building literally crushed by a huge massive tower, square and not very solid. '^ Congress meets in a large room on the ground floor. The chamber is large, without any other ornament than a bad engraving of Montgomery, one of Washington, and a copy of the Declaration of Independence. It is furnished with thirteen tables, each covered with a green cloth. One of the representatives of each of the thir- teen States sits during the session at one of these tables. The President of the Congress has his place in the middle of the hall upon a sort of a throne." Now the phrase, ''sort of a throne," might mean nothing, if coming from a modern American, more than a very dignified seat ; but, coming as it does from a French 'nobleman of the ancient regime, it certainly suggests the idea of regal state. The least we can expect from it would be an ornamental chair on a dais sur- mounted by a canopy and ornamented with the symbols of the home government. With these facts before us we may well assume that the symbol was an actual and not a typical one, and that it could only have been introduced into the general design by one familiar with the old Council Chamber. We now come to another phase of the subject ; how so elaborate a piece of furniture happened to be a part of the equipment of the Chamber at the time when the Continental Congress took the step which eventually made the Colonies an independent nation. The solution of this problem is comparatively easy. W^hen it is taken into consideration that the room in which Congress met had for years been used by the Assembly of Pennsylvania, and was more or less elab- orately equipped with fine furniture and hangings, there can be but little question that ample provision was made for the august Speaker and for the Governor when he was present on State occasions in the shape of an elaborate canopied dais, surmounted by the royal arms and other insignia of monarchical authority. A somewhat similar arrangement witli royal insignia over the seat of the Chief Justice ornamented the west room. The final disposition of these symbols of kingly authority appears in the issue of the Pennsylvania Journal, Wednesday, July lo, 1776, where we are told that on the evening of Monday, July 8, the day upon which the Declaration was publicly read, '' Our late King's coat of arms was brought from the hall in the State House and burned amidst the acclamations of a crowd of spectators." 1898.] MINUTES. 51 A throne with royal arms in Independence Hall ! Words could hardly express a greater incongruity. Yet, to be historically cor- rect, the learned Committee who have charge of the restoration of Independence Hall if they wish to place the ancient Chamber in the exact condition it was in on July 4, 1776 (and I believe that is the intention) will certainly have to introduce a canopied dais or throne in the eastern end of Independence Hall. Another apparent historic incongruity'in our old broadside is the legend which gives to General Charles Lee the credit for the cap- ture of the Hessians at Trenton, when, as a matter of fact, that General was then a prisoner of war in the hands of the British. The explanation of this curious statement is that Lee claimed to have sent Washington the necessary information from New York, and formulated the plan of battle which brought about the capture of Rhal's forces. This, it appears, was believed in Europe to have been the case, and the design was evidently made and published before the news of the battle of Monmouth and the subsequent court-martial of Lee reached the continent. In closing this paper I repeat the wish that its dissemination may bring to light, either at home or abroad, one of these symbolical compositions so curiously wrought in threads of silk and used in the interest of American Independence, the only description of which, so far as known, is the broadside found in the archives of the American Philosophical Society. Further, the finding of one of these serviettes would give to us the true design of the Throne of Congress, which for years was a feature of Independence Hall. Stated Meetiiig, Fthruary Jf.^ 1898, Yice-President Sellers in the Chair. Present, 12 members. Acknowledgments of election to membership were received from Profs. C.^F. W. McClure and Henry B. Fine. The Standing Committees for the 3- ear, appointed by the President, under resolution of the Society, were announced, as follows : Finance. — Philip C. Garrett, William Y. McKean, Joel Cook. 52 MINUTES. [Feb. 18, Hall. — William A. Ingham, Joseph M. Wilson, Horace Jajne. Publication. — Daniel G. Brinton, Persifor Frazer, I. Minis Hays, Frederick Prime, Samuel P. Sadtler. Library. — Edwin J. Houston, Frederick Prime, T. Hewson Bache, Albert H. Smyth, Samuel P. Sadtler. Michaux Ze^ac?/.— Thomas Meehan, Angelo Heilprin, William Powell Wilson, Burnet Landreth, Henry Trimble. Henry M. Phillips Prize Essay Fund. — William Y. McKean, Craig Biddle, Joseph C. Fraley, C. Stuart Patter- son, Mayer Sulzberger, the President, the Treasurer. Programme. — William Pepper, Persifor Frazer, William A. Ingham, Joseph C. Fraley, I. Minis Hays. The death was announced at Philadelphia, on January 29, 1898, of Dr. Theophilus Parvin, aged 69 years. Prof. W. B. Scott read by title the following papers in- tended for the Transa^ctions : ' ' The Osteology of Eliothe- rium " and "Notes on the Canidae of the White Eiver Oligocene." Prof. W. B. Scott presented a paper on " The Exploration of Patagonia." Pending nominations Nos. 1432, 1435 and 1445 to 1450 were read. The Society was adjourned by the presiding officer. Stated Meeting^ February 18, 1898. Vice-President Sellers in the Chair. Present, 20 members. The Special Committee on Prof. Scott's papers, entitled ' ' Notes on the Canidte of the White Kiver Oligocene ' ' and " The Osteology of Elotherium," recommended their publi- cation in the Transactions, which was so ordered. The Special Committee on Dr. Harrison Allen's papers presented for the Transactions, entitled " The Glossopha- 1898.] MINUTES. 53 ginae " and " The Skull and Teetb. of the Ectophylla alba," recommended their publication, which was so ordered. The death was announced of Rev. William C. Cattell, D.D., on February 11, in his seventy-first year. The President, on motion, appointed Dr. McCook to prepare an obituary notice of Dr. Cattell. Dr. Carl Lumholtz read a paper on " The Iluichol Indians of Mexico and Their Objective Symbols." which was dis- cussed by Dr. Brinton and Mr. Culin. Pending nominations were read and spoken to, and the Society proceeded to the election of new members, after which the Tellers reported the following persons had been elected members : 2367. Thomas H. Montgomery, Jr., Philadelphia. 2368. W. L. R. Emmet, Schenectady, N. Y. 2369. George H. Darwin, F.R.S., Cambridge, Mass. 2370. S. Dana Greene, Schenectady, N". Y. 2371. L. B. Stillwell, Buffalo, ^^. Y. 2372. Charles F. Scott, Pittsburgh, Pa. The Society was adjourned by the presiding officer. Stated Meeting, March 4-, 1898. Yice -President Sellers in the Chair. Present, 9 members. Mr. T. H. Montgomery, Jr., a newly elected member, was presented and took his seat in the Society. Letters accepting membership were read from W. L. R. Emmet, Thomas H. Montgomery, Jr., and Percival Lowell. The death, in his eighty-third year, of Rev. James Legge, D.D., LL.D., of Oxford, England, was announced. Pending nominations 1432 and 1451 and new nominations 1452 and 1453 were read. The Society was adjourned by the presiding officer. 54 MATHEWS — INITIATION IN AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. [March 18/ Stated Meeting, March 18, 1898. Dr. I. Minis Hays in tlie Chair. Present, 11 members. Acknowledgments of election to membership were read from Charles F. Scott, of Pittsburgh, Pa.; George H. Darwin, of Cambridge, Eng.; S. Dana Greene, of New York, and L. B. Stillwell, of Niagara Falls, N. Y. Correspondence was submitted and donations to the Library and Cabinet were reported. Announcement Avas made of the death of Sir Henry Besse- mer, at his residence near London, on March 15, 189 S, in the 85th year of his age ; and of the Eev. Dr. Edward A. Foggo, at Philadelphia, March 8, 1898, aged 61. The following communications were presented : By E. H. Mathews, " Initiation Ceremonies of the Native Tribes of Australia." Bv W. B. Scott, " A Preliminary Note on the Selenodont Artiodactyls of the Uinta Formation." Pending nominations Nos. 1432 and 1451 to 1453 and new nominations Nos. 1454 to 1457 were read. The Society was adjourned by the presiding member. LNITIATION CEREMONIES OF AUSTRALL\N TRIBES. (Plate V.) BY R. H. MATHEWS, L.S. {Read March IS, 1S9S.) The Koombanggary tribe, which was at one time both numerous and important, inhabits the country from the south side of the Clarence river along the sea- coast about as far as Nambucca, ex- tending westerly almost to the main dividing range. On the south they are bounded by the Thangatty tribe, occupying the Macleay river. The Anaywan tribe, scattered over the table- land of New South Wales, bound the Thangatty and Koombanggary people on 1898.] ^[ATHEWS — INITIATION IN AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. 55 thewest. As no description of the Burbung of these tribes has yet been published, I have prepared the following brief account of that ceremony as practiced within the district indicated. Their social organization is after the Kamilaroi type, being divided into four sections,^ with numerous totems consisting of animals, plants and other natural objects. A Burbung is held at any time that there are a sufficient number of boys old enough to be installed as tribesmen ; and the headman of the tribe, whose turn it is to take the initiative in calling the people together for this purpose, is generally agreed upon at the conclusion of the previous inaugural gathering which took place. When the appointed time comes round, the tribe who are charged with this duty select a suitable camping ground within their own territory, and some of the initiated men commence preparing the ground. While they are employed at this work, the principal head- man dispatches messengers to such of the surrounding tribes as he wishes to join in the ceremony. These men are selected from among his own friends and belong to his own totem. Each messenger has generally one or more other men with him to keep him company, and he is provided with the emblems usually carried on such occa- sions, namely, a bull-roarer, several articles of a man's dress and some native weapons. The conduct of these messengers on their arrival in the proximity of the camp of the people to whom the invitation has been sent is very similar to the procedure previously explained in ray descriptions of the initiation ceremonies of other tribes. The situation of the general encampment as regards water and food supplies, and the location of the visiting tribes around the local mob, are also substantially the same as already stated. In a retired spot, a short distance from the main camp, the headmen have a private meeting place, called the bunbul, where they congregate to discuss such matters as they do not wish the women to hear. They have one or more fires around which they sit, and none of the un- initiated men are allowed near them. The women must not intrude upon the bunbul, even if the men are not there. The single women and girls also have a place near the camp, but in the opposite direc- tion, where they assemble to work at making nets, headbands and ^ I have given the names of the divisionsof these people in my paper on " The Totemic Divisions of Australian Tribes," jfottrn. Roy. Soc. N', S. Wales, xxxi, 168-170. 56 MATHEWS — INITIATION IN AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. [March 18, such like. Every aboriginal camp is kept free from excrementitious matter. When the people go out to attend to any necessity of nature, they at once make a hole in the ground and cover the deposit over with earth. In close proximity to the camp is the burbling or public ring, bounded by a low earthen embankment, with a narrow sunken pathway called maro^ leading about four or five hundred yards into the forest to another circular space, formed in the same manner, known as the eeteemat, in the floor of which the butts of two sap- lings are firmly inserted, having the rooty ends upwards. These inverted stumps are called warringooringa, and are prepared in the way described in my papers dealing with initiation ceremo- nies elsewhere.^ The maro enters both the circles through a narrow opening left in the embankment, and the latter is continued outward a few feet along either side of the path where it meets the rings. Within the eeteemat there are also sometimes two, and sometimes four, heaps of earth, about a foot and a half or two feet high. Around the outside of the eeteemat and along both sides of the pathway referred to, there are a number of trees marked with the usual moombeera devices, as well as the outlines of an iguana, a squirrel, the new moon and other figures, all chopped into the bark with a tomahawk. On one side of the path are some tracks of an emu's foot, cut into the surface of the ground a few feet apart, as if made by that animal running along. These tracks lead away some distance into the adjacent bush, forming a sort of curve or semi- circle around the eeteemat ; and on following them up they are found to terminate at the prone figure of an emu, ngooroon, formed by heaping up the loose earth into the required shape. All over the body of the emu thus drawn in high relief small twigs of the oak or wattle tree are closely inserted to represent the feathers of the bird. All the sticks and loose rubbish are scraped off the surface of the ground for several yards around this figure, for the purpose of danc- ing on. Approaching the eeteemat, near one side of the pathway, there is a low mound of earth about a foot high. This is called kooroor- ballunga, and a fire is lit on top of it during the time that any per- ^" The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes," jfotirn. Anthrop. Inst., xxv, 325. '-* The fronds or leaves of these trees bear some resemblance to the emu's feathers. 1898.1 MATHEWS — INITIATION IN AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. 57 formance is going on, such as the arrival of a tribe, their daily games and the ceremonial connected with the removal of the novices. In the vicinity of the marked trees is a gigantic human figure named Dharroogan or Gowang, lying extended on the ground, composed of the loose soil scraped off the surface for some yards around. A little way farther on, near the eeteemat^ is the prostrate image of a wallaroo, formed in high relief in the same manner. In building all the earthen figures just described, stones or pieces of wood are first heaped up on the ground, almost to the height of the object required, and on top of this the loose earth is thrown to com- plete the figure and give it the necessary shape. The finished draw- ing represents the intended animal in high relief on the surface of the ground. A rope made of stringy bark is stretched between two of the marked trees which are not too far apart, and about midway along this rope there is a bundle of leaves and finely frayed pieces of soft bark, supposed to represent the rest of a ring-tail opossum.^ When a strange tribe reaches a point somewhere within an easy stage of the main camp they paint their bodies with colored clays in accordance with the style customary in their tribe, after which the journey forward is resumed, the men in the lead, with the women and children following. On the approach of the strangers, the men of the local mob, and also the men of previous contingents who have arrived at the main camp, stand outside the burbung circle with their spears and other weapons in their hands, and sway their bodies to and fro. The new arrivals then march on in single file, in a meandering line, each man carrying his weapons in his hands; they enter the ring and march round and round until they are all within it in a spiral fold. They now come to a stand and jump about, the headman calling out the names of camping grounds, water-holes, shady trees, etc., in their country. After this they come out of the ring and each detachment of the hosts enter it in succession and act in a similar manner. For example, the contin- gent from Kempsey, who had arrived first, entered the ring and called out the names of remarkable places ; next, the contingent from Armidale did likewise ; then the contingent from Tabulam, and so on. Lastly, the men of the local Nymboi river mob enter 1 All the animals drawn upon the trees, or on the ground, represent the totems of some of the people assembled at the main camp. 58 MATHEWS — IXITIATIOX IX AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. [March 18, the ring and act in the same way. While this reception is being accorded to the men, the women, novices and children go into the camping ground and take up their quarters on the side nearest their own country. The men of the newly arrived contingent are next taken along the track to the sacred ground, and are shown all the markings in the soil and on the trees, the earthen figures in high relief, and the fire, at each of which they dance and give a shout. They then start along the tracks of the emu, some men being on one side and some on the other, the front men pretending to be following the marks in the ground. They make short grunt-like exclamations as they run along and all the other men follow in a body. On reach- ing the figure of the emu, they all give a shout and dance round on the clear space before referred to. They next assemble around the eeteemat and are shown the luar- rangooringa, on the roots of each of which an old man is sitting performing magical feats. Some of the headmen enter the ring dancing and singing round the heaps of eartli and the warrangoo- ringa, after which the two men descend from the latter and join the others. All the wizards or '* doctors" take their turn at produc- ing rock-crystals, blood, string and other substances from different parts of their bodies. After each trick, these clever fellows run with their heads down amongst the men who are standing outside the ring, who jump around to get out of their way. At the conclu- sion of these performances all the men go back along the track, and at about, say fifty yards from the burbiing, they are met by the novices, who join the procession, taking their places with the men of their own sectional division/ who enter the ring and dance round a few times, naming remarkable localities in their several districts, their totems, etc., and the women, who are standing around outside, throw handfuls of leaves at them, after which they all disperse to their respective quarters. A week or two, and in some cases a much longer time, elapses between the arrival of the first contingent and the last mob who have been invited from the surrounding districts, so that the earlier arrivals have a good while to wait at the main camp. During this period carraborus are held almost every fine night, the different tribes present taking their turn at providing the evening's amuse- ment. The men go out hunting every day and the women proceed ^ Joiirn. Roy. Soc. A". S, Wales, xxxi, 169. 1 898.1 MATHEWS — INITIATION IN AUSTRALIAN TKIBES. 59 in search of vegetable food, but there are always some of the old men and women in the camp. Each afternoon when the men re- turn from the hunting or fishing expeditions, which have engaged them during the earlier portion of the day, the men of the local tribe start from the camp and walk away to the eeteemat, carrying a boomerang or some other weapon in each hand. They are shortly afterwards followed by the men of the other tribes, each mob start- ing in the order of their arrival at the main camp. On reaching the ring they look over the moombeera, the raised and carved figures on the ground, the warr'angooi'inga, etc., and go through practically the same routine — and return to the hurbung in the same manner — as on the arrival of a new tribe. On some days during their visit to the eeteemat, the bullroarer is sounded, and the men beat the ground with pieces of bark held in the hand. It may be that a few additional trees are marked on these occasions, or some improve- ments are made in the earthen figures, or any other extra work which may add to the embellishment of the ground. As soon as convenient after the arrival of all the tribes who are expected to join in the ceremony the headmen assemble, and after a consultation among themselves they determine the day on which the novices will be taken away for the purpose of initiation. The Kooriiigal, or band of men who are to take charge of the ceremo- nies in the bush, are selected and the locality fixed where the women are to erect the new camp and wait for the return of the novices. On the morning which has been decided upon for taking the boys away, the whole camp is astir at daylight. The painting of the novices is now proceeded with, all of them being adorned with red ochre and grease from head to foot. Each boy is then invested with a girdle, to which four " tails " or kilts are attached, one hang- ing down in front, one at each side and one behind. They are then conducted into the burbling ring and placed sitting down on the raised earthen wall, the boys of each tribe being in a group by themselves on the side of the ring which is nearest their ow^n country. The mother of each novice is then seated outside the em- bankment a few yards behind where he is sitting ; his sisters and the other women are placed on the ground a little farther back. A screen of boughs is erected between each group of mothers and their sons. One or more of the headmen now go along the groups of novices and throw a rug over the head of each boy. All the women and children are told to lie down and keep still, and are covered 60 MATHEWS — INITIATION" IN AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. [March 18, with rugs, bushes or grass, which have been placed in readiness for the purpose. The women then commence making a low humming or chanting noise, and several old men armed with spears keep watch over them to see that no attempt is made to remove the cov- ering or look about. When these preliminaries have been completed, two men sound bull-roarers (^yoolooduree or yeemboomul) in close proximity and a few other men come along the path and run round inside the circle beating the ground with pieces of bark, similar to those described in my paper on The Burbung of the Wiradthuri Ti-ibes} All the men who are standing about the circle shout and beat their weapons together, a separate detachment of men being located near each group of women for this purpose. During the combined noise of the bull-roarers, the shouting and the beating of the ground, the guardians advance, and, assisted by some of their friends, raise the novices on their shoulders and carry them away, their heads being still covered with the rugs to prevent their seeing anything. The novices are taken as far as the commencement of the inoombeera, where they are placed lying on the ground with the rugs spread over them. Here they are kept a short time until the women depart from the burbung, particulars of which will be given presently. This delay also furnishes an opportunity to the men who have been chosen for the kooringal to go on to the kooroorballunga and paint their bodies jet black with powdered charcoal and grease. The novices are then raised to their feet and the rugs are adjusted on their heads in such a manner that they can only see the ground in front of them. Their guardians lead them along the pathway and they are shown the marked trees, the drawings on the ground, the fire, the squirrel's nest, etc., and are told to take particular no- tice of all these things. They are next conducted along the tracks of the emu until they reach the bird lying on the ground, as already described, around which some old men dance and all the people give a shout. After this they proceed to the eefeemat, and the novices are placed standing in a row. On being told to raise their eyes, they see two old men sitting on the wai'rangooj'inga exhibit- ing different substances out of their mouths, whilst some of the other men are dancing around the heaps of earth. An old man with a coolamin of human blood now approaches the novices and rubs some of the blood on their wrists. The guardians again bend ^ Journ. Anthrop. Inst.,y.y.v, 308, PL xxvi, Fig. 40, 1898.] MATHEWS — INITIATION IN AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. 61 down the boys' heads and a start is made for the bush. The war- rangooringa stumps are then pulled out of the ground and placed upon the fire, some of the men remaining in the vicinity until they are consumed. I must now take the reader back to the burbling ring. Shortly after the guardians and novices get out of sight, the bushes and other coverings are taken off the women and children by the men who have remained in charge of them. They then gather up their baggage and remove to another locality, perhaps several miles dis- tant, where they erect a new camp, each tribe selecting their quar- ters on the side of the camping ground nearest their own country. Before starting from the burbling, a pole is inserted in the ground in a slanting position, elevated and pointing in the direction of the place where the new camp is to be established. If this locality is some distance off, a long pole is used, making a considerable angle with the horizon, but if the camp is not far away, the pole is shorter and the angle of elevation less. The upper end is decorated by having a bunch of green boughs, grass or feathers attached to it. This indicator is left for the guidance of any natives who may arrive at the main camp after the assemblage has broken up. As already stated, the novices have started with the men into the bush. They march along with the rugs projecting on each side of the face like a hood — their guardians being with them, and the other men following, making a considerable noise. During the afternoon they arrive at the place where it is intended they shall remain for the night. A semicircular yard is made of bushes or bark, and the novices are placed sitting on leaves spread upon the •ground, their backs being toward the men's camp, which may be fifty or sixty yards away. This camp is called karpan. Between the men's quarters and the yard in which the novices are kept a space is cleared of all loose rubbish, and one or more fires lit to afford sufficient illumination. After the evening meal has been disposed of, the boys are brought out of their yard and are put sitting down facing the fires, while the Kooringal go through various pantomimic representations and traditional songs. These performances consist for the most part of imitating animals with which the people are familiar, or scenes from their daily life ; and, like the ceremonials of other savage races, are largely mixed with obscene gestures. The animals selected include, amongst others, the totems of some of the novices, the headmen and the kooringal. ^2 MATHEWS — INITIATIOX IX AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. [March 18, During the day the men go out hunting, to provide food for all the party, but the novices remain in the camp in charge of a few of their guardians. Several days may be spent in one camp, or per- haps a fresh camping place is reached every night, especially if game is scarce. In the latter case it would be necessary for the novices and guardians to accompany the rest of the men. The novices march along with the rugs on their heads, and when stop- pages are made in the bush they are placed sitting on the ground with their hands clutching their genitals. On arriving at the place which has been agreed upon as the camping ground for the night, a yard is made for the boys in the usual manner. During the evenings at these camping places human ordure is occasionally given to the novices in addition to their daily food. If they want anything they are not allowed to ask for it, but must make a sign to the guardian who has charge of them. Some or all of the men who are not attached to the kooringal may go away for a day or two to another camping place some miles distant in quest of food, and contribute a fair share of game to the maintenance of the novices and guardians. The period spent in the bush with the kooringal is about ten days or a fortnight, being regulated by the weather and other con- siderations. Different burlesques and songs take place every day, but the general character of the procedure is the same. If the wombat totem is represented, the kooringal crawl under a log as if going into a wombat's hole ; if they select the scrub-turkey, all the men scratch the ground with their feet, kicking the rubbish backwards into a large heap resembling the nest of those birds ; and so on for any other totems which may be represented. ♦ When the course of instruction in the bush is nearly completed, some strange men, called irghindaly or wyeftdee, come from the ahrowanga, or women's camp. They belong to a distant part of the tribal territory, and this is their first participation in the cere- mony. On approaching the karpan, they utter a weird noise, like the howling of the wild dog, and advance in single file, each man holding a leafy bough in front of him, which hides the upper part of his body. The novices are led to believe that a strange mob of blacks are coming to attack the camp. They are then raised to their feet, and placed standing in a row, with their guardians, some of the kooringal, standing on the right and some on the left of the row of boys, having the latter in the middle, holding their hands 1898.] MATHEWS — INITIATION IX AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. 63 to their ears. By this time the irghindaly have reached the camp, and form into a line parallel with and facing the row of men and novices. They jump and shake their boughs, and then, throwing the latter on the ground, they retire a few yards. The kooringal now step forward and pick up the boughs and strip the leaves off them, shouting wah ! wah ! while doing so. The irghindaly then consult with the headmen, and arrange the time for the return of the novices to the ahrowanga, after which they go back to the camp from which they have come, and inform the women when the boys may be expected. The mission of the i?'ghi?tdaly is analogous to that of the beegay of the Kamilaroi, described by me elsewhere, namely, to liberate the novices from the rigorous custody of the kooringal. That evening at the karpan, by the light of the camp fires, some of the usual totemic representations are enacted by the kooringal, after which some of the old men chant Dharroogan' s song. About sunrise next morning the novices are placed standing in a row beside the camp, with their eyes cast upon the ground. All the men then run about pretending to throw pieces of stick at a squirrel in a tree, and while they are doing so two men step into an open space and swing the yooloodury. The blankets are then lifted off the heads of the novices, who are requested to take particular notice of this ceremony. Some armed warriors now rush up to each of the novices in a menacing attitude, and caution them against revealing what they have been taught during their sojourn in the bush. At the conclusion of these proceedings, everything is packed up and a start made toward the women's camp. After proceeding some miles the party come to a halt at a water- hole or running stream. Here a fire is lit, and they partake of such game as may have been caught during the morning. By and by all the kooringal gather on the bank of the water-hole or creek, and one after another goes into the water, washing off the black coloring matter, after which they come out, and paint their bodies all over with pipe clay. During this time the novices are sitting on the bank of the water-hole — or near the fire if the day is cold — and do not participate in the washing and painting ceremony. This water- hole is one which is always used for the same purpose at every burhmig which takes place in this part of the tribal territory, and is never used for bathing on any other occasion. The journey forward is then resumed, and one of the men goes on ahead to report that the bush contingent will shortly arrive. 64 MATHEWS — INITIATION IN AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. [March 18^ I must now give some further particulars of the new camp erected by the women, referred to in an earlier page. The same camp may be occupied all the time the novices are away, or the women may shift to a fresh camping ground every few nights, in conformity with the movements of the kooringal. A patch of ground is cleared near each of these camping places, to which the mothers and sisters of the novices repair every evening for the purpose of sing- ing and dancing during the time the boys are away in the bush with the headmen. As soon as the women are informed of the day which has been fixed for the return of the kooringal, they proceed to this cleared space and erect an avenue of boughs, called the arrowanga^ in the following manner. In this work they are assisted by the old men who have been with them all the time, and also by the irghin- daly contingent. A number of small green saplings are cut down with tomahawks, and the stems are inserted in holes made in the ground, all in a line — the bushy tops being sufficiently close together to make a leafy screen, about four feet high. A few feet from this, another line of saplings is set up, parallel with the other. The two rows of boughs are fixed in the ground with a slant toward each other, so that their tops almost meet overhead, forming a kind of arched avenue long enough to hold all the kooringal. A few yards on one side of this avenue, and parallel thereto, the women light about four fires, beyond which they sit down in a row, and commence chanting in monotonous tones. When all is ready, a signal is given by the men who have charge of the women, and the bush mob approach in single file, all painted white, as already stated. On coming in sight of the arrowanga^ the novices and their guardians stop behind, and go to another camp a little way off, where they remain for the night. The women are now told to lie down, and are covered with bushes. The kooringal march on and enter the avenue of bushes, one after the other, and sit down with their legs gathered under them in the usual native fashion. During this time a small bull-roarer, called dha/gitngun, is sounded out of sight in the rear. A few of the head- men jump round outside the avenue, beating together two boom- erangs, and muttering wooh / wooh ! After going round two or three times, they shout hirr ! birr ! and all the women stand up and dance round the men who are hidden in the avenue. After going round a few times, the women commence pulling down the bough screen, upon which all the kooringal rise to their feet, and also 1898.] MATIJEWS — INITIATION IN AUSTKALIAN TRIBES. 65 commence pulling the bushes out of the ground, breaking them smaller and throwing them on the fires as they jump about. The women also assist in breaking the twigs off the boughs and placing them on the fires. By this time a dense smoke is issuing from the burning bushes, and some of the kooringal stand in the smoke around each fire until they are all sufficiently fumigated. A few of the, old headmen stand round directing the proceedings, and the irghindaly assist in throwing bushes on the fires when more smoke is required. While the kooringal are standing on the smouldering boughs, the women come up and rub their hands on them, ostensi- bly to wipe the white paint off them. When the ceremony is over it is getting near sundown, and the kooringal mix with the women and irghindaly, and all of them go into the camp adjacent. During the forenoon of the following day the mothers and sisters of the novices, accompanied by some of the men, again muster at the arrowanga, but on this occasion no bough screen is erected, and the women are allowed to see everything which takes place. Some fires are lit and green bushes cut and laid round ready for use. At the camp to which the novices and their guardians went the even- ing before preparations are also made for the approaching cere- mony. The bodies of the boys are smeared over with ashes from the camp fires, and the hair of their heads is singed, to make the women believe that they have been burnt by the evil spirit and have just emerged from the fire. After a mutual interchange of signals that everything is ready at both camps the guardians and novices start forward, marching two and two till they arrive at the arrowanga. As they approach the women shout " Heh ! heh !" and throw pieces of bark over their heads. The irghindaly lay some of the green bushes on the fires and each guardian conducts his novice into the smoke, which curls upward around them both. The mothers of the boys, who have been standing on one side, now ad- vance and rub their open hands over the bodies of their sons, after which they rub their teats on their mouths. The sisters of the novices next step forward and rub their feet on their brothers' ankles. During the whole of this ceremony the novices keep their eyes cast down, and do not look at their mothers or sisters. A signal is now given and they scamper off with their guardians to a camp which has been prepared for them not far away. At the conclusion of the ceremonies at the arrowanga all the tribes shift camp to another place, perhaps a few miles away, and PKOC. AMEPv. PHILOS. SOC. XXXVII. 157. E. PRINTED MAY 25, 1898. 66 MATHEWS — INITIATION IX AUSTRALIAN TEIBES. [March 18, next morning the novices are brought up in close proximity, where they are again smoked, after which they are invited to partake of food spread upon nets by the women. They are then conducted to a camp a little way from the men's quarters, where the old head- men show them quartz crystals and other sacred substances; and also small pieces of wood called handhanyay or kiingara, on which certain mystic lines are made, said to be the work of Dharroogan. They are forbidden to eat certain kinds of food until released from these restrictions by the old men. The ceremonies being now at an end, the visiting tribes make preparations for starting on their return journey, and in a few days most of them are on their way homeward, each tribe taking their own novices with them. The latter are kept under the control of their seniors for a considerable time, and must conform to cer- tain rules laid down by the headmen. It is also necessary that they shall attend one or more additional Burhung gatherings before they can become thoroughly acquainted with the different parts of the ceremonial and be fully qualified to take their place as men of the tribe. On the Macleay river there is an abbreviated form of inaugural rite, known as the Mu7'rawin, and among the tribes occupying the Nymboi and Mitchell rivers there is a short ceremony called the Walloonggurra. Both these rites are of a probationary character, leading up to the fuller ceremonial of the burbujig, from which they differ in so many respects that I have thought it necessary to describe them in separate articles. Before cannibalism ceased to be practiced by the tribes dealt with in this paper it was the custom to kill and eat a man during the burbling ceremonies. The victim was an initiated man of the tribe, and his flesh and blood were consumed by the men and novices. I am preparing an article dealing fully with this and similar customs, so that further reference is unnecessary at present. Explanation" of Plate V. The burbling described in the preceding pages completes a series of articles written by me on the different types of initiatory rites of the aboriginal tribes scattered over the whole of New South Wales. I have now prepared a map of the colony, defining the boun- daries of the several districts within which each type of ceremony 189S.] MATHEWS — IXITIATIOX IX AUSTRALIAX TRIBES. 67 is in force. On this map I have marked the approximate position of these boundaries, and have assigned to each district a distin- guishing numeral, from i to 9, so that they can be readily identi- fied. It is outside the purpose of this paper to define the areas occupied by the people speaking the different dialects prevalent in each district, but the names of some of the most important of them will be stated in a general way under each number. The reader will be referred to certain articles which I have published describ- ing the initiation ceremonies, and also the totemic divisions of the tribes located inside the boundaries shown upon the map. No. I on the map represents a wide zone of country stretching from near the Murray river almost to the Barwon, occupied chiefly by the Wiradjuri-speaking people. This includes the VVonghibons, a branch of the Wiradjuri, who are spread over the country from Mossgiel to Nyngan.^ On the Lower Murrumbidgee and extending up the Murray from about Euston are several small tribes speaking the following dialects : The Eetha-eetha, Watthi-watthi, Kianigani, Yuppila, Yota Yota, Boorabirraba and some others on the upper Murray whose initiation ceremonies are the same as the Wiradjuri. For my descriptions of the burbling of these people the reader is invited to peruse the following publications : Journ. Anthrop. Inst. London, Yo\. xxv, pp. 295-318; Ibid., Vol. xxvi, pp. 272-275. Froc. Roy. Gcog. Soc. Ausf. (Q.), Vol. xi, pp. 167-169, and Journ, Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales, Vol. xxxi, pp. 111-153. I have also dealt with their totemic division in the last-named work, pp. 171-176. No. 2 includes the country of the Kamilaroi, Yookumble, Wal- laroi, Pickumble, YuoUary, Wailwan, Moorawarree and a few others. The Bora ceremony of these tribes is described by me in the following works : Journ. Anthrop. Inst. London, Vol. xxiv, pp. 411-427; Ibid., Vol. xxv, pp. 318-339; Journ. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales, Vol. xx/iii, pp. 98-129; Ibid, Vol. xxx, pp. 211-213; Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, Vol. ix, N. S., pp. 137-173- I ^^^^'^ described their totemic divisions in Journ. Roy. Soc. N. S. Jf'a/es, Vol. xxxi, pp. T.56-168. No. 3. In this tract of country the Bunan ceremony is in force. Some of the dialects are the Thurrawall, Wodi Wodi, Jeringin, Ngarroogoo, Beddiwell, Mudthang, Dhooroomba, Gundungurra 1 Mr. A. L. P. Cameron kindly furnished me with the location of the Wong hibon, Eethee Eethee and Watthi Watthi tribes. 68 MATHEWS — INITIATION IN AUSTRALIAN TEIBES. [March is, and Wonnawal. I have given a comprehensive account of this ceremony, with a plate illustrating the Bunan ground and the dif- ferent objects connected with it in the American Anthropologist, Washington, Vol. ix, pp. 327-344. No. 4 represents the country occupied by the tribes speaking the Darkinung, Wannerawa, Warrimee, Wannungine, Dharrook and some other dialects: Their country commences at the Hunter river and extends southerly till it meets and merges into that of tiie people of No. 3. Their ceremony of initiation is known as the Narramang, which is described in a paper published in Froc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, Vol. x, N. S., pp. 1-12. Their totemic system is dealt with in ^Journ. Roy. Soc. JV. S. If ales, Vol. xxxi, pp. 170-171. No. 5. Within this area, which extends from the Hunter river almost to the Macleay, the initiation ceremonies are of the Keeparra type described by me in Jour?i. Anthrop. Inst. London, Vol. xxvi, pp. 320-340. This tract of country is inhabited by the remnants of the tribes speaking different dialects, some of the most important of which are the following : Wattung, Gooreenggai, Minyowa, Molo, Kutthack, Bahree, Karrapath, Birrapee, etc. North of the Hunter river and extending along the sea coast to about Cape Hawk there is an elementary ceremony called Dhalgai, which I have included in the article last quoted. No. 6 represents the hunting grounds of the tribes whose initia- tion ceremonies are dealt with in the preceding pages. Their sec- tional divisions are the same as the tribes in No. 5, and are described mjour. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales, Vol. xxxi, pp. 168-170. No. 7 comprises the country of the Bunjellung, Gidjoobal, Kahwul, Nowgyjul, Watchee, Yackarabul, Ngandowul and some other small tribes, whose initiation ceremonies are of the Wandarral type, described by me in Froc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, Vol. x, N. S., pp. 29-42. Districts Nos. 2, 7, 8 and 9 cross the boundary of Queensland, and Nos. i and 8 extend some distance into the Vic- torian frontier. No. 8. On the west of Nos. i and 2 are the Barkunji, Bung- yarlee, Bahroongee, Wombungee, Noolulgo and some other tribes, occupying the country on both sides of the Darling river, as well as on the Lower Paroo and Warrego. South of the Murray river are several small tribes, among which may be mentioned the Wamba Waraba, Waiky Waiky, Latjoo Latjoo, Mutti Mutti, etc. I have 1898.] MATHEWS — INITIATION IX AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. 69 referred to the totemic divisions of the Barkunji and kindred tribes \\\ Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc, Aust., Queensland, Vol. x, p. 32. Their initiation ceremonies are described by me elsewhere. No. 9. In this triangular portion of New South Wales we encounter the advance guard of those tribes who practice circum- cision and subincision, extending thence northerly into Queensland and westerly into South Australia. The customs of these people will be dealt v/ith bv me in another article. APPENDIX. The Nguttan Initiation Ceremony. In this article it is intended to give a short account of the Nguttan, an abbreviated ceremony of initiation practiced by the native tribes of the Williams and Gloucester rivers and surrounding country. Although it is not necessary to muster the whole community for the purpose of installing the youths into the privileges of tribesmen by means of the Nguttan, yet it is always thought safest to consult with the headmen of some of the nearest neighboring tribes, who may also have one or more youths old enough to pass through the ordeal. The preliminaries are arranged by means of messengers, and when the appointed time comes round the tribes proceed to the appointed meeting place. Here the combined concourse indulge in corrobo- ries and songs at night by the camp fires. The men of each tribe dance in their turn and their women beat time for them. When the festivities have lasted for a few days the headmen decide upon the time for taking away the novices. Early on the appointed morning all the men assemble under pretense of going on a hunting expedition, or perhaps they represent that they are making an incursion into the country of a hostile tribe for the purpose of avenging some supposed injury. The novices are mustered out of their mothers' camps and are taken charge of by the men. The women are not told anything about these proceedings, but all the elder ones and those who have been present at similar gatherings before form their own conclusions in regard to the purpose of the meeting. A number of the men, with the novices amongst them, start first, and are immediately followed by the rest of the men, singing and shouting as they march along in the rear. The novices are told that 70 MATHEWS — INITIATIOX IX AUSTRALIAX TRIBES. [March IS, these incantations are for the purpose of making a plentiful supply of game, or to cause them to be victorious over their enemies. The men are painted in the manner customary on these expeditions. After traveling perhaps several miles they come to a water-hole or running stream, where a halt is made. The novices are now taken charge of by the men who have been appointed for this duty. Each of these men is the brother-in-law — actually or collaterally — of the graduate who has been placed under his care. The novices are stripped naked, and after being painted are placed sitting cross-legged on the ground, with both hands grasping their genitalia and their heads bowed toward their breasts. Their guardians and some of their relatives remain with them, but all the other men go away, taking their departure quietly and a few at a time so that the boys may not know that they are gone. These men go away to a suitable camping ground, perhaps a mile or two distant, which has previously been agreed upon, and there they erect a camp of bark or bushes and spread leaves on the ground for the novices to lie upon. They then go into the bush hunting to provide food for themselves and the rest of the party. Late in the afternoon the guardians and other men who remained with the novices bring the latter to this new camp — each boy with his eyes cast down and being forbidden to look at anything around him — and place them lying down upon the leaves with rugs thrown over them. Fires are lit near where they are lying, ^ and they are sub- jected to considerable heat, which causes them to perspire very freely, but they are not permitted to move and must keep silent. During the evening, perhaps an hour after sundown, by the light of the camp-fires, some of the usual totemic dances, described by me in previous communications, and other instructive performances, are gone through by the men, and the novices are allowed to sit up and look at them. Some of the men exhibit their genitals to the boys and invite them to pay especial attention to a number of other obscene gestures. After this human excrement is thrown to the novices, which they are required to eat, and also to drink urine out of a native vessel. At the conclusion of these proceedings all hands lie down for the night. Early next morning about half the men start away without the knowledge of the boys and go into the bush in quest of food. ^ Compare with the fire ordeal described by me in " The Bunan Ceremony of N. S, Wales," in the American Anthropologist (1S96), Vol. ix, pp. 335, 336. 1898.] MATHEWS — IXITIATIOX IX AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. 71 About midday they return, and on coming within hearing of the camp they commence making a weird noise, like the howling of the native dog, and advance in single file, each man carrying a leafy bough which hides his face and chest. When these men, who are called ghirrang, reach the camp where the novices are they spread out in a line and spring up into the air, waving their arms and uttering grunt-like exclamations. The novices are led to believe that the ghirrang belong to a hostile tribe and will perhaps attack them and their guardians. The ghirrang and other men then produce several small sheets of bark stripped from trees, on which some dharroong devices have been carved, similar to the marks on the trees standing around a Kee- parra ground.^ These pieces of bark are placed at intervals of a few yards along the cleared space which was used for dancing and per- forming upon the previous night. The novices are now brought out in front of these pieces of bark and are invited to take particu- lar notice of them. They are at first shown the dharroong on one sheet of bark, and are then taken to each of the others in succes- sion, but are not allowed to speak a word. When this part of the ceremony has been disposed of, the men form into two divisions — one mob standing on one side of the cleared space and another mob on the other side — the graduates being placed in a row facing them. The humming sound of the bull-roarer, miidthinga, is now heard a little way in the rear, and almost immediately two men step out into the opening, each man swinging one of these instruments at the end of a string. The usual obligations of secrecy are then imposed upon the neophytes, after which the sacred umdthinga is rubbed upon their penises, chests, arms and other parts of their bodies. While doing this the string of the bull-roarer is placed round each lad's neck in rotation. The guardians, novices, and all the rest of the men now start away from that place, and proceed toward the women's camp — which, it should be mentioned, was removed to another locality the same day the men and boys went away. A man is sent ahead to announce that the contingent from the bush will return presently, and upon receipt of this message the women muster on a level, open parcel of land contiguous to their camp. Here the mothers of the neophytes spread nets upon the ground, on which 1 See my " Keeparra Ceremony of Initiation," Journ. Anthrop. Inst., Vol. xxvi, pp. 320-338, PL xxxii, Figs. 6 to 13. 72 MATHEWS — INITIATION IN AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. [March 18, they lay food for the use of their sons. The sisters of the novices and the other women also assemble near this spot, which is called ngtirra nyalla. When these preliminaries have been arranged, the men and boys come marching on, painted and dressed in their full regalia as men of the tribe, and as they approach the women throw sticks over their heads. Ihe novices step forward to the nets, and eat the food which their mothers have provided for them. After this the women return to their own camp, but the graduates are taken by their guardians to a place near the single men's quarters. During that evening some of the old headmen show the novices the sacred white stones, which are so much valued by all native tribes. These white stones, which in this district are called biiggan, are said to be found in the scrubby mountains beyond Banaon Grove, near the head of the Williams river, and are supposed to be the excrement of Gceh Mudyei" Dhingga (Goen of the Hairy Hands), a malevolent being who has his abode in these mountain fastnesses. A number of clever old men — the so-called wizards of their tribes — used to make periodical expeditions into these regions for the purpose of obtaining supplies of the buggan. On these occasions it was not considered safe for a man to travel alone, but it was neces- sary that several should go in company. At their camps at night they were required to sing songs similar to those which form part of the keeparr-a ceremonial, and the camp-fires had to be main- tained by burning certain kinds of wood to be found in that dis- trict. During the night, while the old men were asleep, Goen was supposed to appear, accompanied by some of his coadjutors, and put white stones into their dilly bags. If any of the old men of the company had been remiss in their observance of any of the tribal customs, they would keep awake, holding a burning brand in their hand, in order to protect them- selves against Goen's evil designs. The only way in which such men could secure the sacred buggan was to search for them along the sides of hills or watercourses, where they had been deposited by Goen. Every youth who graduates through the Nguttan is required to attend the next keeparra ceremony which takes place among his own people — or the burbling oi those tribes who adjoin them on the northwest — in order that he may receive further instruction in the sacred initiatory rites of the community. 1S98.] SCOTT — OX THE SELEXODONT ARTIODACTYLS. 73 Short or probationary forms of inauguration ceremonies are found in several districts, and a knowledge of them is highly valuable, as exhibiting the various stages through which a youth must pass before he is qualified to take his place as a full man of his tribe. In a different portion of the same tract of country, there is another ele- mentary ceremony known as the Dhalgai, described by me else- where.^ Both the Ngicttan and the Dhalgai are practiced in parts of the geographical area represented as No. 5 on the map of New South Wales hereto appended (Plate V). PRELIMINARY NOTE ON THE SELENODONT ARTIODACTYLS OF THE UINTA FORMATION. BY W. B. SCOTT. (^Bead March 18, 1898.) In 1895, ^^r- J- I^- Hatcher collected for the Princeton Museum some unusually well-preserved specimens of Selenodont Artiodactyls in the Uinta beds of northern Utah. In preparing a monograph upon these forms I have found certain new and undescribed genera which have proved to be of remarkable phylogenetic interest, and the much more complete material now available of genera pre- viously named gives us most welcome information. As the detailed account of these fossils cannot appear for many months, it is desir- able to publish a brief notice of the new forms and of the principal conclusions to which the study of the Uinta Selenodonts has led. One of the most marked changes between the mammalian life of the Bridger and that of the Uinta is in the great increase of the Artio- dactyls in general and of the Selenodonts in particular. In the Bridger beds only two genera at most of the latter group have been described, and remains of even these are very rare ; in the Uinta, on the other hand, Artiodactyls are the most abundant fossils and not less than eight genera of Selenodonts may be determined, while others are indicated by specimens not sufficiently well preserved for description. The most interesting and striking result to which the study of the ^ " The Dhalgai Ceremony," yourn. Anthrop. Inst., Vol. xxvi, pp. 338-340. 74 SCOTT — ON THE SELENODONT AKTIODACTYLS. [March 18, Uinta Selenodonts has led is the very unexpected conclusion that, with the possible exception of the Oreodonts and Agriochoerids, all of the strictly indigenous North American Seie?iodonts are derivatives of the Tylopodan stejn. The true Ruminants (Pecora) are an Old World type and did not reach this continent till late Miocene times, but the Tylopoda underwent an expansion and differentiation in America comparable to that of the Pecora in Europe, of which they took the place here. This conclusion was long ago suggested, with wonderful insight, by Riitimeyer, but as he did not discuss the question and brought forward no evidence in support of his views, the suggestion never attracted the attention which it so well de- served. The White River forms, Leptomeryx, Hypertragulus, Hypi- sodus and Frotoceras, have long baffled the investigator who attempted to determine their true systematic position, but it has now become exceedingly probable that they are all variants of the Tylopodan type, the main line of which is represented in White River times by the genus Poebrotherium, whose position has long been recognized as ancestral to the modern camels and llamas. It should be added, however, that this somewhat surprising result has been much strengthened and confirmed by far more complete material of Leptomeryx and Hype7'tragiiius than had previously been known. This new material, which was gathered at various times by Messrs. Hatcher and Gidley, makes the Tylopodan affini- ties of these White River genera much more conspicuous than any one had imagined. In the extended paper which is now in course of preparation these newly obtained specimens will be described and figured in comparison with their forerunners of the Uinta. Parameryx Marsh. Amer. Jour. Sci., third series, Vol. xiv, p. 364 {nomen nudiwi). Ibid., Vol. xlviii, p. 269. In this genus the dentition is complete, I. f , C. \, P. |, M. f and there are no diastemata. The incisors and canines are small, the premolars simple and trenchant and the molars very brachyodont and composed of four crescents. The skull is exceedingly like that of Poebrotherium, but has a shorter muzzle, a less capacious cranium, a more widely open orbit and a very much smaller tympanic bulla, which is not filled with cancellous tissue. The ulna and radius are separate, at least in young individuals ; the manus consists of four 1898.] SCOTT — ON THE SELENODONT ARTIODACTYLS. 75 functional digits, though the lateral metacarpals are already very much more slender than the median pair. The fibula is complete and not coossified with the tibia at any point, but its shaft is so reduced as to be a mere thread of bone. The pes contains two functional metatarsals, iii and iv, while Nos. ii and v are long, filiform and splint-like rudiments to which, apparently, no phalanges are attached, but this is still doubtful. The phalanges of the functional digits resemble those of Poebroihei^ium, and the unguals have the same long, pointed and slender, antelope-like shape. There can be very little doubt that Parai7ieryx is the direct and immediate ancestor of the White River Poeb7'othe7Hiim, which it so much resembles, and thus it holds an important place in the main line of Tylopodan descent. Leptotragulus Scott and Osborn. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc, 1887, P- 258. In a former account of this genus, ^ the type of which is a frag- ment of the mandible containing p -3, 4 and m y, I made the mistake of referring to it certain limb and foot bones which, it is now apparent, belong to the very distinct genus Parameryx, from which Leptotragulus differs in the form of the premolars and in the presence of diastemata. At present I am not able to refer to the latter genus any of the newly acquired material, and hence can add nothing to my original account'- of it. It differs but compara- tively little, however, from the following genus, the structure of which may be very fully described. Merycodesmus, gen. nov. Dentition unreduced; I. f, C. \, P. f, M. |; upper incisors conical, pointed and slightly recurved ; upper canine large, com- pressed and thick ; lower canine incisiform ; p -I- near canine, with diastema behind it ; p ^ with deuterocone ; p y caniniform and opposing upper canine ; p y with large deuteroconid. Molars com- posed of four crescentic lobes, m -3 with fifth lobe. Forehead elongate and lozenge-shaped, sagittal crest short, as in Parameryx ; mandible with very extended angle. Manus and pes having four ^ Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc, Vol. XVI, p. 479. 2 Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc, 1887, p. 258. 76 SCOTT — OX THE SELENODONT ARTIODACTYLS. [March 18, functional digits ; lateral metapodials less reduced than in Para- meryx. Merycodesmus gracilis, sp. nov. Size small ; orbit small and bounded behind by very long decurved postorbital process of frontal ; cranium relatively broad and capacious ; mandible very slender. Measurements. Upper dentition, length I i to M 3 0.071 premolar-molar series, length 054 molar series, length. .- 022 canine, ant. -post, diameter 006 canine, transverse diameter 003 M I, length 006 M I, width 0085 M 2, length 008 M 2, width 010 M 3, length 009 M 3, width on Lower dentition, length I i to M 3 072 '' premolar-molar series, length 058 '' premolar series, length 032 '^ molar series, length 026 P I, length 0045 P 2, length 0055 P 3, length 007 P 4, length 0065 M I, length 0065 M 2, length oo75 M 3, length on (N. B. — The apparently great length of the premolar series is due to the diastema behind pi) The dentition of Aferycodesmus is quite similar to that of Para- meryXy but differs in certain very significant ways. Thus, the lower incisors have more chisel-shaped crowns, and the lower canine has become one of them in form and function ; the upper canine is much larger and the first lower premolar has taken on the form and function of the canine. In each jaw a long diastema separates p i 1898.1 SCOTT — ON THE SELENODOXT ARTIODACTYLS. 77 from p 2. The other premolars and the molars are much alike in the two genera save that the latter are relatively broader in Mery- codesmus. This genus differ from Lepiotragitlus in the greater com- plexity of the inferior premolars, and especially in the large development of the deuteroconid on p ^. From Orojneryx it may be distinguished by the diastemata and by the more symmetrically quadrate shape of the upper molars. The skull bears a close resemblance to that of Pa^-ameryx, but has a somewhat more elongate muzzle and longer postorbital pro- cesses of the frontals ; the forehead has the same elongate lozenge- like shape, the temporal ridges converging gradually behind into the short sagittal crest ; the mandible has an elongate, slender hori- zontal ramus, which is somewhat stouter than that of Pararneryx ; whether the very broad ascending ramus possessed a similar hook- like angle to that of the latter genus cannot at present be precisely determined ; the coronoid process is even more recurved and pointed. The posterior nares are far back, their front border being opposite m ^, and a deep palatal notch intervenes between the hinder half of m ^ and the external wall of the narial canal. The axis has a conical odontoid process. The fore foot has four digits, of which the lateral metacarpals are reduced and slender, though distinctly less so than in Para7?ieryx. The tarsus is lower than in the latter genus, and the lateral meta- tarsals are functional, not mere filiform splints. The phalanges are essentially alike in the two genera. The entire structure of Merycodesmus strongly suggests that it was the forerunner of the White River genus, Leptotneryx, and, through a somewhat different line, of Protoceras also. In Lep- tomeryx the upper canines have been lost, the lower canine resem- bles an incisor, but p y is just like a minute canine and one can hardly escape the inference that it formerly functioned as a canine and has dwindled because of the loss of the upper canine, which it opposed. Protoce7'as still retains, in the male sex, the large upper canine, which is opposed by p. y and thus abraded upon the poste- rior surface, but in the females the upper canine is vestigial. Camelomeryx, gen. nov. I.^, C.i, P.i, M.-^. Upper incisors small, canines stout, but short; along diastema between p i and p ^. Premolars and molars closely 78 SCOTT — ox THE SELENODONT ARTIODACTYLS. [March 18, resembling those of the preceding genus, but molars with larger ex- ternal buttresses. Forehead broad and short, sagittal crest long; temporal ridges confined to frontals. Posterior nares farther back than in Merycodesmus and palatal notches absent. In this genus the superior dentition is, except in the character of the incisors, very similar to that of Merycodesmus, but the shape of the forehead, the cranium and the hinder part of the palate are very different. In the absence of the lower jaw, it is not prac- ticable to determine finally whether this form is congeneric with LeptotraguluSy but the character of the upper premolars leads me to believe that it will prove to be quite distinct. Cameloitteryx longiceps, sp. no v. Size, small ; cranium long and slender ; orbits small and widely open behind ; postorbital processes of frontals extended trans- versely, but little decurved. Measuremejits. Upper dentition, length I i to M 3 0.062 canine, ant. -post, diameter 005 canine, transverse diameter 003 premolar-molar series, length 051 ^' premolar series, length 029 *' molar series, length 021 '' M I, length 0055 '^ M I, width 0075 " M 2, length 007 '' M 2, width 010 " M 3, length 0085 M 3, width 01 15 n li cc That Came/omeryx and Merycodes77ius are nearly allied genera will be at once apparent from the foregoing description. Whether the former is the ancestor of some White River genus, such as Hypei'traguliis, or whether it is a mere variant of Merycodesmus and without permanent phylogenetic significance, must await the decision of more complete material. Oromeryx Marsh. Orome?yx Marsh, Amer. Journ. Sci., third series, Vol. xiv, p. 364 {ii077ien 7iuduf7i), 1898.] SCOTT — OX THE SELEXODOXT ARTIODACTYLS. 79 Oromeryx Marsh, Anier. Journ. Sci., third series, Vol. xlviii, p. 269. No representative of this genus has yet been detected in the Princeton collection ; it may be distinguished from the preceding genera by two principal characters. According to Marsh, '* there is no diastema in the dentition," and in the second place, his figure shows that the upper molars, especially m ^, have a subovate crown, due to the much greater transverse breadth in the anterior than in the posterior half. Protoreodon Scott and Osborn. Agriochcerus MdiXsh. (non l^Qidy'), Anier. /cum. Sci., third series, Vol. ix, p. 250. Eomeryx Marsh, ibid., Vol. xiv, p. 364 {/io7fien nudiun). Protoreodon Scott and Osborn, Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc, 1887, P- 257. Eomeryx Marsh, Amer. Journ. Sci., third series. Vol. xlviii, p. 266. The collection contains a large number of specimens appertain- ing to this genus, and adds very materially to our knowledge of it, but as the newly acquired individuals only confirm the conclusion previously reached, that this genus is ancestral to the Oreodontidce. of the Oligocene and Miocene, description of the new material will be reserved for the extended paper. Agriotherium gen. nov. Premaxillaries reduced and upper incisors small ; upper canine large, recurved and trihedral ; premolars simple and thick trans- versely; py caniniform ; p ^ implanted by three fangs, but has no deuterocone ; deuterocone of p ^ conical, not crescentic ; molars like those of Protoreodon, but with outer crescents of superior molars more concave, and more prominent median buttress, into wdiich median valley extends. Cranium relatively longer and face shorter than in Protoreodon and postorbital processes of frontals shorter. This genus is evidently very close to Protoreodon, but may be distinguished from it by the reduced premaxillaries, the smaller incisors, the simpler premolars and the more concave outer lobes of the upper molars, as well as by the longer cranium, shorter face, and less prominent postorbital processes. ({ n 80 SCOTT — ON THE SELENODONT ARTIODACTYI.S. [March IS, Agnotheriu?n paradoxicum, sp. nov. Skull about equal to that of Oreodon gracilis in length, but much more depressed ; mandible stout and chin steeply inclined. Aleasureinents. Skull, length on .basal line 0-131 " width across zygomata 077 Length occ. crest to ant. border of orbit 085 ** ant. border orbit to prmx 051 Mandible, height of condyle o4(S " depth at m.o 025 Upper premolar-molar series, length 0525 " premolar series, length 029 molar series, length 024 canine, ant. -post, diameter 006 canine, transverse diameter 006 P I, length 0075 '' P 2, length 0065 *' P 3, length 007 *' P 3, width 006 " P 4, length 006 '' P 4, width 0085 '* M I, length 075 '' M I, width 009 "■ M 2, length , 008 '' M 2, width on '* M 3, length 009 "■ M 3, width 012 Lower P 3, length 007 P 3, width 003 P 4, length 0075 '* P 4, width 004 " molar series, length 027 '* Mi, length 007 '' M I, width 0055 '* M 2, length ' 008 *' M 2, width 006 M 3, length 012 M 3, width 007 it n 1S98.] MINUTES. 81 The differences between Protoreodon and Agriotherium are such as strongly to suggest the inference that, while the former is the ancestor of the Oreodonts, the latter stands in a similar relation to the Agriochcerids. This determination can, at present, be only provisional, until more is learned concerning the foot-structure of the present genus. At all events, if Agriotherium be not the desired ancestral form, we may feel confident that that form, when found, will prove to be of a very similar character. Hyomeryx Marsh. Amer. Journ. Sci., third series. Vol. xlviii, p. 268. This genus, which is described as having no upper incisors, I have not seen. It differs from the two preceding genera not only in the loss of the upper incisors, but also in the form of the upper molars, which have far less concave external crescents, and less prominent outer buttresses. The study of the Uinta Selenodonts lends much strength to the opinion expressed by various writers, that the Oreodonts are related to the Tylopoda. It now appears likely that this family leads back either to Homacodon of the Bridger, or to some nearly allied form of the same family. If this be true, we shall then have the more extended generalization, that all of the indigenous North American Selenodonts belonged to the Tylopoda and that this suborder has had a much more extended and varied development than we have hitherto supposed. While this conclusion is already extremely probable for the other families, we have yet to find the direct fore- runners of Protoreodon and Agriotherium before it can be estab- lished for the Oreodonts and Agriochcerids. Stated Meeting^ April i, 1898. * Mr. Fredekick Prime in the Chair. Present, 12 members. Correspondence Avas submitted and donations reported. Dr. Morris, on behalf of the Curators, exhibited a fac- simile of the Declaration of Independence in the handwriting PROG. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXXVII. 157. F. PRINTED JUNE 7, 1898. 82 MINUTES. [AprU 1, of Thomas JeffersoD, whicli, witli some accompanying memo- randa also in tlieir possession, they have had framed for better preservation. It is evidently the same as that contained in Yol. iv of Eandolph's Memoirs ofJefferson^ and likewise from the same plates as (previons to their completion) the proof copy in a black frame now in the Librar}^, and identified as such by Mr. Corbin, of the American Bank Kote Company, by marks of the unfinished condition of one of the plates, absence of notes "Dr. Franklin's handwriting" and "Mr. Adams' hand- writing ' ' from margin , as well as by the texture of the paper. This facsimile now framed for preservation has at com- mencement the marks in ink ' 'Draft 'A' " ; the handwriting of which is pronounced by Mr. F. J. Dreer to be that of John Yaughan, an interesting letter from whom, as to the Jeffer- son-Lee MS. is in Mr. Dreer' s collection at the Historical Society's hall, also an alleged/ac-^zmtZe of the originally signed document on quarto paper, otherwise closely resembling this Draft A, but lithograph, said to be copied from MS. in De- partment of State at Washington; none such is known there. This framed facsimile has also the following in leadpencil, "these leadpencil marginal entries make Draft B — this Draft B is copy sent to Lee by Jefferson." Mr. Dreer also identifies the marginal notes as to hand- writings of Dr. Franklin and Mr. Adams, as the facsimile of Jefferson's handwriting, so that the latter must have anno- tated the copy used in preparing Jefferson's Memoirs by Randolph. He also finds in his diary of May 13, 1889, as follows: " Met Major Frank Etting, Fred. D. Stone, Simon Gratz. and Mr. Philip S. P. Connor, at the Philosophical Society rooms to compare and determine who wrote, the interlined and marginal notes on the proof copy of the Declaration of Independence." This explains the attached note of F. M. E. of the same date. A copy is also given of letters of Jefferson and R. H. Lee, 1898.] MINUTES. 83 the latter dated from Chantilly, his residence in Virginia, as to the Jefferson-Lee document. Dr. Hays asked if this is the facsimile copy which Dr. Morris took out of the Librarian's desk last autumn under the impression that it was an unknown, orig^inal, Jefferson auto- graph draught of the Declaration of Independence. Dr. Morris replied that it was the same copy. Dr. Hays stated that tl^i-s, facsimile is catalogued on page 573 of the printed catalogue of the Society's library, and had the library officials had any intimation of Dr. Morris' inten- tion to take it he would have been informed that it was only 0, facsimile of the well-known rough draught, which has been reproduced in almost every edition of Jefferson's works. It has all the appearances of having been torn out of a copy of Randolph's edition and possesses no special value. Mr. Edmunds asked where the original of ihi^ facsimile is. Dr. Morris replied that it is in the possession of the Uni- versity of Virginia. Dr. Hays expressed surprise at this statement, as he was not aware that the University of Virginia had ever possessed it. The United States claimed to have acquired it fifty years ago, with the other Jefferson papers from the Jefferson heirs, who, by the terms of their sale to the United States, agreed to convey "all the papers and manuscripts" of Thomas Jefferson in their possession. In the Department of State at Washington there is framed under glass and kept in a fire- proof safe a manuscript which is said to be this original. ^ Mr. James Douglas presented an obituary notice of Dr. Thomas Sterry Hunt. The following communications were presented : B}^ Prof. Edward H. Williams, Jr., " N'otes on Kansan Drift in Pennsylvania." By Mr. John Van Denburgh, " Herpetological Xotes." By Dr. I. Minis Hays, "A IS'ote on the History of the ^ Dr. Hays has since verified tlie statement that this original is in the Department of State at Washington. 84 WILLIAMS — ON KANSAX DRIFT IN PENNSYLVANIA. [April 1, Jefferson Manuscript Dranglit of the Declaration of Inde- pendence in the Library of the Societ}^" B}^ Mr. S, F. Peckham, " The Genesis of Bitumens, as Related to Chemical Geology." Pending nominations Nos. 1432 and 1451 to 1457 and new nominations Nos. 1458 to 1464 were read. The Society was adjourned by the presiding member. NOTES ON KANSAN DRIFT IN PENNSYLVANIA. BY PEOF. EDWAKD H. WILLIAMS, JK. {Read April 1, 189S.) The writer uses the terms Kansan and Wisconsin to represent respectively the furthest ice advance and the first great moraine of recession which was delimited by Lewis and Wright, without accepting the differences in age claimed by some authorities. His work since 1893 has been a study and mapping of the Kansan deposits in this State, and papers have been published from time to time, copies of which have been deposited in the library of this Society. At the Buffalo meeting of the American Association for the Ad- vancement of Science, in 1896, the writer presented a few notes on the work of the preceding months and claimed that the ice which covered the northern part of this State oriL>inated at two centres, an eastern and a western, as tiie lithological burden on either side of the apexes of both Kansan and Wisconsin deposits differed widely in character, kinds and amount of crystalline and clastic material. This claim was further substantiated by the fact, shown in the sketch accompanying this paper, that the apex of the earlier line of drift had been overridden by the latter, while, had the latter been a moraine of recession only, there should have been a contin- uous Kansan border. To these claims the writer now wishes to add two more. First, that the powers of the two bodies of ice on either side of the apex were unequal, as the eastern Kansan border will average thirty 1898.] WILLIAMS — ON KAXSAX DRIFT IX PENNSYLVANIA. 85 miles in width, while the western averages but six. This is in accordance with the deductions of the late Prof. James D. Dana, in the last paper he wrote on glaciation, in attempting to account for the wide difference between the eastern and western deposits. It is well known that Mr. Upham began his work in the east and held to the theory of a single glacial epoch. After work in the west he accepted that of two or more periods. On his return to the east he returned to his first opinion. This is an epitome of the wide difference in appearance between the few strong moraines of the east and the multiplicity of the deposits of the west, and Prof. Dana theorized that such difference must have been caused by the abundant precipitation of the east and the scanty precipitation of the west, so that the deficit of dry seasons would bear a smaller proportion to the total precipitation in the east than in the west, and the strength and persistence of the ice at certain latitudes in the east would be balanced by the many fluctuations of the west. The strength thus predicted for the eastern glacier is shown by the wider margin found and by the variation in the position of the apex. While the western Kansan ice retreated to the position taken by the Wisconsin margin, the relaxation of the pressure was accompanied by an advance of the eastern ice across the region of the apex. The second claim for a double origin substantiates the theory, as there was found in the summer of 1897, at East Warren, Pa., forty feet below the original surface and 100 feet above the water of the Allegheny river, a rolled piece of native copper as long and thick as the finger, in a lenticule of dense till which resisted the pick. The matrix of clay had preserved the copper from oxidation to such an extent that its surface was still smooth, and with it were found fresh rolled and glaciated crystalline pebbles and local angular elastics. This lenticule was about 120 feet above the rock surface, as shown by a neighboring well section, and the original thickness of glacial deposit was thus 160 feet. This find shows that the western ice traversed the region of the great lakes in a southeastern direction and proves that we had a meeting of two ice sheets near Salamanca, N. Y. The variations in strength and the varying number of moraines of the eastern and western glaciers are thus satisfactorily settled in a simple manner. It remains to say that the writer was unaware at the time he first made the claim for two ori- gins that Prof. Wright had surmised the same (/<:^>./%^'^/>./"\./>-ow/>^ Saw several large Boats coming to the Point w[h]ere the Enemy landed from Ticonderoga : this day we had several Skirmishes from all quarters in which our people behaved with great Bravery, a mor- tar being pointed towards another Indian Hutt fell on it and killed Several. During this day we cannonaded the French Battery and threw a large number of Shells into their Entrenchm*.^ The Artillery at the Camp kept a Constant fire on the Enemy as they came to Attack our out Guards and Rangers who drove them off into the woods. The Rangers brought in an Enemy wounded Indian but he soon died. Friday 5^^ This morning the Enemy began to cannonade our Forts with nine pieces of Cannon 18 & 12 pounders. It was some Time before they could find their mark. At Eleven they tried their Shells, mostly 13 Inches diameter, which fell short but towards the afternoon they got their distance very well, several of their Small Shells falling into the Parade. One of their Shott carried away the Pully of our Flag Staff and the falling of our flag Much rejoyced the Enemy ; but it was soon hoisted tho' one of the men that was doing this had his head Shot off with a Ball, and another wounded. A part of the Enemy and their Indian [allies] advanced near our Camp on which the brave Cap! Waldo of the N. England forces went out to take Possession of a piece of rising Ground near the wood on which a brisk fire unsued on both sides. Col. Monro sent out a second party to Surround the Enemy, but they were forced back and the Enemy advanced up to our quarter Guard. Capt. M. Cloud brought his Cannon to bear upon them soon dispersed them. Here an unlucky accident happened, as some of our men were returning to Camp were taken for the enemy and fired upon by 148 HAYS — THE SIEGE OF FORT WILLIAM HENRY. [April 15, which Several were killed & wounded. During this Attack poor Cap! Waldo was Shot and Soon Expired. Cap! Cunningham of the 35'.'' Reg[ was wounded in the right arm. Saturday [6*!"] Last night the enemy carried on their Entrench- m*^ and Erected a Battery of 10 Guns mostly 18 Pounders about 6 or 700 yards from us bearing N. W. both of Cannon & Mortars. This was the hotest days action from all quarters ; tho' as yet our Garrison remained in high spirits expecting Sir W. Johnson with the Militia and Gen. Liman with the N. England Forces to the number of 3 or 4000 men which we heard were on their march with some more Cannon. Would to God they were permitted to come as their Good will was not wanting. A party of Indians were seen advancing with great Speed towards the road that leads to fort Edward which Confirmed us in our Belief of a Relief. About II o'clock Mons!" Montcalm sent an officer with a Flag, with a letter that was intercepted by the above mentioned Indians from Gen! Webb wrote by his Aid-de-Camp M5 Bartman to Col: Monro acquainting him that his Excellency could not give him his assistance as the Militia had not yet come up to Fort Edward, &c. The French officer delivered an other letter from Montcalm ac- quainting Col: Monro that he came from Europe and Should Carry on the war as a Gentleman and not as the Savages do " but like a true Frenchman, both broke his word and Articles of Capitulation as will appear in the Sequel of this relation. During this interval the Enemy made a Shew of all their Indians, about 1200, on a ris- ing Ground about 250 yards distance bearing S: W: which [while] their Engineers reconitred our old Camp Ground which was after- wards a great Advantage to them. As soon as their Officer returned they began their fire in good Earnest which we returned with the utmost bravery. This day we Split two of our heaviest Pieces of Cannon (viz! 32 pounders) and our largest Mortar was rendered useless which was very unlucky for us as we could not be Supplied with others in their place. This day Col? Monro pub- lished his orders to all in the Fort that if any person proved cow- ardly or offered to advise giving up the Fort that he should be im- mediately hanged over the walls of the Fort and he did not doubt but the officers in the Garrison would stand by him to the last and that he was determined to stand it out to the last or as long as two Legs were together. Sunday f^ The Enemy continued plying us very hard with their 1S98.] HAYS — THE SIEGE OF FORT WILLIAM HENRY. 149 Cannon and Bombs while the Compliment was returned by us with all our Artillery, still hoping for a Reinforcement from Fort Ed- ward. A Shell fell into the South Bastion broke one man's Leg and wounded another ; Split one of our i8 Pounders and burst a Mor- tar. Several of the Enemys Shells fell near the Camp S. S E of our Fort about 400 yards distance and on a line with the fort from the Enemys two Batteries, so that their Shot missing the Fort could Strike the Camp. It appeared that the Enemy could throw their Shells 1300 yards. A Shell fell amongst the officers whilst at din- ner, but did no other mischief than Spoil their dinner by the dirt it tore up. Another Shell fell into the east or flag Bastion and wounded two or three men. Monday 8'? We now began to believe we were much slighted, having received no reinforcement from Fort Edward as was long expected. The Enemy were continuing their Approaches with their Entrenchments from the 2^ Battery towards the Hill on our old Camp Ground, where they were erecting a third Battery, which would have greatly distressed us : There were frequently during these last 2 or 3 days smart skirmishes near our Camp, but we beat them off the Ground. This night we could hear the Enemy at Work in our Garden, on which some Grape Shott was sent in amongst them, which had good Effect as it drove them off, however they had got their 3*^ Battery almost finished by Day Light. Tuesday (ft This Day the Enemies Lines'were finished, parallel to our West Curtain in the Garden, Distance about 150 Yards. Col° Munro, after a Council of War had been convened, wherein the Officers were of Opinion, that the Loss of our heavy Cannon viz* 2, 32 pounders, i, 24 pounders, two 18 pounders, one 9 pounder & 3 Mortars bursting would render it impossible to defend the Fort much longer, as the Enemies, Batteries had increased and our Metal failing us, & no help coming, wherefore it was thought advisable that a white Flag should be hung out in order to capitu- late ; which was done accordingly, and the firing ceased : The Enemy very readily granted the Capitulation : had Monsieur Mont- calm been a Man of Honor, he would have performed his part ; but instead of that such a Scene of Barbarity ensued as is scarce to be credited : After the Articles were agreed on & signed, the Officers left the Fort to a Regiment of the French Regulars who were ready at the Gate, thro' which we marched with most of our valuable Effects & Arms to the Camp and in the Evening three Companies of the 150 HAYS — THE SIEGE OF FORT WILLIAM HENRY. [April 15, 35*!" Regim* had marched out & the other three Companies were on their march out of the Breastwork, when we received Orders to return to our Posts again where we remained till next morning. Wednesday lo'.'' This morning the Marquis MontCalm being desirous of our being eye witnesses of how well he was able to per- form his part of the Capitulation (see the 7^^ Article), the In- dian Doctors began with their Tomhawks to cure the sick and wounded. They began to seize on all the negroes and Indians whom they unmercifully draged over the breast work and scalped. Then began to plunder Col? Youngs and some other officers Bag- gage on which Col? Monro applyed to Montcalm to put a Stop to these inhuman Cruelties but to no purpose, for they proceeded with out interruption in taking the Officers Swords Hats Watches Fuzees Cloaths and Shirts leaving quite naked and this they did to every one they could lay hands on. By this time the 35^!' Reg* had almost formed their line of March and the Provincials commg out of the breast work the French officers did all they could to throw them into Confusion alledging as soon as the Indians had done stripping them they would fall on and scalp them which thru [j/V] them in a panick that rushed on the front and forced them into Confusion, the Indians pursued tearing the Children from their Mothers Bosoms and their mothers from their Husbands, then Singling out the men and Carrying them in the woods and killing a great many whom we saw lying on the road side. The greates[t] part and best of the plunder was brought to the french General. Our officers did all in their power to quiet our Soldiers advising them not to take notice but suffer themselves to be stript without Resistance lest it should be Construed as a Breach of our part of the Capitulation and those that were in the rear Should fall a Sacrifice to their un- bounded fury. Those therefore that had been able to perserve their arms carried them clubed. The French it is true had a detachm! of their men drawn up as is mentioned in the i^ & 6*^ Arti- cle of Capitulation but their only business was to receive the plun- der by the Savages. Finis. 1898.] MATHEAVS — DIVISIONS OF AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. 151 DIVISIONS OF AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. BY K. II. MATHEWS. L.S. {Read April 15, 1S9S.) In 1S91, my attention was drawn by an article contributed to the Royal Society of South Australia/ by the Rev. L. Schultze, to the existence of eight classes or divisions among the native tribes in- habiting the Finke river in South Australia. On making further inquiries, I found that this eight-class system, with different modi- fications, extends northerly from the Finke river almost to Port Darwin and the Gulf of Carpentaria. It also prevails in a westerly direction, from the boundary of Queensland to that of West Aus- tralia, and may therefore be said to be in force over the greater part of the Northern Territory — a name given to the northern por- tion of South Australia. Owing to the great apathy regarding native customs shown by the white population sparsely distributed over this immense tract of country, I have experienced much difficulty in obtaining particu- lars respecting these classes. Among my correspondents I was, however, fortunate enough to find Mr. S. N. Innes, the owner of a station in the Northern Territory. He had read a paper on the class systems of other tribes contributed by me in 1894 to the •Geographical Society at Brisbane,^ which had awakened his interest in the subject, and when I wrote to him he willingly offered to collect particulars of the divisions among the natives in his district. The tribes reported upon by Mr. Innes are divided into eight classes or sections — the names of the women being'slightly different from those of the men in each section. Four of these sections form a group, which may be called A, and the other four sections become group B. This division will be readily understood by means of a table. It will be seen by the accompanying table that the women of group A are the mothers of the men of group B, who marry the women be- longing to the latter group. The women of group B are likewise the mothers of the men who marry the women of group A. In other words, the sons of the women of one group marry the daughters of the women of the other group. Or, what amounts to the same thing, 1 Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Australia, xiv, 2 10-246. ^ Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. Anst., Queensland, x, 18-34. 152 MATHEWS — DIVISIONS OF AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. [April 15 the men of group A marry the sisters of the men of their own gen- eration in group B, and vice versa. Group. Husband. Wife. Children. Sons. Daughters. A Choolum Jameruni Cheenum Yacomary Ningulum Palyareenya Nooralum Bungareenya Palyarin Chooralum Bungarin Chingulum Palyareenya Nooralum Bungareenya Ningulum B Chingulum Bungarin Chooralum Palyarin Noolum Yacomareenya Neenum Neomarum Yacomary Cheenum Tamerum Choolum Yacomareenya Neenum Neomarum Noolum On examining the table further it will be observed that the daughters of the women of group A belong to the same group as their mothers, but to a different section or class of it. For example, Ningulum has a daughter Palyareenya ; Palyareenya produces Nooralum; Nooralum produces Bungareenya ; Bungareenya is the mother of Ningulum, and this series is continually repeated. The women of the A group pass through each of the four classes in as many generations — the same class name reappearing in the fifth epoch. If our example had been taken from the B group, an analogous result would have been obtained. When on the Culgoa river some years ago I collected some in- formation respecting a large tribe speaking the Moorawarrie lan- guage, who occupy the country from about Goodooga on the Bokara river to Barringun on the Warrego, extending southerly about fifty miles and northerly into the Queensland frontier about the same distance. They are divided into four sections, having the same names for the men and women as those of the Kamilaroi tribe,, with rules of marriage and descent as exemplified in the following table : Husband. Wife. Sons and Daughters. Ippai, Kubbitha, Murri and Matha, Kumbo, Matha, Kubbi and Kubbitha, Kubbi , Ippatha, Kumbo and Butha, Murri. Butha. Ippai and Ippatha. 1898.] MATHEWS — DIVISIONS OF AUSTRALIAN TRIBES. 153 The whole community is divided into two groups — the members of the Ippai and Kumbo sections forming the one, and the Kubbi and Murri people constituting the other. The families composing these groups bear the names of different animals, plants, or inani- mate objects, which are called totems, a word copied by us from the North American Indians. Among the totems of the people consti- tuting the Ippai and Kumbo sections may be mentioned the follow- ing: Wirroo (parrot). Emu, Native Dog, Codfish, Bream, Gray Frog, Common Fly, Spider, Plover, Curlew, Water Hen, Sun, Rain, North Wind, Birribil, Doomul, Gidyer, Myall, Kurrajong, Supple Jack, Tea Tree, Lime Tree, Nardoo (Bah), Pig-weed, Bilbee, Gray Kangaroo, Jewfish, Swan, Native Companion, Jew Lizard, Galah, Kangaroo Rat, Grasshopper, Cocklarina, Copi (Moganderra), Hail, Rainbow, West Wind, Numumbeera, Mulga, River Gum, Belar, Quandong, White wood, Hop Bush, Yams, Blue Grass, Sensitive Plant, Mulga Snake, Red Kangaroo, Bronze-wing Pigeon, Plain Turkey, Common Ants, Wood Duck, Native Cat, Top-knot Pigeon, Muscle, Bush Mouse, Blue Bonnet (parrot). Clouds, Lightning, Thunder, Cuttibundi, Carbeen, Blood wood. Leopard Tree, Grooee, Greenwattle, Wild Orange Tree, Lignum, Mitchell Grass. The under-mentioned totemic names may be enumerated as belonging to some of the people comprising the Kubbi and Murri sections : Ground Iguana, Carpet Snake, . Eagle Hawk, Fish Hawk, Tree Iguana, Crow, Scrub Turkey, Common Magpie, Padamelon, Brown Snake, White Cockatoo, Dove, Porcupine, Death Adder, Silvery Fish, Black Magpie, Opossum, Black Duck, Pelican, Bower Bird, Black Snake, Native Bee, Flying Squirrel, Green Frog, 154: t MINUTES. Cross Frog, Shingle-back, Jackass, Mopoke, Turtle, Wasp, Centipede, White Crane, Blue Crane, Ibis, Crimson-wing Parrot, Shag, Diver, Wood Adder, Scorpion, Butterfly, Bull-dog Ant, Moon, South Wind, East Wind, Quartz Stone, Midjeree, Brigalow, Coolaba, Ironbark, Pine, Sandalwood, Apple Tree, Box, Mungal, Cherry Tree, Wirribil, Barley Grass. Nepon Tree, [May 6, East of the Moorawarrie is a large tribe speaking the Uollaroi dialect ; they have the same sectional divisions as the former, and with some variations their totems closely agree. In both tribes descent is reckoned through the mother. In gathering the particu- lars respecting the Moorawarrie tribe, now for the first time pub- lished, I desire to thank Mr. J. E. Miller, of Goodooga, for his will- ing assistance. Stated Meeting^ May 6, 1898. Yice-President Pepper in tlie Chair. Present, 12 members. Dr. Edward Pepper was presented to the Chair, and took his seat as a member. A communication entitled " Contributions to a Revision of the North American Beavers, Otters and Fishes, ' ' by Samnel N. Rhoads, was presented for publication in the Transactions. It was referred to a Committee consisting of Mr. Arthur E. Brown, Mr. Pilsbry and Dr. Jayne. Mr. Edmunds made a statement on behalf of the Com- mittee on the Amendments of the Laws, and moved that when the Society adjourn, it adjourn till 3 P.M. on Friday, May 13. Carried. 1898.] MINUTES. 155 Adjourned Meeting^ May 13, 1898. Yice- President Pepper in the Cliair. Present, 27 members. The consideration of the amendments to the Laws being in order, Mr. George F. Edmunds, on behalf of the Committee proposing the amendments, made a statement concerning the amendments proposed, and on motion the Laws and Ordi- nances were adopted in conformity with the Charter as follows: THE LAWS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOtlETY. Chapter I. OF THE MEMBERS, AND MANNER OF THEIR ELECTION. Section i. The election of members shall be by ballot, and shall form part of the stated business of the meetings on the third Fridays of February, May, October and December. 2. A member may, at any meeting, nominate in writing a can- didate for membership, and the nomination so made may, in like manner, be concurred in by other members. The board of officers and council may also nominate candidates for membership ; and such nominations shall be certified to the Society by a minute there- of in writing, attested by the clerk of said board. 3. No person shall be balloted for, unless his nomination, with the names of the members proposing him, or the minute of the board of officers and council, made as aforesaid, shall have been publicly read to the Society at the two stated meetings preceding that at which the balloting takes place. Nor shall any person be deemed duly chosen unless three-fourths of the votes given shall be in his favor. 4. Before entering upon an election for members, one of the sec- retaries shall read the names of the several candidates ; and any member may then, for the information of the Society, speak to their character and qualifications for membership. 5. The names of the candidates and their places of abode shall be designated on the ballots, and the names of the officers shall be 156 MINUTES. [May 13, called, in the order of their seniority, by the acting secretary, the members thereafter depositing their ballots. The name of a candi- date struck from a ballot or not voted for shall be considered as a vote adverse to that candidate. 6. At the conclusion of the balloting the ballot box shall be opened by the secretaries, or, in their absence, by two tellers to be appointed by the presiding member, who shall then declare to the Society the result of the poll. 7. The members are mutually pledged not to mention out of the Society the name of any candidate proposed, nor of any withdrawn or unsuccessful candidate ; and the papers containing the names of the unsuccessful candidates shall be destroyed immediately after the election. 8. Every member, upon his introduction into the Society, shall be presented to the presiding officer, and shall subscribe the laws. The signatures of members to the Roll shall be deemed an agree- ment to adhere to the laws of the Society. 9. Such members as reside within thirty miles of the hall of the Society, shall pay an admission fee of ten dollars, and annually thereafter, on the first Friday of January, a contribution of five dollars ; and such other members as desire to vote, may do so at any meeting, upon the payment of ten dollars and one year's dues; and they shall, thereafter, pay the annual contribution of five dollars. The payment of one hundred dollars at one time, by a member not in arrears, shall exempt him from all future annual pay- ments. 10. Members-elect, residing within thirty miles of the hall, shall lose the right of membership unless they subscribe the roll, and pay their admission fee within one year after their election. Any mem- ber liable to an annual contribution, who shall neglect or refuse to pay the same for the term of one year shall be notified by the treasurer in writing, on or before the second Friday in January after such default, or as soon thereafter as may be, that his rights as a member are suspended ; and in case the said arrears together with all contributions then due shall not be paid to the treasurer on or before the expiration of sixty days next after such notice, the mem- bership of such defaulting member shall be forfeited, his name stricken from the roll, and reported to the Society by the treasurer. 189S-] MINUTES. 157 Chapter II. OF THE OFFICERS, AND MANNER OF THEIR ELECTION. Section i. The officers shall be a patron, a president, three vice-presidents, four secretaries, three curators, a treasurer, and twelve councillors. 2. The governor of the State of Pennsylvania shall be, ex-officio, the patron of the Society. 3. On the first Friday of January in every year, between the hours of two and five in the afternoon, as many of the members as shall have paid up their arrears due to the Society, and shall have declared their willingness to conform to the laws, regulations, and ordinances of the Society, then duly in force, by subscribing the roll, and who shall attend in the hall, or place of meeting of the society, within the time aforesaid, shall choose by ballot one president, three vice- presidents, four secretaries, three curators, and one treasurer ; and at the same time and place the members, met and qualified as afore- said, shall in like manner choose four members for the council, to hold their offices for three years. Nominations for the elective offi- cers of the Society shall be made at the stated meeting next previous to the day of election. If there should occur a failure of qualified candidates so nominated, others not so nominated may be elected. All officers shall hold office, unless lawfully suspended or removed, until their successors are duly elected and accept. 4. No person residing within the United States shall be capable of being president, vice-president, secretary, treasurer, or member of the council, or of electing to any of the said offices, who is not capa- ble of electing and being elected to civil offices within the State in which he resides. 5. Of the day, hour, and place of election, notice shall be given by a secretary at least one week before the day of election, in such one or more of the public newspapers of the State of Pennsylvania as the Society shall direct. At the stated meeting next before the election the Society shall appoint three of its members to be judges of the election, and also two clerks for taking down the names of the voters. If at the time of election there should occur a failure of the full number of judges or clerks to be present for the performance of their duties, the electors present shall appoint a member or members to fill up the number. The poll shall be opened at two o'clock in the afternoon and be closed at five o'clock in the afternoon. 158 MINUTES. - [May 13, 6. A vacancy occurring in any elective office may be filled for the unexpired term by a vote by ballot taken at any stated meeting after notice of such vacancy shall be given and nominations made and entered in the minutes at a previous stated meeting. Notice that such election will be held shall be given in the notice of the meeting. At any such election the qualifications of voters shall be the same as at the annual elections. At such election three judges shall be appointed and the secretaries on duty shall act as clerks. Chapter III. OF THE PRESIDENT AND VICE-PRESIDENTS. Section t. The president and the vice-presidents shall perform such duties as the rules of administration and order shall prescribe. Chapter IV. OF THE SECRETARIES. Section i. The secretaries shall perform such duties as the rules of administration and order shall prescribe. Chapter V. OF THE curators. Section i. The curators shall perform such duties as the rules of administration and order shall prescribe. Chapter VI. OF THE treasurer. Section i. The treasurer shall perform such duties relating to his office as the rules of administration and order shall prescribe. Chapter VII. of the officers and council. Section i. The officers and council shall perform such duties as the rules of administration and order shall prescribe. Chapter VIII. OF THE librarian. Section i. A member of the Society shall be chosen at the stated meeting on the third Friday of January in each year, to be the librarian of the Society. Nominations for said office shall be made at the first stated meeting in January, and no person shall be voted for who has not been so nominated, but if there shall have been a 189S.] MINUTES. 159 failure of qualified candidates so nominated, one of others not so nominated may be elected. The duties of the librarian shall be prescribed by the rules of administration and order of the Society. Chapter IX. OF THE MEETINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Section i. The stated meetings of the Society shall be on the first and third Fridays of every month from October to May inclu- sive, at eight o'clock in the evening. Special meetings may be called at any time by order of the president ; or, in his absence or disability, by order of a vice-president. And it shall not be lawful to take up, consider or transact at such special meeting any business other than that which is specified in the call and the notice for the meeting. Should the time for any stated meeting, other than the meeting on the day of an annual election, fall on a legal holiday, such meeting shall not be held on that day, but shall be held on the next Friday. - 2. Twenty qualified voters, of whom seven shall be members of the officers and council, present at any stated or special meeting, shall be a quorum, and be competent to elect members, dispose of property, appropriate money, and award premiums ; but no property shall be alienated or encumbered, except by the vote of three-fourths of the qualified voters present, and given at two successive stated meetings. For the transaction of the ordinary business, the recep- tion and reference of communications on literary, scientific, or other subjects, the members present shall be deemed competent to act, and shall form a quorum. 3. Those members shall be considered qualified voters at the meetings who have subscribed the roll and paid the admission fee, and who are not in arrears to the Society. Chapter X. OF STANDING AND SPECIAL COMMITTEES. Section i. There shall be chosen, at the stated meeting on the third Friday of January in each year, three members of the Society to be a committee of finance, five to be a committee of publication, three to be a committee on the hall, and five to be a committee on the library. Such other committees may be constituted from time to time as the Society shall think expedient. 160 MINUTES. [May 13, 2. The committee of finance shall have the general superinten- dence of the financial concerns of the Society. They shall consult with the treasurer, and with any custodian of the Society's property, and authorize and direct investments of its surplus funds. They shall always have access to his books, accounts, and vouchers ; and they shall annually audit the same, and on the second Friday of December file with the secretaries a full report on the state of the treasury, particularly distinguishing the several funds, and the in- come and disbursements of each, and recommending the amounts which should be appropriated for different objects of expenditure during the ensuing calendar year. They shall also have power, sub- ject to the approval of the council, to remit the fees and contribu- tions of members. 3. The committee of publication shall perform such duties in re- spect of publications as shall be prescribed by the rules of adminis- tration and order. 4. The committee on the hall shall perform such duties in respect of the hall and matters incidental thereto as shall be prescribed by the rules of administration and order. 5. The committee on the library shall perform such duties in re- spect of the library as shall be prescribed by the rules of administra- tion and order. 6. No committee appointed on any subject of deliberation shall consist of less than three members ; but any other matter may be committed to a single member. A majority of any committee shall be a quorum. 7. No of]ficer or committee, or other body of the Society, shall have power to incur any expense, or to charge the Society with any debt or other obligation, without the authority of the Society previously given. Chapter XI. OF RULES OF ADMINISTRATION AND ORDER. Section i. Rules of administration and order not inconsistent with the charter and laws of the Society may be made and changed from time to time by the stated meetings ; but no rule shall be changed, rescinded or suspended otherwise than in the manner pro- vided by the rules, or in respect of change or rescission, upon written notice publicly given at a stated meeting, showing the par- ticular change or rescission proposed, and agreed to at the next stated meeting. 1898.] MINUTES. 161 Chapter XII, OF THE LAWS OF THE SOCIETY. Section i. No statute, law, regulation, or ordinance shall ever be made or passed by the Society, or be binding upon the members thereof, or any of them, unless the same hath been duly proposed and fairly drawn up in writing, at one stated meeting of the Society, and enacted or passed at a subsequent meeting, at least the space of fourteen days after the former meeting, and upon due notice in some of the public newspapers, and in notices sent by mail to the members whose addresses shall have been furnished to the secreta- ries, that the enacting of statutes and laws, or the making and pass- ing ordinances and regulations, will be part of the business of such meeting. 2. Nor shall any statute, law, regulation, or ordinance be then, or at any time, enacted or passed, unless twenty members of the Society be present in addition to the quorum of the officers and council ; nor unless the same be voted by two-thirds of the whole body present. Ordinance No. i. It is hereby ordained and declared that the foregoing twelve chapters shall be hereafter the laws of the Society. And all laws heretofore existing on the subjects embraced in the said twelve chapters and all ordinances, regulations, rules and orders inconsis- tent therewith be and the same are hereby repealed. Ordinance No. 2. And it is further hereby ordained that all laws, regulations and orders of the Society not embraced in the foregoing provisions shall, for the time being, stand and be in force as the rules of ad- ministration and order of the Society until they shall be repealed or changed in conformity with the provisions of Chapter XI of the laws now enacted. Mr. Edmunds moved that tbe Chair appoint a Committee of five members to report at the earliest practicable oppor- tmiitv a bodv of rules of administration and order of the Society. Carried. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXXVII. 157. K. PRINTED JULY 6, 1898. 162 MINUTES. [May 20, Mr. Dickson, Mr. Ingham, Dr. Hays, Dr. Jayne and Mr. Pettit were appointed as the Committee. A report was presented from the Special Committee ap- pointed on the paper of Mr. Rhoads, entitled " Contributions to a Revision of the North American Beavers, Otters and Fishes," in favor of its publication in the Transactions^ and it was so ordered. Stated Meeting, May W, 1898. Yice- President Pepper in the Chair. Present, 35 members. Donations to the Library were laid on the table, and thanks were ordered for them. Prof. Albert H. Smyth, presenting the portrait of Mr. Frederick Fraley, said : It had been the intention and the hope of Mr. J. G. Rosengarten to be present this evening and in accordance with the request of the subscribers, to present to the American Philosophical Society two portraits, one of Mr. Frederick Fraley, our honored President, the other of Prof. John Peter Lesley, for many years a Vice-President of this Society. But Mr. Rosengarten is prevented from being here, and has asked me to act in his stead. In the long and distinguished history of the American Philoso- phical Society, fifteen Presidents, from Franklin to Fraley, have successively presided over its meetings and guided its policy. Portraits of all these — Franklin, Rittenhouse, Jefferson, Wistar, the Pattersons, the Baches, Tilghman, Duponceau, Chapman, Kane and Wood — hang upon our walls, together with many of that illus- trious company who have contributed to the scientific and the literary glory of the Philosophical Society. A little while ago several of the friends of Mr. Fraley, within and without this Society, desiring to express, as Hamlet says, their **love and friending" to him, and to place in the Hall of the Society over which he has presided with such zeal and success some 1898.] MINUTES. 163 token of their admiration and respect, learned that an excellent portrait of him had been painted. Subscriptions were promptly made to a fund for the purchase of it and the portrait was obtained. Upon the twenty-eighth of this month, Mr. Fraley, whose extra- ordinary activities cover well-nigh a century of time, will celebrate his ninety-fourth birthday ; and this therefore being the meeting of the Society nearest to that happy anniversary has been chosen for the formal presentation. In behalf of the subscribers, I present to the American Philosophi- cal Society this portrait of Mr. Frederick Fraley. Prof. Prime moved that tlie thanks of the Society be ten- dered to those gentlemen who presented the portraits, and that the said portraits shall be hung on the walls of the Hall, and shall be under the care of the Curators. Hampton L. Cakson, Esq., in accepting the portrait of Mr. Fraley, in behalf of the Society, said : The agreeable duty has been assigned to me of speaking in sup- port of the Resolution of acceptance in behalf of the Society, and I respond with peculiar pleasure ; first, because I am aware of the value of the services rendered to us for so many years by our vener- able and venerated President, and next, because I cherish for him personally the most affectionate and reverential regard. I look back over thirty years of my own recollections, and I see him fore- most in all measures tending to promote the commerce, finance, manufactures and mechanic arts of Philadelphia, and a leader in all movements to extend her civic industrial and educational influence. I look beyond into the history of the preceding forty years, and I still see him conspicuous, even at an early age, among many honored men who have long since passed to their reward. At the age of twenty he was one of the founders of the Franklin Institute, and has been a member for seventy-four years. At the age of thirty he was a member of our City Council, serving as Chairman of the Finance Committee, a pilot standing at the helm with clear head and steady hand, during the troubled period of 1837. He was an earnest advocate, in opposition to the views of such men as Horace Binney, of the introduction of gas as a means of lighting our City. He was at his post in the State Senate 164 MINUTES. [May 20, during the Buckshot War, and was active in drafting the laws called for by our amended State Constitution. He was the author of the preamble of our Consolidation Act, and his skillful hand was present in the shaping of those sections which concerned the ad- ministration of our finances. He was a leader in the establishment of the Paid Fire Department, after having long served as a volun- teer member of the old Philadelphia Hose Company. He was one of the founders of the Union Club, which developed into the splen- did organization of the Union League. For forty-one years he has been a manager of the Western Saving Fund, and its President for twenty years. For forty-five years he has served as a trustee of the University of Pennsylvania. For fifty-six years he has been a mem- ber of this Society, and has been its President for eighteen years. As President of the National Board of Trade, and of our own local organization, as a member of the Board of Finance of the Centen- nial Commission, and in many other capacities, his voice has been raised and his influence has been exerted in unselfish devotion to the greatest of public interests. His long and varied career stands for unbending integrity in the discharge of trust duties ; for knowledge and power in the discus- sion of public questions ; for breadth and liberality of opinion ; for constant progressiveness and generous hospitality to new ideas ; for lofty ideals supported by trained technical skill. He has walked on the high places of this earth with undimmed eye and steadfast cour- age. The loftiness of his position enabled him to see the tops of distant thoughts which men of common stature never saw. With him " Knowledge was not a couch whereon to rest a searching and restless spirit ; nor a terrace for a wandering or variable mind to walk up and down with a fair prospect ; nor a tower of state for a proud mind to raise itself upon ; nor a sort of commanding ground for strife and contention ; nor a shop for profit and sale, but a rich storehouse for the glory of the Creator and the relief of man's estate." At the end of ninety-four years of life, with none of the intellect- ual infirmities of age, and without the slightest trace of acerbity of temper, he stands in the golden glow of an honorable and useful career, the central object of our affection, of our veneration and esteem. It is fitting that his portrait should grace these walls — walls hallowed by sacred associations and cherished with filial piety. 189o.] MINUTES. 165 *' I would rather," said Hazlitt, ^' leave behind me a good portrait than a good epitaph." The sentiment is just. Those who read tombstone inscriptions are few, but those who can find inspiration in the study of a well-pictured face are many. This Society, grate- ful to the donors of this admirable portrait, will direct it to be hung beside those of the illustrious men who were his predecessors, in commemoration of the virtues, the talents and the services of Frederick Fraley. Mr. Smyth, in presenting to the Society the portrait of Prof. Lesley, said : At the same time that the portrait of Mr. Fraley was ob- tained it was learned that a portrait of Prof. J. P. Lesley was obtainable ; the subscription fund was immediately enlarged and the second portrait was procured. I must not omit to add that both are the admirable work of the same excellent artist — Mrs. Margaret Lesley Bush Brown, a daughter of Prof. Lesley. In behalf of the subscribers, I present both these portraits to the American Philosophical Society. Mr. William A. Ingham said : In speaking to the resolution accepting the donation of Prof. Lesley's portrait tendered this evening to the Society my words shall be few and I hope fit. This portrait of Prof. Lesley by his daughter is to me a most speaking likeness. It shows him as I have seen him a hundred times sitting in his chair, roused up from a reverie by some remark, whether opposing his views or corroborating them (it made little difference), but rousing him up and starting him off, active and alert on an animated discourse which might last an hour. I have seen him thus often, and I prefer to remember him thus, if it shall so happen, that in the course of nature he shall go before me to join the majority. I am not competent (who is?) to pro- nounce on his eminent qualities as a geologist and scientist. Prof. Lesley was an assistant on the First Geological Survey of the State, and has written a history of that Survey, published in Vol- ume A of the Reports of the Second Survey. The First Survey was completed in 1858 by the publication of the 166 MINUTES. [May 20, Final Report, but some years prior to that date the corps was dis- banded and Prof. Lesley had turned his attention to other matters. He was Secretary of the American Iron and Steel Association for six years, and during that time he published The Iron Manufac- turers' Guide (1856), which is a complete list of the active furnaces in the United States and a very complete discussion of the iron ores. Of course much of this is now obsolete, but at the time it was the first and only manual on the subject. About the same time he published his Manual of Coal. This little book, a model of its kind, contains, first, a description of the coals of Pennsylvania, remarkable for its accuracy, and, sec- ond, a concise treatise on *' Surface Geology." In this the author insists on the importance of topography as an adjunct to geology. Prof. Spencer, in a recent address {Popular Science Monthly^ May, 1898), says, ^'Geomorphy is the outgrowth of topography, which was made a science fifty or sixty years ago by Prof. J. P. Lesley and his coworkers. Its birth is graphically described by the author himself." And from the very beginning of the Second Geological Survey, Prof. Lesley has always insisted on the importance of topography as preliminary to geology. This is shown by the repeated efforts of the Board at his instigation to obtain an appropriation for a topo- graphical survey. The failure of these efforts will account for the fact that the Second Geological Survey is not as satisfactory as it might have been made. It seems strange at this date that any argument should be neces- sary in favor of topography as preliminary to geology. After the disbandment of the First Survey, Prof. Lesley was con- stantly occupied as an expert geologist — which work 1 00k him all over our State and into adjoining States. He became thoroughly familiar with every square mile of the State geologically and geo- graphically. In this time he made frequent professional visits to Europe, where he made acquaintance with all eminent geologists, many of whom became his life-long friends. In one of these visits he saw that the key to the complicated structure of the Jura was to be found in Pennsylvania, and Desor came over here and learned from us how to interpret the Jura problem. This varied professional experience, as evinced in his reports to 1898.] MINUTES. 167 his employers (one of which, on the Nittany Valley ores, a model of geological work, has been published), but most of which are in the archives of his employers — his numerous publications in the Pro- ceedings of our Society, his general repute as to familiarity with the geology of the State, combined to make him the choice for State Geologist under the act of 1874. He was Librarian of this Society part of the time and Secretary all the time from 1858 to 1887. He was Vice-President from 1887 to 1898. My personal intercourse with Prof. Lesley began with the organ- ization of the Second Geological Survey in 1874. Since that time he as State Geologist and I as Secretary have been in the most intimate connection. In that period of over twenty years I have been impressed with his unselfish motives, supervising the field work of his assistants with the sole idea, (i) of the good of the Survey, and (2) that every man should receive full credit for his work. He is a thorough, unselfish, impartial man of science. It is largely due to Prof Lesley, in continuing across this State the work begun by Prof Cook in New Jersey on the terminal glacial moraine, that the wonderful recent revival of interest in surface geology is due. The modern geology which attempts to account for the present condition of the earth's surface may almost be said to date from the survey of the terminal moraine. Aside from geology. Prof. Lesley, in his Lowell lectures, delivered in 1865-1866, on the ''Origin and Destiny of Man," branches far afield into Egyptology and Theology. In these subjects, which he merely touches, he shows the hand of a master. A list, possibly imperfect, kindly prepared for me by Miss Mor- rison, is hereto appended of Prof Lesley's contributions to our Proceedings. The titles number sixty-nine, on almost every sub- ject conceivable. But besides these printed papers, he has often delighted the Society with impromptu remarks on matters pending. We all remember how brilliant these impromptu remarks were ; how he illuminated what was obscure and explained what was confused. Sad to say, no record of these speeches has been preserved. In the preparation of this brief and inadequate sketch, it has been my duty and pleasure to read again some of Prof. Lesley's publica- tions, and I have been impressed more than ever with his amazing versatility, with the power of his imagination, illuminating every 168 MINUTES. [May 20, subject with flashes of genius, with his perfect command of language and his profound thought. His introductory chapters to the Final Report of the Second Sur- vey (a most unequal work, part of which was written under stress of physical and nervous depression), particularly the chapters on ''Geo- logical Time," '' Geological Space" and " The Appalachian Sea," with his other works previously mentioned, deserve record here. These show that he is not a narrow-minded, one-sided person ; that his scope embraced the sphere of human knowledge, of course with limitations, as no man is omniscient. After all, his monument is to be found in the publications of the Second Geological Survey, 120 volumes, a library in itself. It is our pride that he belongs to us. It is our pleasure that we have now a portrait of him which may serve to perpetuate his like- ness to those who shall come after him, and who will reap, perhaps unwittingly, the harvest from seed which he has sown. Communications Published in the Transactions ^wrt' Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society^ by Prof. J. P. Lesley. Notes on a Map intended to Illustrate Five Types of Earth Surface in United States between Connecticut and the Atlantic Trans. [N,S.], xiii, 307 Insensible Gradation of Words Proc. vii, 129 Geology of the Arctic Archipelago " " "293 Copper Horizon " «' 329 Becker's Aneroid " " 342 Primary Limestone near Chadd's Ford, Pa " viii, 281 Superclinous Oil Springs of the West '< « 262 Coal System of Southern Virginia. " ix, 30 Aurora at Cape Breton <' " 60 Coal Measures at Cape Breton Proc. ix, 93, 197 West Virginia Asphalt Proc. ix, 1S3 Vortical Gales at Sea, January, 1864 '* " 183 Abbeville Quarries «' « 38S Ancient Sea Level <' « 399 Pennsylvania Lignite << <« 463 Petroleum in Eastern Kentucky Proc. x, 33, 187 Compounds of Bar Proc. x, 137 Petroleum Well Sections " '< 227 D'Orbigny Papyrus " « 543 Harris Museum in Alexandria '< " 561 Aurora of April 15, 1 869 " xi, 11 1 Section across the Alleghany Mountains «< " 115 Tornado at Cave City, Ky <« <« 277 Violation of the Law of Debituminization « xii, 125 1898.] MINUTES. 169' Titaniferous Iron-ore Belt Proc. xii, 139 Upthrow Fault at Embreville Furnace, E. Tennessee « << 444 Geology of Tazewell, etc., Counties of Virginia " ** 489 Record of Fourteen Oil Wells at Brady's Bend, Pa " " 562 Iron Ores of the South Mountain " xiii, 3 Dunning's Creek Fossil Ore-bed " " 156 Micrometer for Field-note Plotting " " 233 Structure and Erosion of Brush Mountain " " 503 Geology of Brown Hematite, Spruce Creek, Pa " " 19 Note on Makaptos <' xvii, 7 Magnesian Limestone Analysis " " 260 Drift Phenomena of the United States « xviii, 85 Gas Well at Murrayville, Pa " <« 207 Brazilian Geography and Topography " '< 248 Ancient Buried River Channel Crossing the Allegheny River " " 354 Etymology of Hpakans " «' 363 Obituary of John W. Harden " " 422 Spirit of a Philosophical Society " *' 582 On the Landa Alphabet " xix, 153 On the Shells found by H. C. Lewis at Saltville « " 155 Notes on Certain Models : *< " 193 On Professor White's Notes " " 202 Egyptian Element in the Names of Hebrew Kings " " 409 Greco-Egyptian Etymology of Takyos " " no Origin of the Great Lakes " xx, 95 Obituary of E. Desor Proc. xx, 298, 519 Ice Erosion on the Blue Mountains Proc. xx, 468 Progress of the Second Geological Survey of Penna . . . .Proc. xx, 497, 537, 638 Egyptian Character of Hebrew Names Proc. xx, 506 Policy of the Society " " 645 Identity of the Terms Catskill and Ponent " *' 673 Obituary Notice of Dr. John L. LeConte " xxi, 291 Meaning of the « Set" Animal Proc. xxi, 344, 455 Obituary Notice of James Macfarlane " xxiii, 287 On the Hebrew Word Sh Di (shaddai) " *' 303 Obituary Notice of F. V. Hayden *. " xxv, 59 On the Grapeville Gas Wells , " xxix, 1 1 Notes on Hebrew Egyptian Aiix. Enoch ; Anoki ; Enos " " 17 On an Important Boring Through 2000 Feet of Trias in Eastern Pennsylvania " " 20 Obituary Notice of P. W. Sheafer " « T)^ Artesian Wells in Montgomery County, at Norristown, Washing- ton Square, Worcester Township, Flourtown, Williams Station, King of Prussia ; Parkesburg, Chester County ; Radnor, Dela- ware County, and Philadelphia, by Oscar C. S. Carter and J. P. Lesley " " 43 170 MINUTES. [May 20, The resolution of acceptance of tlie portraits was then unanimouslj adopted. Dr. Frazer presented the report of the Officers and Council. The Secretaries announced the death, on May 19, 1898, of the Et. Hon. William Ewart Gladstone, at Hawarden, Ches- ter, England. Pending nominations ISTos. 1432 and 1451 to 1468 were read and spoken to, and new nomination No. 1409 was read. A paper by Dr. William C. Day, entitled, " The Production of an Asphalt Resembling Gilsonite by the Distillation of a Mixture of Fish and Wood," was read. The Secretaries reported the election of the following as members : Edward F. DeLancey, of JN'ew York. Pro£ William Harkness, of Washington. Prof. C. P. Tiele, Ph.D., of Leyden. Alfred H. Allen, F.C.S., of Sheffield, Eng. Boverton Redwood, F.R.S., of London. Prof. Albert B. Prescott, LL.D., of Ann Arbor. Prof. William H. Pettee, of Ann Arbor. Prof. R. P. Whitfield, of New York. H. LaBarre Jayne, of Philadelphia. Lamar Gray Patterson, of Cumberland, Md. Charles Piatt, of Philadelphia. John H. Converse, of Philadelphia. Henry Grier Bryant, F.R.G.S., Lond., of Philadelphia. Emlen Hutchinson, of Philadelphia. Prof. G. Mangarini, Ph.D., of Rome. The meeting was then adjourned by the presiding officer. 1898.] DAY — AN ASPHALT RESEMBLING GILSONITE. 171 THE PRODUCTION OF AN ASPHALT RESEMBLING GILSONITE BY THE DISTILLATION OF A MIX- TURE OF FISH AND WOOD. (Plate X.) BY WM. C. DAY. {Read May 20, 1S9S.) A few years since, I undertook a rather detailed experimental study of the variety of asphalt known as gilsonite/ which is mined for commercial use in Utah. Gilsonite is a black, glistening, brit- tle material, yielding a dark-brown powder when finely pulverized. It fuses readily, becoming a liquid which begins to boil at a temper- ture above the limit of a mercury thermometer. It is entirely soluble in carbon bisulphide, not entirely soluble in ordinary ether, partly soluble in absolute alcohol, petroleum ether, glacial acetic acid and chloroform, imparting to these solvents a yellowish to red color with green fluorescence. Besides carbon and hydrogen, it contains sulphur, nitrogen, a trace of oxygen and one-tenth of one per cent, of ash. Among the various products which I obtained by distilling gil- sonite may be mentioned as of interest in this connection certain nitrogenous bases extracted from the distillates by the action of dilute acid and precipitated therefrom by alkalies. These bodies have an odor like that of the pyridine and quinoline series. Such substances were first obtained from bitumen by Prof. S. F- Peck- ham, who noticed them in distillates from. California petroleum ; later by myself from an asphalt occurring in Coos county, Oreg., also in the product which forms the subject of this paper. As a result of considerable experimental work in the past few years with asphalts from a variety of sources in the United States, together with a study of the literature pertaining to the question of the origin of the bitumens from both the geological and the chem- ical standpoints, I became impressed with the belief that the solid and also some of the higher boiling liquid bitumens have been formed in the earth by the distillation of mixed animal and vege- table material, together with steam at high temperatures, but at pres- sures which may or may not have been high. Petroleum distillates have been obtained by Warren and later by Engler from fish oil, ^Jotimal Fratiklin Institute^ Vol. clx, p. 221. 172 DAY — AX ASPHALT RESEMBLING GILSONITE. [May 20, and still more recently by Sadtler from linseed oil. In addition to liquid distillates, paraffin has also been obtained by these investiga- tors. No mention, however, of an analogous production of asphalts, so far as I am aware, has ever been made. To test the correctness of the belief already expressed, I tried the following experiments : Into a cylindrical iron retort were introduced a number of fresh herring, a quantity of pine saw dust and a number of small pieces of fat pine wood. The retort was connect'ed by plaster-of- Paris joints with a short glass tube, and this with a gas pipe four feet long, the latter being placed in an ordinary combustion furnace, the other end of the pipe was connected with a Liebig's-cold-water condenser.^ After charging and closing the retort, it was heated by means of gas stoves, which together with the retort were surrounded with loose bricks to prevent the loss of heat. The heating of the re- tort was regulated by the rapidity with which vapors were evolved, an increase of heat being necessary toward the end of the distillation. The gas pipe was simultaneously heated to bright redness by the combustion furnace. The pressure was that of the atmosphere. During the progress of the distillation water and oil together with a white smoke flowed from the condenser into the receiver. The oil obtained was lighter than water, of bad odor and very dark red in color. At the end of the gas pipe next to the retort carbon sepa- rated, and on one occasion nearly choked the pipe. Only once was an oil heavier than water obtained, and this was small in amount. The condensed oil was separated from the water on which it floated, and finally completely dried over chloride of calcium. It was then placed in a distilling bulb provided with thermometer and distilled, using a straight glass tube as an air condenser. Boiling began at about loo Centigrade, but the mercury soon rose to 1 20. The distillate between these limits consisted of a lemon-yellow mobile oil together with a few drops of water. At 120 C. the receiver was changed, and another fraction darker in color and less mobile was obtained while the mercury rose to 180. The third fraction was collected between the limits 180 and 245 ; the fourth between 245 and 315, this fraction showing a pro- nounced greenish fluorescence, the color by transmitted light being 1 See accompanying photograph. 1898.] DAY — AN ASPHALT RESEMBLING GILSONITE. 178 dark red. At 340 the receiver was again changed, the thermome- ter removed and the distillation continued until the temperature was (at a guess) about 425 Centigrade. At this point the distilling bulb cracked and the operation was stopped. On cooling, the con- tents of the bulb became a black brittle solid, showing a very pro- nounced resemblance to gilsonite in every way. The following are its properties : Black glistening color, becoming brown on pulver- izing, and slightly darker than gilsonite ; fracture conchoidal, en- tirely soluble in carbon bisulphide ; ether dissolves 90.6 per cent.; alcohol 66.3 per cent.; petroleum ether 61. i per cent. All these solutions show greenish fluorescence, while the color by transmitted light varies from yellow to reddish. As already stated, the distilling bulb cracked before I had de- cided to stop the distillation, and the solid product being slightly sticky to the touch, I distilled a second portion of oil, collecting the same fractions as before, but continuing the heating longer. This time I obtained a solid so like gilsonite that it was difficult to tell which was which. A combustion of the first sample gave carbon, 87.5 per cent., and hydrogen, 7.7 per cent. A combustion of the second sample gave carbon, 88.9 per cent., and hydrogen, 6.7 per cent. The figures for Utah gilsonite are 88.3 for carbon and 9.9 for hydrogen. At the time (three years since) I made the analysis of gilsonite nitrogen was not determined. Recently I have deter- mined the nitrogen, and found it to be 1.96 per cent. Since the carbon, hydrogen and sulphur figures added up to 99.5 one or all of the three must have been high, and I am inclined to think that it was the hydrogen, since I cannot now be sure that the gilsonite sample was entirely dry. The agreement in properties and composition between the gilson- ite and my product is much more perfect than it would have been reasonable to expect at the outset of the experiment, particularly when it is remembered that both are doubtless mixtures in them- selves, and that certainly on distillation they yield highly compli- cated mixtures of hydrocarbons. As the product under discussion was obtained only a few days ago, I have not had time to carry the investigation further, but enough has been done to show how a solid asphaltum may have been formed in nature and to afford a rather satisfactory demonstration of the correctness of views entertained by a number of scientists who have formed their opinions largely on geological evidence and .the study of natural occurrences. 174 DAY — AX ASPHALT KESEMBLIXG GILSONITE. [May 20, 189S. It should be stated, in addition, that for tlie sake of comparison, fish alone, i. e., without wood, were subjected to distillation and without passing the vapors through the red-hot tube. The products obtained included nothing that bore any resemblance to gilsonite and they were radically different from the products which accom- panied the distillation of fish and wood together. This brief paper is of course only preliminary to one which should consider the literature of the subject more in detail, and which may, I trust, throw some light on a few of the many problems which nat- urally suggest themselves. I shall continue the work as rapidly as my limited time and facil- ities for such study will permit. In conclusion I take pleasure in expressing my obligations to my assistant, Mr. Eugene Leamy, for his very intelligent and effective aid in carrying on the experimen- tal work. SWARTHMORE COLLEGE, May 1 9, 1 898. Magellanic Premium. FOUNDED IN 1786, BY JOHN HYACINTH DE MAGELLAN, OF London. 1898. The American Philosophical Society, Held at Philadelphia, for Promoting Useful Knowledge ANNOUNCES THAT IN DECEiVIBER, 1898, IT WILL AWARD ITS MAGELLANIC GOLD MEDAL to the author of the best discovery, or most useful invention, relating to Navi- gation, Astronomy, or Natural Philosophy (mere natural history only excepted) under the following conditions : 1. The candidate shall, on or before November i, 1898 deliver, free of postage or other charges, his discovery, invention or improvement, addressed to the President of the American Philosophical Society, No. 104 South Fifth Street, Philadelphia, U. S. A., and shall distinguish his performance by some motto, device, or other signature. With his dis- covery, invention, or improvement, he shall also send a sealed letter contaming the sam.e motto, device, or signature, and subscribed with the real name and place of residence of the author. 2. Persons of any nation, sect or denomination whatever, shall be aduiitted as candidates for this premium. 3. No discovery, invention or improvement shall be entitled to this premium, which hath been already published, or for which the author hath been publicly rewarded elsewhere. 4. The candidate shall communicate his discovery, invention or im- provement, either in the English, French, German, or Latin language. 5. A full account of the crowned subject shall be published by the Society, as soon as may be after the adjudication, either in a separate publication, or in the next succeeding volume of their Transactions, or in both. 6. The premium shall consist of an oval plate of solid standard gold of the value of ten guineas, suitably inscribed, with the seal of the Society annexed to the medal by a ribbon. All correspondence in relation hereto should be addressed To THE Secretaries of the American Philosophical Society, No. 104 South Fifth Street, PHILADELPHIA, U. S. A. TRANSACTIONS OF THE American Philosophical Society, Held at Philadelphia, For Promoting Useful Knowledge. Vol. XIX, Neiv Series. Part /, /fto, pp. ig8, with j Plates. Lately Published. CONTl^NTS. Art. I. — A New Method of Determining the General Perturba- tions of the Minor Planets. By William McKnight RiTTER, M.A. Art II.— An Essay on the Development of the Mouth Parts of Certain Insects. By John B. Smith, Sc.D. Part II, ^tOy pp. 2y2, with ij Plates. Just Published. CONTENTS. Art. 111. — Some Experiments with the Saliva of the Gila Monster (Heloderma suspectum). By John Van Denburgh, Ph.D. Art. IV. — Results of Recent Researches on the Evolution of the Stellar Systems. By T. J. J. See, A.M., Ph.D. (Berlin). Art. v.— On the Glossophagin^. By Harrison Allen, M.D. Art. VI.— The Skull and Teeth of Ectophylla alba. By HAR- RISON Allen, M.D. SUBSCRIPTION— FIVE DOLLARS PER VOLUME. SEPARATE PARTS ARE NOT SOLD. A few complete sets of the Transactions, New Series, Volumes I-XVIII, can be obtained. Price, Ninety Dollars. Address THE LIBRARIAN OF THE American Philosophical Society, No. 104 South Fifth Street, Philadelphia, U. S A. MAK U 1890 mr PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY HELD AT PniLADELPni^ FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol. XXXVIT. December, 1898. K^o. 158. CONTENTS. PAGE Stated Meeting, Octoher 7, 1898 175 The Linguistic Cartography of the Chaco Region. Bj' Daniel G. Brinton, M.D. (with one plate) 178 Shakespeare's Pericles and Apollonius of Tyre. By Albert H. Smyth (with one plate and two illustrations). 206 On the Quaternion Group. By G. A. Miller 312 Stated Meeting, October 21, 1898 319 On two Unclassified Recent Vocabularies from South America. By Daniel G. Brinton, M.D 321 Stated Meeting, November 4, 1898 324 Stated Meeting, November 18, 1898 327 Divisions of Queensland Aborigines. By R. H, Mathews (with one illustration) 327 Adjourned Meeting, November 25^ 1898 336 Stated Meeting, December 2, 1898 337 Stated Meeting, December 16, 1898 337 philadelphia : The American Philosophical Society, 104 South Fifth Street. 1«98. Henry M. Phillips Prize Essay. Philadelphia, 104 South Fifth Street, April 5, 1897. THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, held a Philadelphia, for Promoting Useful Knowledge has the hono to announce that an award of the Henry M. Phillips Prize will b made during the year 1899 '} essays for the same to be in the posses sion of the Society before the first day of May, 1899. The sabjec upon which essays are to be furnished by competitors is : The development of the law, as illustrated by the decisions relating to the police power of the State. The essay shall not contain more than one hundred thousanc words, excluding notes. Such notes, if any, should be kept sepa rate as an Appendix. The Prize for the crowned essay will be two thousand dollar lawful gold coin of the United States, to be paid as soon as may b after the award. The Society invites attention to the regulation governing said prize, which accompany this circular. • William V. McKeah, Craig Biddle, Mayer Sulzberger C. Stuart Patterson, Joseph C. Fraley, Frederick Fraley President of the Society, Horace Jayne, M. D.,* Treasure of the Society, Committee on the Henry M. Fhil/ips Priz Essay Fund. The essays must be sent, addressed to Frederick Fraley, President of the American Philosophical 'Society, Philadelphia. * Elected Treasurer American Philosophical Society, January 7, 1898, in place of J. Sergear Price, Esq., deceased, August 16, 1897, RE^QUIvATIONS. Competitors for the prize shall affix to their essays some motto or name (not th proper name of the author, however), and when the essay is forwarded to the Societ it shall be accompanied by a sealed envelope, containing witliin the proper name c the author, and, on the outside thereof, the motto or name adopted for the essay. At a stated meeting of the Society, in pursuance of the advertisement, all essaj received up to that time shall be referred to a Committee of Judges, to consist of fiv persons, who shall be selected by the Society from nomination of ten persons mad by the Standing Committee on the Henry M. Phillips Prize Essay. Fund. Essays may be written in English, French, German, Dutch, Italian, Spanish c Latin, but, if in any language except. English, must be accompanied by an Englis translation of the same. No treatise or essay shall be entitled to compete for the prize that has bee already published or printed, or for vvhich the author has received already any priz( profit, or honor of any nature whatsoever. All essays must be clearly and legibly written or printed on one side of th paper only. The literary property of such essays shall be in their authors, subject to the righ of the Society to publish tlie crowned essay in its Transactions or Proceedings. IVIAR U 1899 PROCE EDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY HELD AT PHILADELPHIA FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol, XXXVII. December, 1898. No. 158. ^Stated Meeting^ October 7, 1898. Vice-President Sellers in the Chair. Present, 28 members. Dr. Caspar Rdne Gregory and Messrs. Hutchinson, Bryant and H. La Barre Jayne, newly elected members, were pre- sented to the Chair, and took their seats in the Society. Acknowledgments of election to membership were read from Messrs. H. La Barre Jayne, Emlen Hutchinson, John H. Converse, Charles Piatt, William Harkness, R. P. Whit- field, Henry G. Bryant, Lamar Gray Patterson, William Henry Pettee, Edward F. DeLancey, C. P. Tiele, Albert B. Prescott, Alfred H. Allen, Boverton Redwood, Guglielmo Mengarini and A. Donaldson Smith. A letter was received from the Secretary of State, enclosing an invitation from the government of Italy to the Society to send deleo^ates to the Twelfth International Consfress of Orientalists, to be held at Rome on October 2, 1899 ; and on motion the President was authorized to appoint a delegate, in accordance mth the invitation. Prof. H. Y. Hilprecht was subsequently appointed the delegate of the Society. An invitation was received from the Academy of Sciences and other learned societies of Stockholm, to send a delegate to a commemorative fete to be held at Stockholm on Octo- ber 7, 1898, on the occasion of the fiftieth anniversary of the death of Berzelius. The Secretary was directed to express PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXXYII. 158. L. PRINTED DEC. 7, 1898. 176 MINUTES. [Oct. 7, to these societies the regret of the American Philosophical Society, that the coincidence of the date of reception of the invitation with that of the fete prevented the Society from sending a delegate, as it otherwise would have felt honored in doing. From the von Mueller Monument Fund. From the Franklin Institute of Pennsylvania, expressing its sympathy with the Society in the loss sustained by the death of its Yice- President, Dr. William Pepper. The Librarian announced a number of donations to the Library, for which thanks were ordered to be sent to the donors. Dr. Morris presented a Hawaiian newspaper sent by Prof. Boye, which contained a notice of the hoisting of the American flag. Dr. Morris read an obituary notice of Prof. Henry D. Gregory. Announcement Avas made of the decease of the following members : Dr. Friedrich Miiller, of Vienna, on May 25, 1898, aged 64 years ; elected to membership December 17, 1886. Dr. William Pepper, of Philadelphia, on July 29, 1898, aged 55 years ; elected to membership July 15, 1870. Dr. James Hall, of Albany, on August 8, 1898, aged 87 years; elected lo membership July 21, 1854. Dr. George M. Ebers, of Tutzing, near Munich, on August 8, 1898, aged 61 years; elected to membership May ^17, 1895. Prof. Henry Trimble, at St. David's, Pa., on August 24, 1898, aged 45 years ; elected to membership, February 19, 1897. Dr. Francis Pulzsky, of Buda Pesth, on September 9, 1897, aged 82 years ; elected to membership. Ma}/ 21, 1886. Hon. Thomas F. Bayard, of Wilmington, Del., on Septem- ber 28, 1898, aged 69 years ; elected to membership October 15, 1897. 1S98.] MINUTES. 1T7 Dr. Frazer offered tlie following resolutions, in regard to the death of Dr. Pepper : Resolved, That a Committee of five members be appointed by the President to arrange for a memorial meeting in reference to the death of Dr. William Pepper, with authority to confer with the Committee appointed by the Trustees of the University of Pennsyl- vania, and the representatives of other institutions and societies with which he was connected. Resolved, That as a mark of respect to the memory of Dr. Wil- Ham Pepper, a Vice-President of this Society, the office which he filled remain vacant until the annual election on January 6 next. Adopted. Dr. Frazer, Dr. DaCosta, Mr, Edmunds, General Wistar and Dr. Tyson were subsequently appointed members of this Committee. On motion the President was requested to appoint a mem- ber to prepare a biographical notice of the late Prof. Henry Trimble. Prof. Sadtler was subsequently so appointed. Dr. Caspar Eene Gregory made a communication on ' ' Greek Manuscripts in Europe, in the East, and in America." Dr. Daniel G. Brinton read a paper on ' ' The Linguistic Cartography of the Chaco Eegion." Prof. Smyth read a paper on " The Apollonius Saga and Shakespeare's Pericles Prince of Tj^re." A paper was presented by Dr. G. A. Miller and read by title, " On the Quaternion Group." Pending nominations J^os. 1432, 1464, 1469, and new nominations Nos. 1470 to 1472 were read. Dr. Morris, as Curator, offered a correction of the printed record of the meeting of April 1, 1898, Proceedings, p. 83, as follows : In the sentence in which " Dr. Hays asked ' Is this [a framed copy presented at that time] the facsimile copy which Dr. Morris took out of the Librarian's desk last autumn, etc.?'" " Dr. Morris rephed that it was." Dr. Morris claimed that this should read: ". . . . which had been taken out of the old desk used by Mr. Philhps," which was the form in which the question was put, and replied to m 178 BRINTOX — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. [Oct. 7, the affirmative by him. Dr. Hays expressed regret that any misunderstanding should have occurred as to what was said, but it was natural!}^ accounted for by the fact that an old desk, which had been used by the late Mr. Phillips when Librarian, had been recently assigned to one of the mem- bers of the Societ}^ for the custody of his papers. Finding this facsimile of the copy of the Declaration of Independence in one of th*=i drawers, he assumed that it should be handed to the Curators, to be deposited in the Cabinet, instead of to the Librarian. This difference of opinion as to the proper disposition of the paper had led to the original discussion of which a brief abstract was given in the minute referred to. The rough minutes were then read, and the Societ}^ was adjourned by the presiding officer. THE LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY OF THE CHACO REGION. BY DANIEL G. BRINTON, M.D. (Mead October 7, ISDS.) Contents. — Introductory — Recent Contributions < . the Linguis- tics of theCliaco — The Mataco Linguistic Stock — x'he Guaycuru Stock — The Tupi Stock — The Samucu Stock — The Ennima Stock — The Arawack Stock — The Quechua Stock — The Lule Stock — Groups of Uncertain Affinities — The Lenguas (Timbues) — The Chanas — The Charuas and Querandies — The Payaguas — The Caca- nas and Calchiquis — Other Unidentified Tribes — Bibliographic Note — List of Ethnographic Maps. Introductory. In mapping the areas of American aboriginal languages there is a vast region in South America which has been peculiarly perplex- ing, and in several respects so remains. 1898.] BRINTOX — LTXGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. 170 This is that which is vaguely known as El Gran Chaco, or the Great Hunting Ground. It lies in northern Argentina and eastern Bolivia, between latitude i8° and 32° south, and longitude 58° and 66° west from Greenwich. It covers an area about as great in extent as from Pittsburg to the Mississippi and from Chicago to the Gulf of Mexico.^ On the east, the valley of the Rio Parana and Rio Paraguay, which are the extensions of the Rio de la Plata, and on the west the lofty elevations of the Andes, are its well-marked boundaries. Between them the surface is usually level and intersected by numer- ous streams, the three most important of which, the Pilcomayo, the Vermejo and the Salado, flow from the Andes southeastward in almost parallel lines. The climate is hot and the vegetation tropical. During the rainy season the flat, grassy lands are transformed into shallow lakes, while near the watercourses rise dense and lofty forests. In the north are arid and sterile highlands. Except by the water-ways it is almost impossible to traverse the country, and for that reason extensive tracts of it are still unex- plored. The native tribes who inhabited this region have always been in the lowest stages of culture, depending on hunting and fishing for their subsistence, without settled abodes, migratory and in cease- less warfare with each other. The self-sacrificing efforts of the Jesuit and Franciscan missionaries have at times succeeded in gath- ering a few hundred together about some mission, only to be dis- persed again on some slight cause. Thus, some years ago, in the middle of the night, the whole of the tribe of Penoquiquias, which had been converted and induced to take up a fixed abode, suddenly disappeared, and were never seen again (Cardus, i, p. 272). Recent Contributions to the Linguistics of the Chaco. In my volume on the linguistic classification of the American race, published in 1891, I divided the tribes of the Chaco into four principal linguistic stocks, the Guaycuru, the Mataco, the Vilela 1 Boggiani (i,p. 10) puts the maximum length of the Chaco at 830 geographical miles, and its greatest width at 360 miles. For this and other references in the text see the Bibliographic Note at the close of this article. 180 BRINTOX — LINGUISTIC CARTOGEAPHY. [Oct. 7, and the Payagua/ Since then a number of contributions to the subject and several ethnographic maps of parts of the region have been furnished by J. B. Ambrosetti, J. de Brettes, Guido Boggiani, Dr. G. A. Colini, Giovanni Pelleschi, Samuel A. Lafone Quevedo, and others, and some unpublished manuscripts of early date have seen the light in print, the titles of which are given in the biblio- graphic note at the close of this paper. j\Iy present intention is to offer a summary of their results in the linguistic ethnography of the Chaco region, as depicted in the revised chart which I have prepared, and to present some suggestions for the correct classifica- tion of tribes of still uncertain affinities. The writer to whom we owe most is Mr. S. A. Lafone Quevedo. He has edited the manuscripts of Tavolini, Brigniel, Barcena and others, and contributed numerous articles of his own, and deserves the highest credit for his zeal and accuracy. He entertains, however, certain linguistic theories which would with difficulty find general acceptance, and which expose some of his reasonings to serious question. Thus, he maintains that there is a fundamental difference between what he calls the ''Atlantic" type of languages and the '' Pacific" or ''Andean," based upon the trait that the latter suffix the pronom- inal particles while the former prefix them. This, as a mere matter of placement, is of minor importance. For example, the Latin has the pronominal indications suffixed to the verbal root ; but the neo-Latin tongues without exception prefix them. In America, the dialects of the Zoque-]Mixe stock differ entirely among themselves in this respect, though closely allied in others. - He himself acknowledges (x, p. 23) that the dialects of the Guaycuru stock are by no means a unit in this feature, some prefix- ing and others suffixing the pronominal particles. His general classification is : ANDEAN TYPE (SUFFIXES). ATLANTIC TYPE (PREFIXES). Araucanian, Tupi-Guarani, Aymara, jMataco, Quechua, Guaycuru. Lule, "^ Vilela. "^The American Race. A Linguistic Classification and Ethnographic Description of the Native Tribes of North and Sonth America, pp. 392 (New York, 1 89 1). 2 Raoul de la Grasserie, Langtie Zoque ct Langue Mixe, Introduction fParis, 1898). 1898.] BRINTOX— LIXGUISTIC CARTOGRAPPIY. 181 Yet in some passages (xi, p. xliii) he dismisses the criterion of the affixes, and in maintaining the affinity of Quechua and Guaycuru says their contrast in this respect is unimportant ! I do not question the general value of pronominal pre-position and post-position; but it is not sufficiently fundamental to be adopted as a single criterion for classification/ Another feature to which Mr. Lafone Quevedo has given close study is the permutation of sounds in these tongues. Undoubtedly he has here shown regular and frequent changes between the dia- lects. But there will be few to follow him in such an equation as : coz= hoz= hti = hy ^y (Tavolini, i, App., p. 26). With such liberty, any two words could be brought into genetic relation. This laxity of method naturally leads him to assert linguistic affinities between all stocks ; these he claims the Guaycuru has with the Guarani, the Mataco with the Carib, and all with the Arawack (L. Q., ii, pp. 56, 58). Such conclusions are regretable, and it were to be desired that students of American languages should be as cautious in asserting analogies as are the leading scholars in the Aryan and Semitic fields. The Mataco Linguistic Stock. The lincruistic studv of the tribes of this vast area has had the usual effect of constantly reducing the number of its linguistic stocks by recognizing as dialects what earlier observers believed to be independent languages. To this result, I shall also contribute somewhat in the present article. It has been long recognized that most of the Chaco region was occupied at the discovery by two great groups of related idioms. One of these was central, extending in unbroken continuity from the river Paraguay to the foothills of the Andes, and from S. lat. 21° to 26^. This was the Mataco stock, so called from its central and principal tribe."- It is noticeable that all its members 1 Prof. Friederich Miiller observes that while there are a number of suffix-lan- guages, there is, in fact, no example of a true prefix-language, <' da neben ihr immer die Suffix-Bildung zur Anwendung kommt " (^Grtindriss der Sprachivis sei7schaft,'Qd. i,p. 129). This illustrates how uncertain such a criterion must be. Prof. Hovelacque remarks that linguistically the position of the pronominal affix *'n'a aucune importance " (Ztz Linguistiqice, p. 174.) 2 The Matacos refer to themselves as vicqiiii -=1 viri, men. 182 BEINTON — LINGUISTIC CARTOGKAPHY. [Oct. 7^. reside in contiguity, as if driven together by outer pressure on all sides. This would give probability to the opinion that they are the oldest surviving inhabitants of the Chaco. The dialectic variations in the stock may be seen in the follow- ing comparisons :^ Mataco Dialects. MAN. WOMAN. SUN. MOON. icnu, tiquiecua. huala. tsimini. inoon. cisna, juala. huela. nooHf ijuala. guela. ijuela. iguela. FIRE. WATER. HEAD. EYE. r inot, I kuaj, etec. uotei, iiaj\ letec. teijbei. itag. g^i^gi litec. no tela. ittaj. inn at, eteky teslo. EAR. MOUTH. NOSE. TONGUE. c hotel. kaj, f nocness, L mis. nuea-j lo-j sie , hajlecha. noguiotoc, nolagni. nonus. nocagligniu. quiote. caj. nus, caj-liqtiio. TOOTH. HAND. FOOT. HOUSE. choteiy tzotei, cueyi, noguez. pacui, ■\ kolo, 1 huettey no diet e. noguei. nopachio hoet, lobiique. zotte. cueiquio. piquio gugue. Mataco, Vejoz, Nocten, Mataco, Vejoz, Nocten, Mataco, Vejoz, Nocten, Mataco, Vejoz, Nocten, The tribe called by de Brettes the Aksseks must be members of the Mataco stock. They dwelt on the Bolivian frontier, extending in a northwesterly direction from the Rio Pilcomayo to the confines of the Samucus.^ Lafone Quevedo is of the opinion that the Mataco is a jargon, owing its lexicon to one stock and its grammar to another (Pelles- chi, ii, p. 14). This is not the impression that it makes upon me. I rather agree with Father Remedi (in Lafone Quevedo, v, p. 25) 1 1 have selected the same words which form the brief comparative vocabu- laries in my American Race. ^Mallat de Bassilan, U Amerique Inconmie, pp. 11, 37. They spoke neither Guana (Ennima), Guarani or Chamacoco. . 1898.] BRINTOX — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. 183. that it is of a very ancient type, and, apart from a certain number of borrowed words, is a wholly independent stock. The Guaycuru Stock. The second stock has received the name Guaycuru, a Tupi word meaning "fast runners."^ Mr. Lafone Quevedo does not acknowl- edge a fundamental distinction between this and the preceding group of tongues,- but the evidence seems to me insufficient to blend them in one. They almost surrounded the Matacos on three sides, the south, east and north, and extended on the eastern bank of the river Para- guay as far as S. lat. 19° 30' into the Brazilian province of Mato Grosso. In the south they roved as far as to 33° lat. south, where they were in contact with the Pampean tribes. One of their most redoubtable members were the Tobas, called by the Spanish Frentones or Frontones, from their habit of shaving the forehead. In modern times they have occupied the shores of the lower Pilcomayo, and have been reported at various localities along its banks quite up to its rapids (Cardus, i ; Thouar, i).* The Pilagas are a closely related horde. The large majority of this stock lived west of the great river; but in tlie south the Abipones and Mepones were found in the last century east of the river about lat. 28°; and in the north all the left bank, from Fort Coimbra to Puerto Casado, was peopled by tribes of the Guaycuru stock, locally known as Quetiadegodis or Uettiadiu, and Eyiguayegis or Eggiudgeg, the modern Mbayas and Caduveos (Boggiani, iv, p. 171). The dialectic variations in this stock may be seen in the sub- joined table. 1 Lafone Quevedo considers this word a diminutive from the root ai, rogue ^ but I think that von Martins is right in considering it composed of atd or guatd, to go ; curitei, quickly ; tiara, men. Some writers have objected to the use of this collective name for the stock on the ground that it is a common noun, and does not apply to a single nation. The same objection would be applicable to many nomitia gentilia in common use [e. g. Aryans, Semites) and is therefore a needless criticism. There are reasons why it is not desirable to choose the name of a single tribe for the whole stock. 2" El grupo iSIataco es una subclase mas del gran grupo Guaycuru." {^Bol. Inst. Geog. Argentiu, 1894, p. 518.) ^ M. Thouar (1, pp. 419-421) gives vocabularies of the Toba on the lower and on the upper Pilcomayo. 184 BRINTON — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. [Oct. 7, Guaycw'ic Dialects. MAN. "WOMAN. SUN. MOON. Mocovi, tale. aklo, daassoa. ciraigu. Toba, yahale, aid, nala, cagoic. Mbaya, conelego. igualo, aligeg, epenahi. Abipon, yoale, oaiier77ia. empaiga. graoec. Caduveo, houlegre, ' J agouina, ") I igualo, J aligega. epenai. Quiniquinas, heledde. he lode. allighera, hepenai. Upper Tobas, kome, J noodik, \ y-yayuod, / nala. auguei. FIRE. WATER. HEAD. EYE. Mocovi, annoreh, ole, evagayaca, y-caigo. coctk^cijate. Toba, nodek, r nogop, I netagrgat, \ calcoic, cakayte. Mbaya, nuledi, niogo, n a kilo, cogecogo. Abipon, ncaa-fec, enarp, enoj. ie, nemag, natoete. Caduveo, nicledi, niogo. naguilo, nigecoge. Quiniquinas, noledi, niogo. hiaquilo. kekerehe. Upper Tobas, lolle, nogapp. EAR. MOUTH. NOSE. TONGUE. Mocovi, licquela, ayap, lape, imniik. ulleganaste. Toba, quetela, ayap. cadimic. lateagat. Mbaya, conapagoti. tola. niniigo. cadoketi. Abipon, que in I, aagat. cat an at. lachig-atr o Caduveo, napagate. joladi. f niniigo, \ codeimic, nogueligi, codocaiti. Quiniquinas, parahte. hin-iolaque, himigo. hiokelegui . TOOTH. Mocovi, live, be. Toba, Jove, Mbaya, CO doe, nogtce. Abipon, yave. Caduveo, nogtie, Quiniquinas, codohe, HAND. FOOT. HOUSE. nepu-qjuinet, leti, labu, vo. yubat, apiate, ippia,nohic. cobahaga, codohua, dimi. apaquena, nachayu, niic. nilagadi, codohona. hiedede. dimigi. hibyhade, ctideine. The Tupi Stock. The northern portion of my map, from longitude 58° 30' to 66° is occupied by the Chiriguanos. They are a well-defined substock of the great Tupi-Guarani family. In the Sierra they extend south to the head waters of the Rio Vermejo (Cardus, i, p. 242). About 1898.] BHINTOX — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. ' 185 8000 of them have been converted to Christianity by the mis- sionaries, one of whom, Father A. M. Corrado, published some years since a book of devotion in the tongue.^ The difference of its vocables from the foregoing is seen in the following examples : Man, aba. Eye, exa. Woman, ciina. Ear, inanvi. Sun, ctiarasi. Nose, inapongtia. Moon, yasi, yiiai. Hand, ypo. Fire, tata. Foot, ypul. Water, i. House, oga. Head, fiaca. The name Chiriguanos is supposed to be a term of contempt applied to them by the Quechuas (= esticrcol frio). They call themselves ^^<:?, "men." One of their branches, the Tapiis or Tapietes, extend as far south as the Pilcomayo, and in scattered bands nearly to the R. Paraguay (Card us, i, p. 269). Their name is given them as a term of con- tempt by the Chiriguanos, because they go quite naked. It signifies the male or female genitalia (Tupi, tap'i)." For the same reason they are called Tirumbae, "naked men." M. Thouar found their westernmost village at Yagaigua, longitude 65° (Thouar, i, p. 305). They wear the tembeta, and are friendly {id., p. "^"^^y). The Guaranocas, one of their branches, inhabit the " Chaco de Antonio," within the territory of Bolivia.^ The Yanaiguas, the Pal- mares and the Sirionas (on the Rio Peray) are other branches (Car- dus, i, p. 272). At the time of the discovery this stock occupied much of the east of the map, extending along the left bank of the Rio Paraguay from about latitude 23° to 30° and below."* Here they bore the names Cainguas and Guayanas, up the river, and Caracaraes and ^ Catecismo de la Doctrina Cristiana en Leiigua C/iirigttana (Sucre, 187 1), A short grammatical outline of the dialect is given in the work El Colegio Franciscano de Tarija y sus Misio7ies, pp. 523-526. 2 It is also applied to the Chaneses of the foothills (Cardus, i, p. 250), Another derivation of it is from tapiii, something bought, = a slave, Tarija y sus Misiones, p. 54. 3 F. de Oliveira Cesar, Viaje al Oriente de Bolivia, p. 77 (Buenos Aires, 1891). * Dr. Paul Ehrenreich, " Ethnographische Karte von Brasilien," in Petermann's Miitheilujtgen, 1891. 186 BRIXTON — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. [Oct. 7, Ubeguas, near its mouth. ^ Whether the Caaiguas of Charlevoix are the same as the Cainguas is uncertain. Dr. Ehrenreich sup- poses them the older representatives of the modern Guayakis, a tribe near the middle Parana, who are extremely wild and timid. We have no sufficient knowledge of their tongue to identify the stock to which they belong." The modern Cainguas live on the upper Parana. Their customs and dialects have been thoroughly studied by Ambrosetti, who gives an ample and accurate vocabulary (Ambrosetti, ii and iii). The assertion of some writers that they have a tongue peculiar to them- selves has not proved correct. They are divided into three sub- tribes. Apuitere. Baaberd, or Baiicnlas. Chiripa. There are, however, but unimportant differences in the dialects. The Samucu Stock. In the northeast corner of the map, longitude 58°, latitude 20°, on the right bank of the river Paraguay, dwell the Chamocos or Chiamococos. They have been especially studied by Boggiani, whose monograph upon them presents excellent ethnographic and linguistic material. He claimed them (i, p. 23) to be an independent stock, and denied {id., p. 19) that they are linguistically related to the Samu- cus or Zamucos described by Father Azara and the traveler D'Or- bigny. Dr. Karl von den Steinen, in whose hands is a MS. grammar of the Samucu, has shown, however, by a comparison of twenty words that there is a decided lexical similarity between the two, and that this also extends to grammatic forms. ^ ^ See D'Orbigny, V Homme Aijiericaiii, Tom. ii, p. 270, whose statement has not been impugned by subsequent writers. 2 Dr. Ehrenreich, on the strength of one or two words, inclines to the opinion that they are Ges (my Tapuyas). See his article in Globus, January, 1898, p. 73. 3 His article is published in Globus, for May, 1895 (^^- Ixxvii, No. 21). In the American Race, p. 301, I have given twelve subtribes of the Samucu stock and a short vocabulary. Cardus (i, p. 327) calls it " Zamuca," and prints a vocabulary of twenty-three words. 1S98.] BRINTOX — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY 187 Comparison of Chamococo and Samucu. CHAMOCOCO. SAMUCU. I, eidc, yoc (we). Thou, dua, ugua. Good, ompa, tioni. White, porlo, pororo. Sweet, diri. dirip. Dead, toi. toi. Wood, pid. pit. Tree, port, pore. Road, dec. daec. Water, nio. yot. Sun, del, dirie (day) Mother, Ota, ote. Man, neii, naitie. Tongue, os-aruc, archo (pi.). Hand, os-u?7iiiie. yumanai. Eye, os-iddi. yede. Foot, os-iddili. irie. No, not. ie. ca-. Our, OS-, az: One, somma/a. tschoniara. This comparison can leave no doubt that the verbal correspond- ences of the two tongues are due to a close affinity of some kind. It has been accepted by Sr. Boggiani himself di. ii, pp. 172, 788. An abbreviation of Guayana. ^See Boggiani, "Etnografia del alto Paraguay," in Boletin del Instituto Geo- grafico Argentina, 1898, p. ii. 1898.] BRINTOX — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. 191 and were divided into nineteen subtribes. Their language was ■consonantal, nasal and guttural. The names of the subtribes were of formidable length, as : Guiabamaebnayesma. Guiguailyeguaypon. Ycteaguayefiene. Sanguotaiyamoctoc. They were characterized by wearing the barbote or labret, and were tall and warlike. About 1862, Demersay found them it^ in number, located at the ■Quartel del Cerrito, five leagues from Asuncion, and obtained from them the vocabulary mentioned below. ^ Father Azara asserted that the Machicuys spoke a tongue of their own; but D'Orbigny insisted that they were closely related to the Tobas, and hence belonged in the Guaycuru stock. He observes : ''The termination in their tongue of ith, ac and op prove this beyond contradiction."^ M. Demersay, in his Histoire du Paraguay (i860), gives a short vocabulary of the " Machicuy " as follows : 1. Eyes, hartec, 4. Thigh, hehihohoc. 2. Feet, hemenec. 5. Tobacco, heqtiena. 3. Fingers, heptehec. 6. Fire, tahasla. 7. Yes, tahase. Lafone Quevedo remarks of this (Tavolini, i, App., p. 19) that he has found no affinities in these words to the Abipon except in one (No. 3). A comparison even of these few terms indicates, however, that they are not from the Guaycuru stock, but belong with the Ennima, as: MACHICUY. GUANA. Eyes, h-artec, gni-actec. Feet, /ie??ienec, hemmenec. Fingers, he-ptehec, pehec. Tobacco, he-quena, henna, tenna. Fire, tahasla, tata. Another proof is the terminal c {ec, oc), which is doubtless a pro- ^Le Tottr du Monde, Vol. iv, pp. 108, in. ^ V Homme Americain, Toms ii, p. 94. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXXVII. 158. M, PRINTED DEC. 14, 1898. 192 BRINTON — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. [Oct. 7, nominal suffix, and which appears also in one of the tribal names of the Machicuy given by Hervas. This relationship has been accepted by Boggiani (v). No connection of this with any other tongue has yet been shown. There are a few similarities to the Tsoneca of Patagonia, but not sufficient to establish a relationship.^ ENNIMA. TSONECA. Eye, gn-ia-te!ic^ ia-telky iateteke. Beard, lekpaCy ia-pelek. Mouth, m-booc. iapdlk. Great, large, sossepeky satsa. House, pahat, ahoike. Bird, tou, tsdge. Extremity, member, pehecy pgiU Man, kihvaouo, kin a. The word pehec or pe' ec seems a general term in both tongues for the leg and foot. The Arawack Stock. One of the various hordes called Guanas dwells north of Corumba, in the province of Mato Grasso. They are also spoken of as Chiia- las, which is merely a variant, and Layanas, another variant. The Terenos on the river Miranda are their neighbors and relatives. These belong to the Arawack stock, which extended its various branches in an unbroken line from the Bahama Islands, off the coast of Florida, nearly to the river Pilcomayo of the Chaco. The relationship of this remote southern branch to the main stem is illustrated in the following comparisons : Arawack Stock. MAN. WOMAN. SUN. MOON. Guana, r hapohitaiy \ ta hanan, } zeejtOy kat-hai. kohaivai. Layana, hapohitey ze/iena, kai-xe. cohehe. Arawack dialects, ati^ atchi. > eno, in a, cachi, katchi^ , cohe. FIRE, WATER. HEAD. EYE. Guana, incMy hiina. kombai poiy ongtiei. Layana, tohna, tode. ongheh. Arawack dialects, ;j/«a2. tine, ttina. hi da, ito. 7tn-uqui. ^The Tsoneca words are from H. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the U. S. Exploring Expedition. m> 1898.] BRINTON — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. 193 EAR. Guana, guaihaiuo, Layana, ghehena^ Aravvack dialects, ;^«aw«z, TOOTH. Guana, onhai, Layana, onhe^ Arawack dialects, ««-<7^, 7i-ai, MOUTH. NOSE. TONGUE. baho, agueiri, mahainai, bdhalo^ ghire, nehne. panoma^ nu-chiri, nene, Jiino. HAND. FOOT. HOUSE. uonhuTH, djdhavai, niaihaino. memen. djehene, nichena. no-notna. tcn-geopa, nupeno. The Quechua Stock. In the southwestern portion of the map is marked the area at one time included under the government of the Incas. Their authority- extended eastward to the Rio Salado, including the valley of Cata- marca, and as far north as the upper tributaries of the Rio Vermejo, where they were in contact with the Chiriguanos. This is a greater area for the Incasic power in this region than has generally been assigned it ; but I am convinced that the evi- dence is sufficient to justify it. I include among the Quechuas the tribe of Omaguas or Omagua- cas who occupied an extended territory about Jujuy. Dr. Waitz, for various reasons, not linguistic, believed that they were a branch of the Tupi-Guarani stock, and related to the Chiriguanos.^ My grounds for dissenting from this and placing them with the Quechuas are the following : 1. The name Oniagua is undoubtedly the Quechua, iimayaccha, from lima, head, and yachay, to know, understand, and means, ''intelligent, superior people."^ It was applied by the Quechuas to various tribes whose culture or ability they respected. 2. Acarete du Biscay, who was among them in 1658, records that they called their chiefs curaca, which is the Quechua term for the head of a clan or village.^ 3. Nicholas del Techo gives the personal name of one of their principal chiefs as '' Piltipico." This is certainly the Quechua 1 Anthropologic der Naturvblker, Bd, iii, pp. 432, 433. 2 See von Tschudi, Beitrdge zur Kenntniss des Alien Peru, p. 139. Martins thought it a hybrid of Quechua and Tupi. Ethnographie und Sprachenkunde Amerikas, Bd. i, S. 436. 3 Voyage to Buenos Aires, p. 58 (London, 17 16). At that time their principal town had 200 houses. Their immediate neighbors to the west were the Chichas, who were Quechuas. % 194: BRINTON — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. LOct 7, ppillccopichiu, which signifies a certain mountain bird highly esteemed for its beautiful plumage/ These facts leave no reasonable doubt that this tribe was of the Quechuan stock. The Juris (Quechua, suri^ ostrich^) had their habitations in the foothills about S. latitude 27° (''near the sierra of Anconquija," Lafone Quevedo). They are classed by D'Orbigny and Waitz among the Guaranis, but Lafone Quevedo believes they spoke a dia- lect of the Chaco. I included them {^American Race, p. 316) among the Lule-Vilelas, from their location, but believe that it is somewhat probable that they belonged to the Quechua stock. The Lule Stock. In my former classification of the Chaco tongues I placed the Lule (of Machoni) and the Vilela under one group. ^ This has in a measure been substantiated by Lafone Quevedo, though he be- lieves the latter to be more of a jargon {mezcld) of a number of tongues.^ This is, indeed, probable, as from their wandering habits Pel- leschi calls them "the Jews of the Chaco." For this reason some have included them with the Matacos. There are lexical analogies, but the pronouns and the method of affixing them differ, the Vilela suffixing the possessive. For the present, it seems necessary to leave them together and separate from others. But the Tonocotes whom I grouped with them are no doubt Matacos, the term being a corruption of Noctenes or Ocieneei, modifications of their own name JIuenneyei, '' Men " (Thouar, i, p. 56). Groups of Uncertain Affinities. The above-mentioned eight stocks are clearly recognized, there being sufficient linguistic material to distinguish and classify them. 1 Historia Provincice ParaquaricB, Lib. ii, cap. 7. 2 Suri was also the general name given by the Quechuas to the Province of Tucuman ; so it would have no ethnic significance applied to a tribe. 3 The American Race, p. 316. * «' Se ha podido establecer el hecho que (la Vilela) tiene bastante afinidad con el Lule de Machoni" (ii, p. 40). On the Lules of Barcena see under Cacanas. Elsewhere Lafone Quevedo says, " Vilela, 6 Chulupi ^0 Chunupi es un co-dialecto del Lule de Machoni" [Boletin del Inst. Geog. Argent., 1894, p- 520). 1898.] BKINTON — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. 195 But there remain a number of tribes about whom there are much confusion and uncertainty. In some instances the same name has been applied to groups speaking radically distinct languages, and the identity of the name has led authors to suppose them of one origin. I shall mention some of the more prominent examples and attempt to diminish the difficulties which they present. The Lenguas (Timbues). Few tribes have contributed more to the confusion of the eth- nography of the Chaco region than those known as the Lenguas. Dr. Colini (i, pp. 291, 292) inserts a long note upon them, but it fails to clear up the obscurity about them, or to reconcile the contra- dictory statements of authors. These contradictions are materially lessened when we learn that the Spanish term lenguas tongue, was applied indiscriminately by the early colonists to any tribe who had the custom of inserting a labret, barbate, in the lower lip, causing it to project and resemble an outstretched tongue.^ It has, therefore, no signification as a proper name. In the Tupi-Guarani tongue this ornament is called tembeta, from iembe, the lower lip.^ This explains the name applied to various tribes, Timbues, or Timbois. It is in signification the same as Lengua, and refers to the same use of the labret ornament.^ Neither Lengua nor Timbue, therefore, is a nomen gentile. This is evident from the discrepancies of authors about their locations and amply explains those discrepancies. Father Azara describes them as a subtribe of the Abipons, and in entire conformity with this D'Orbigny* found them in 1828 living about latitude 27°, longitude 62°, in the midst of the territory of 1 A good illustration of its use is shown in the portrait of a Suya in Von den Steinen's Durch Cejzlral Brasilien, p. 204. Another form is where a labret several inches in length was thrust outward and downward through the lower lip. 2 Ruiz de Montoya, Vocabulario de la Lengua Tupi, s. v, 3 Not to the perforation of the nose, the nariz horadada, as Lafone Quevedo states (ix, p. 4). The tef?ibefa is the sign of virility and probably a personal and totemic sign of life. When a warrior is killed in battle his slayer carries off the tembeta from his lip and presents it to his own wife (Thouar, i, p. 51). It is made of wood or metal, and varies in diameter. *D'Orbigny, L" Homiyie Anicricain, Vol. ii, pp. 116, 120, 121. 196 BEINTON— LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. [Oct. 7, that tribe. He thought their language differed ''quant au fond," but apparently did not examine it closely, and considered them of the same stock. This means simply that some of the Abipons wore the labret. Another tribe of Lenguas lived and still live on the right bank of the river Paraguay, about latitude 21°. They wear the labret, and have been recently visited by several travelers. Some of these speak a Guaycuru dialect, according to Boggiani and Colini, though Cardus reports authority that some are Guaranis. Possibly two tribes residing in the same region, though of diverse stocks, may wear the tembeta. Further down stream, in the angle of the R. Paraguay and R. Pilcomayo near Asuncion, is another group of Lenguas. Mr. Lafone Quevedo states that they belong to the Mataco (Enimaga) stock ; and this is confirmed by their numerals quoted by Father Cardus, as the following comparison illustrates : LENGUAS OF CARDUS. MATACO. One, gezle. guoslo. Two, ligague. ho-tequachi. Three, diaquegzlna^ lach-tdiquajel. Four, dipegai, tdiqiialessh ichi. Five, chumaja, ype befagla. The Lenguas whom M. Demersay found in this locality (i860) lived north of the Rio Pilcomayo, near the Quartel del Cerrito, and were fast disappearing.^ Under the Tupi appellative, Timbues, tribes wearing the labret were reported by Pedro Mendoza on the Paraguay about where the Mataco Lenguas were later found, and doubtless were the same.'^ Others were on the lower Parana in early times (located latitude 33°, longitude 62° by Lafone Quevedo, ix, pp. 9-1 1. and 35). Their language is unknown, and they are long since extinct in that locality. The same name, Timbois, Tembetas, always for the same reason, was applied to a tribe in the northern Chaco, speaking either Tupi or Chiquito (Lafone Quevedo, ix, p. 11), and to a band of the Chiriguanos (Cardus, i, p. 242). ^ Le Tour du Monde, Tome iv, p. loS. ' Coleti, Diccionario Storico-geografico delV America Meridionaley s. v. (Venice, 177 1). 189S.] BRINTON — LINGl^ISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. 197 Some of the Chiquitos were certainly called Lenguas. Father Fernandez mentions a tribe so named, speaking Chiquito, who dwelt near Lake Nengetures, thirty leagues from the Rio Piray.^ A horde of the '' Payaguas " (about latitude 27°, longitude 58°) seems also to have received the name Lenguas; as a " Len- gua " vocabulary collected by Cervifio has been shown by Lafone Quevedo to be really Payagua, that is, Guaycuru (Tavolini i, App., p. 21). Doubtless they, too, made use of the labret, (see also Lafone Quevedo, xi, p. xxix). From the above it is evident that neither of the names ''Len- guas " or *'Timbues " has any ethnic significance and they cause confusion ; so I have omitted them from the map.- Believing the so-called Lenguas between the Pilcomayo and the Paraguay to be or to have been Matacos, I extend that stock to the latter river, differing in this from the map of Pelleschi. The Chanas (Chanases). This is another general term which has led to ethnographic errors. It is a Tupi word compounded of ane, blood relation, with the pronominal prefix, che, my, = my relations. Cardus, on his map, has correctly placed one of the tribes so named about latitude 22°, longitude 65°, south of the Cliiriguanos, to whom they are affined, both being of Tupi blood. D'Orbigny located an early nation of this name ''on the island of the Uruguay, opposite the mouth of the Rio Negro. "^ Lafone Quevedo has recently devoted an article to the latter horde (ix). He places them on the mainland, latitude 34°, longi- tude 59°. He also offers some interesting specimens of their language from the MSS. of Father Larranaga. It appears to be morphologically related to the eastern Chaco tongues, but the in- formation about it is too slight to be decisive. It shows clearly, however, that these " Chanas " were not relations of the Tupis. Other Chaneses are located by Thouar on his map of the R. Pilcomayo, on that river about longitude 64°, latitude 22' 30°. 1 Relacion hisiorial, p. 158. ^"Orejones," "Big-Eared," is another descriptive term applied by the Spaniards to any tribe who expanded the lobes of the ears by artificial means. It also has no ethnic significance. 3 L^ Homme Americam, Tome, ii, p. 84. 198 BRINTON — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. [Oct. 7,. These must have been a band of the Chiriguanos who have recently wandered there. The Ara-chanes {uara-che-ana, '' men our cousins "), located by early writers on the Paraguay about south latitude 3o°-3i°, were obviously a Guarani horde. Ameghino quotes authorities to show that there were ''reductions " of Chanas who were pure Guaranis on the Rio Carcaranal and the Rio Arecife.^ In spite of the identity in appearance and language of the Chaneses among the Chiriguanos, there is a tradition that they are of a different stock, all their adults having been slain and the children adopted by the Chiriguanos. For this reason the latter call them tapiii, slaves, while the Chaneses addresses a Chiriguano as cheya, ' ' my master. > >2 The Charuas and Querandies. Acarete du Biscay, writing in 1658, says, " The country on the north side of the river de la Plata is inhabited by none but savages called Charruas.''^^ A wild, nomadic, equestrian nation of this name roamed over the same territory a century later and are described by Father Gaetano Cattaneo as intractable to the best efforts of the mission- aries.^ Finally, about 1832, they were destroyed, as a tribe, by the whites, though probably individuals of them survived the assaults. They appear to have extended north as far as 30° and to have occupied most of the area of Uruguay and parts of the Brazilian province of Rio Grande do Sul. The linguistic affiliation of this extended people has not been discovered. They are believed by I.afone Quevedo to have belonged to the Guaycuru stock, ^ but their name, which is Guarani {cJie, my, ^ F. Ameghino, La Antiguedad del Hombre eji el Plata ^ Tome i, Cap. viii. Other evidence is in the « Repartimiento," of 1582, published by Outes ; op. cit. App, 3 ; but I do not signify this distribution of the Guaranis, as it seems to have been effected by the Spaniards. 2 El Colegio Franciscano de Tarija y sas Misiones, p. 54 (Queracchi, 1884). ' Voyage to Buenos Aires, p. 28. * His letters are appended to Muratori's // Cristianesimo Felice nel Para- guai (ytmce, 1743). ^ In Bole tin del Instittito Geografico Argentino, 1894, p. 524. 1898.] BRINTON — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. 199 uara, men), may indicate that they were of that tongue.^ They wore a peculiar labret. Following D'Orbigny and others, I placed them in The American Race as a separate stock ; but now doubt that this was correct. No authentic texts of their language is known to me, but the elements of their culture, the place names of their area, and the local appellations of plants and animals are de- rived from the Tupi Guarani."^ In a monograph recently published, Senor Felix F. Outes has ur- gently argued that Charuas of the left bank of the La Plata and the Querandies (Carandies) of the right bank (near where the city of Buenos Aires is now situated) both belonged to the Guaycuru stock. ^ The latter extended as far north as the Rio Carcarana (south latitude 32° 30'), where they adjoined the Quiloazas (Quil- vazas). They wore the tembeta, and at the close of the sixteenth century were allied with the Guaranis, after which period their name disappears. Ameghino places them in the Guarani stock, ^ while Lafone Quevedo (ix) prefers to attach them to the Guay- curus. The only linguistic evidence extant lies in the proper names which have been preserved. A notable peculiarity is the frequent termination of the names of chieftains in the syllable pen ; thus Ccespen, Pacaospen, Allapen^ Quemumphi, etc. This termination does not occur in the Guaycuru, but is not uncommon in the Au- canian (Araucanian) dialects, which also were spoken by the Pam- pean tribes. In these the word pen means estate or property. It is probably allied io gen, a suffix signifying rule, control or ownership.^ ^ Lafone Quevedo (ix, p. 12) prefers to derive it from che, my, or to me, and harti, hurtful, [cherdrzia, "lo que me hace dano," Ruiz), which would be ap- plicable to enemies. He inclines to attach them to the Chaco stocks, although he quotes Hervas, who had a catechism in it, ^to the effect that their tongue was not related to the "idioms of the Paraguay." 2 See Von Ihering, in Verhandlungen der Berlmer Anthrop. Gesell,, 1889, PP- 655-659. 3 Los Querandies, Contribucion al Estudio de la Etnograjia Argentina (Buenos Aires, 1897). ^ F, Ameghino, op. cit.. Tom. i., Cap. xi. 5 Comp. Febres, Diccionario Araucano, s.v., and Haverstadt, Chiliditgu, Section 285. The latter gives the example, incite -gen ovicha -gen. '« I am owner or master of these sheep." It is both a suffix and prefix. As a suffix, it often conveys the abstract sense of property or quality. Cf. Valdivia, Arte y Gra7natica de la lengua del Reyno de Chile, pp. 41, 42. 200 BKINTON — LINGUISTIC CARTOGRAPHY. [Oct. 7, Moreover, when in 1580 the Spaniards routed the Querandies, they fled not to the Guaycurus, but to the Ranqueles, whom they must have regarded as their kinsmen. The Ranqueles, however, are of Aucanian lineage and language. I believe, therefore, that I was right in The American Race (p. 323) in placing the Querandies in the Aucanian stock, an opinion strengthened by the arguments of Burmeister from historic a.nd archaeologic grounds.^ The Payaguas. In my American Race I have counted this as one of the irreduci- ble stocks of the Chaco, represented by the following tribes : Agaces, on the Rio Paraguay. Payaguas, near Santa Fe. SarigueSy on middle Paraguay." Sr. Lafone Quevedo maintains that the Payagua is of the same stock as the Mocovi and Abipon, /'. xii. The earliest reference to Apollonius that has been discovered is in the sacred lyrics of Venantius Fortunatus,^ bishop of Poitiers, (inter annos 566 et 568) where he compares his own sad, exiled wanderings in Gaul with those of the shipwrecked Apollonius — *• Tristius erro niniis, patriis vagus exsul ab oris, Quam sit Apolloniis naufragus hospes aquis." Another reference is found in the Gesta Abbatum Fontanellen- sium, written about 750 A.D. In the thirteenth chapter, entitled "Gesta Wandonis abbatis cornobii Fontanellensis," occurs the fol- lowing : ** Wando presbyter a patre Baldrico nomine progenitus ter- ritorio Tellau ortus, regimen assumpsit cornobii ab anno dominicae incarnationis 742." Among the books belonging to this abbot is cited, ''Item historiam Apollonii regis Tyri in codice uno " (see Monumenia Gerttianice historica, edidit G. H. Pertz. Scriptorum. Tomus ii, Hannover, 1829, p. 287). A still earlier reference than the former is in " Tractat de dubiis nominibus," a grammatical index found in a Vienna MS. of the seventh century. The latest writer cited in it is the poet Dynamius, a Gaul of the sixth century.' It seems clearly made out that the '' index " was compiled in the Merovingian times, or, as Haupt says, **In einer Zeit wo im Uebergang des Lateins in die romanischen Sprachen durch Erhebung der Accusative zu Nominativen und durch andere Vermischungen und Entstellungen von denen besonders Ur- kunden vielfache Beispiele darbieten, das Geschlecht der Worterun- kenntlich wurde, spater als die romanische Sprachniedersetzung ^ Venantius Fortunatus, Miscellanea Lib. vi, cap. 10, hnes 5 and 6. The lines are cited as above in Migne's Patrologice T. 88, and Migne reprints the best edition of Fortunatus, that of the Benedictine, Mich. Ang. Luschi. Luschi no- tices the variants " Apollonius" and " Apollonia," but prefers " Apolloniis," as above, Fortunatus is venerated in the diocese of Poitiers as a saint, his feast being celebrated December 14. - Dynamius, Governor of Marseilles, was born at Aries, and lived at the end of the sixth century. See Moreri, Diet. Hist., 1725, iii, 646, and Biographie Uni- verse lie, Vol. 12. 222 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. T, voUbracht war und das Latein in den Karolingischen Schulen ungetrlibt durch romanische Formen gelehrt ward, war zu so ganz trivialen Bemerkungen wie sie jenes Verzeichniss enthalt ebensowe- nig ein Anlass als sich gleichartige Beispiele finden " (Haupt^ Opuscula, p. 13). The reference in the ^' De dubiis" reads *' Gymnasium generis neutri sicut balneum in ApoUonio 'gymna- sium patet.' " The . quotation is from the scene in Fenlapolis, when the boys cry aloud, *' Audite, cives, audite, peregrini, ingenui et servi, gymnasium patef ' (see Rh. Museum filr Philologies neue Folge xxvi, S. 638-9, xxvii, 103-114). In chapter 34, forty aurii are considered more than a half libra auri, yet not a whole one; that is, one pound of gold is coined into fifty pieces, which coincides with the practice of the time after Cara- calla.^ After Constantine it became customary to compute by solidi. The oldest Latin version therefore would appear to have been composed in the time between Caracalla and Constantine (see W. Christ, Sitzungsderichfe d. Akad. d. Wissenchaft zu Milnchen Cl.y 1872, p. 4, and Marquardt Rom. Altertuin, iii, 2, 18, 24). As the translation was certainly made before the verses of Venan- tius and the treatise *' De dubiis," it was as certainly made after Symposius, whose riddles are inserted. The collection of riddles is contained in many MSS. The oldest is the Codex Salmasianus, belonging to the end of the seventh or the beginning of the eighth century. The riddles themselves are of earlier date. Teuffel says : " Etwa aus dem vierten bis fiinften Jahrhundert stammen wohl die hundert Rathselgedichte des Symphosius. Sie bestehen je aus dret Hexametern nebst einem ungeschickten Prolog. Sprache und Vers- bau sind in reinem Geschmacke und zeigen den Verfasser als einen Nachahmer des Ausonius," (Teuffel, p. 106 1, 3d ed.; see also Douce, Illustrations of Shakespeare, 1807, ii, 135 ; and Riese, Zeit- schriftfilr Oesireich. Gymn., xix, 1868, 483-500). From these arguments we may infer, as Velser, Fabricius^ and Douce have done, that the original Latin text was compiled some time in the fifth century. Teuffel says, 'Mn the course of the sixth century," which agrees also with the general character of the Latin ^ Haec dicens protulit XL Aureos et dedit in Manu virginis et dicit, etc cui juvenis ait " si salva sis, indica mihi, quantum dedit at te juvenis," etc Puella ait <' quater denos mihi Aureos dedit." Juvenis ait " Ma'um illi sit I quid magnum illi fuisset, homini tarn diviti, si librom aiiri tibi daret integram ? Ut ergo scias, me esse meliorem, tolle libram auri integram." (Riese, 1893, ?• 7')- - Fabricius, Bibliothecce Grtecce, Hamburg, 1721, 1. 5, c. 6. 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 223 and especially with the peculiar use of dos in a sense opposite to the Latin meaning, but peculiar to the German period = pretium puellae, Muntschatz. (Teuffel, 481.) The Persistence of the Story. The ApoUonius Saga is remarkable for its persiste?ice and its sta- bility, that is for its duration and vitality, and for its retention of its original character and form. We will consider first lis persist- ence. The remarkable number of MSS. attests the wide popularity of the story before the introduction of printing. William, Bishop of Tyre, in the twelfth century, in referring to his bishopric, testifies to the fame of the romance — '' ex hac etiam et Hiram Salomonis co- operator ad aedificium templi domini rex fuit et ApoUonius gesta cujus celebrem et late vulgatam ha bent historia77iy About 1186 Godfrey of Viterbo related the story as authentic history in his Pantheon, or Universal Chronicle (Pertz, Archiv v, 166; vii, 559), a sort of rhymed record of events from Adam to Godfrey. The author was chaplain to Conrad III, Frederick I and Henry VI. The principal MSS. of the work are Vienna 3406, and Paris 5003. It has been printed in Ge7'ma?iicorum Scriptorum Tomus alter, ex bibliotheca Joannis Pistorii Nidatii D. editio tertia curante B. G, Struvio, RatisboncE, Sumptibus J. C. Peezii, 1726, pp. 1 75-181. Godfrey's Pantheon is an important monument and deserves more particular attention. My study is based upon a copy in my own possession. It is a ponderous folio with the title : Pantheon sive Uftiversitatis Libri qui Chronici appellantur, xx, omnes omnium secular um et geiitium, tarn sacras quam prophanas Historias com- plect entes : per V. C. Basilice ex officifta /acobi Parci (1559). It is dedicated to Pope Urban III (i 185-1 187). After a description of Rome and Carthage, of Asdrubal and Hannibal, we arrive at the subject of our story, in column 282 — ^' His temporibus ApoUonius rex Tyri et Sidonis ab Antiocho juniore Seleuco rege a regno Tyri et Sidonis fugatur : qui navigio fugiens, mira pericula patitur." Gower explicitly says that he de- rived the story as narrated in Confessio Amantis from these chap- ters of the Pantheon. " Of a cronique in dales gon The wich is cleped Panteon In loves cause I rede thus." PKOC. AMEK. PHILOS. SOC. XXXVII. 158. O. PRINTED DEC. 15, 1898. 224 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7,. The titles of Godfrey's chapters will be sufficient to indicate the course of his narrative and its close parallel to the oldest Latin MSS. 1. De Apollonio rege Tyri et Sidonis, et de ejus infortunis atque fortunis. 2. De eodem Apollonio fugiente a facie Antiochi. 3. Item de eodem Apollonio naufragium passo. 4. Item de Apollonio, ubi suscepit eum rex Archistrates et dat ei filiam suam. 5. Item de Apol., ubi mortuo Antiocho ipse eligitur in imperium Antiochise. 6. Apol. tendit Antiochiam, sed uxor ejus in partu mortua pro- jicitur in mare, 7. Apol. reiicta filia in urbe Tharsia, pergit Antiochiam. 8. Tharsia, filia Apollonii capitur a piratis et venditur lenoni in civitate Militena. 9. Tharsia venditur a piratis in urbe Militena ubi regnat Athena- goras, qui saluat eam a Stupro. TO. Apol. pergit ab Antiochia in Tharsiam urbem requirere Tharsiam filiam suam. 11. Apol. recognoscit et recipit filiam suam in urbe Militena, per regem Athenagoram. 12. Tharsia recognoscitur a patre suo Apollonio. 13. Apol. recipit filiam ignotam et fit leetitia magna in urbe Militena. Apoolonius '[sic'] visitat socerum Archistratem. Godfrey's stanza consists of two rhyming hexameters and a pen- tameter verse. For further editions of Godfrey, cf. Griisse, Tresor de livres rares et precieux, iii, 100. It is said in the bibliographies of Apollonius that the story is contained in Vincentius Bellovac, Speculum hystoriale, printed at Augsburg in 1474, but after struggling patiently through the three immense folios in the British Museum I must confess that I have been unable to find the slightest trace of the romance. There are three main sources of the endless stories of Apollonius in the Middle Ages. They are either founded upon the Latin His- toria, or they proceed from Godfrey, or the Gesia Romanorum} 1 Editions by Oesterley, 1872, and Keller, 1842. The Colmar MS. (fourteenth century) is the only old MS. which contains the Apollonius. Cf. Wichert, Zeitsch. f. dent. Geschichtsforschitng, vi. 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS., 225 From Godfrey the story entered England (Gower and Shake- speare) and North and South Germany ; from the Gesta Romaiiorum arose the popular versions among the romance peoples, and in Hol- land, Hungary, Sweden and Russia. In my review of the various national versions of the story I shall indicate whenever possible the genesis and dependence of the texts. German Versions. The Alexanderlied of the early twelfth century closes its account of the plundering of Tyre with the lines ; " Zerstoeret lac do Tyrus die stifte sint der Kiinec Apollonius von dem di buoch sagent noch den der Kiinec Antioch iiber mer jagete wande er ime sagete ein retische mit vorhten daz was mit bedahten [bedecketen] worten geshriben in einem brief daz er sin selbes tohter beslief." Lamprecht who wrote these lines lived during the first half of the twelfth century, and his source of information was an old romantic poem of Alexander by Alberic de Besan^on,^ of which the begin- ning only survives. Weismann, who edited Lamprecht in 1850, was led by the line " Geshriben in einem brief," to believe that L. knew the story inaccurately. Now in a Stuttgart MS. of the Latin Apollonius certain German verses in the form of a narrative are appended to the riddles, whence Massmann concluded, in connec- tion with Lamprecht' s own words, that there must have been a German version of the story before Lamprecht. But Weismann and Penon after him have regarded these verses as a first attempt and not as verses copied from a previously existing versification of the story (see Massmann, Denkmdler, 1828, Vorrede, p. 10, and L.a.mprechVs A /ex antfer, v, 1054)- The explanation of the " brief* or 'Metter " as found in the Alexa7ider poem is not difficult. In Shakespeare Antioch hands to Pericles a writing which contains the riddle, saying : 1 Cf. Koberstein Grundriss der Geschichte der deutschen Nationalliteratur i, 161 ; Bartsch, Chrestomathie de V ancien frangais y 2me edition, 17-20. 226 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, " Read the conclusion, then ; Which read and not expounded, 'tis decreed, As these before thee, thou thyself shalt bleed " (i, i^) In Godfrey of Viterbo, too, '* Antiochi regis scelerum problemata legit, ''^ but there the riddles are read over the gate of the city where they are inscribed. The Lapaume edition has it that the riddle had been inscribed upon the gate of the city (quia questio condi- tionis in porta civitatis scripta erat). In the Cretan version the riddle is written upon the wall. Other versions, the Italian, Span- ish, Bohemian, Copland, etc., repeat the same method of convey- ing the riddle to Apollonius. Shakespeare is the only one who speaks of the riddle as written upon paper ; all the others have it written over the gate or on the wall. Lamprecht's reference indi- cates that in some lost version the narrator had anticipated Shake- speare in this invention. Lamprecht's lines quoted above may be translated ''King Apollonius of whom the books still tell, whom King Antioch pursued over seas because he told him a gruesome riddle, which was written with covered words, in a letter.''^ They stand thus in the Strassburg MS. of the Alexander. The Vorau version omits the reference to the *' covered words " (bedecketen worten) and reads, 'Mie solved a riddle in a letter" (missive). The original meaning no doubt was, as in the lines above quoted, that the riddle was communicated in a letter, but was misinter- preted by Kinzel, who supposed the solution to be conveyed in a letter, /. e. in a missive. The Basle edition also interprets after this fashion and states explicitly ''darumb, daz er im sagtte und im des sante brieff, daz er sin dochter beslieff " (because he told him, and sent him a letter to that effect, that he, etc.).^ The first poet in Germany to work independently upon the Saga was Heinrich von Neustadt, who finished his Apollonius von Tyr- land (a poem of 20,893 verses) at the beginning of the fourteenth century.^ Heinrich was a physician in Vienna, and naturally was interested in the story of the resuscitation of Lucina, the wife of Apollonius. In his poem he shows an interest in natural history, and introduces 1 In Gower and Twine the riddle is spoken^ as in the Latin, not read. 2Cf. Singer, p. 37. ' Heinrich von ^o.yysX'x^X., Apollonius. von Goles Zzto^un/tfhev&usgegehen von Joseph Strobl, Wien, 1875. Pudmenzky, Shakespeare's Pericles und der Apol- lonius des Heinrich von Neustadt, Detmold, 1884. 1898.] . SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 227 lists of fishes, stones and spices. But the deviations from the His- toria we will consider elsewhere (verses 2913-15 io6 relate to inci- dents which are not found in the Latin story). At the close of the poem Henry introduces into his rhyme his name and address — " Wie ditz puocli si erdaht unde in deutsche rime praht daz sage ich eu dast pillich ez geschach ze Wienne in Osterrich waz ich sage daz ist war ez sint me dau tousent jar daz ditz puoch zem ersten wart geschriben in Latin : sit ez ist pliben daz ez nie von keinem man solhe rime geschriben gewan} wer ditz puoch gedihtet hat daz sage ich eu des ist niht rat, ein schoeneu frouwe in drumbe pat : Meister Heinrich von der Neuvvenstat ein arzet von den puochen. wil in ieman suochen er ist gesezzen an dem Graben got muez in in siner huote haben " {StrobL, p. 124, lines 20,844.-20,861). In Von Gotes Zuokunft {\me 467), the poet again alludes to his Austrian nativity. The latin book of the Apollonius he says he ob- tained from Nicolas of Stadlaw : "der saelic pfarraere her Niclas von Stadlouwe." Nicolas lived, as Ferdinand Wolf has demonstrated ( Wiener Jahrbilcher der L. ii, 56, 257), in the first quarter of the fourteenth century. He appears in the records of the years 129 7-1 3 18, together with Bernhard von Krannest, of whom there are records from 1304 until 1332, and who also is referred to in the poem (line 13,696). In 1 31 2 Heinrich and his wife Alheit were given the Freisinger- hofe, located upon the Graben in Vienna. It was therefore after he was *' gesezzen an dem Graben," or after 1312, that he wrote Apollonius, which from various other reasons is believed to have been preceded by the other composition of the same author ( Von Gotes 1 This declaration that before Heinrich no translation had been made from the Latin into German rhyme, strengthens Weismann's theory quoted above. 228 SMYTH — PEKICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, Ziiokunft), in which there is no reference to the house upon the Graben. Two German prose translations of the Latin text of the Historia were published in 1873 ^7 Carl Shroder.^ The first is from a man- uscript of the fifteenth century, now in Leipzig," in the handwriting of a Saxon monk who lived probably in the neighborhood of Meissen.' The other is in a MS. of the same century at Donaueschingen, written in the Suabian dialect and closely resembling the Volksbuch written by Heinrich Steinhowel and published by Gintherus Zainer von Reutlingen at Antwerp, in 147 1 — Die hy story des Kuniges Ap- pollonij vo latin zu ieutsch geinachet, Gintherus Zainer von Reut- li7igen. Augspitrg, 14'ji, fol. (31 leaves; 35 lines to the full page; without pagination, signature or calch words). The book is be- lieved by some to have been written in 1461, by others in 1464. An acrostic found in the poem gives the date of composition. Bartsch {Germanische Studie7i, ii, 305) fixes the date at 1461 ; Sin- ger at 1464. Heinrich Steinhowel, the author, was born in 141 2 at Weil. He visited Italy, studied medicine at Padua, and practiced his profession in Esslingen. He died at Ulm in 1483.* He was a translator, and published a rendering of Petrarch's Latin version of Boccaccio's Griseldis. He also translated Boccaccio's De Claris Mulief^ibiis, which was printed by Johann Zainer von Reutlingen, 1473, ^'^'^^ reprinted by Anton Sorg, 1479. ^^ is also published by Karl Drescher in Bibliothek des Litt. Vereins in Stuttgart, Vol. 205. This Augsburg Apollonius was reprinted by Joh. Bemler in 1476; Anth. Sorg, 1479 ^"<^ 1480; at Ulm, 1495 ; again at Ulm, by Hans Zeiner, 1499, and at Augsburg, by H. Froschauer, 15 16. It is the same book that bears the title Von Kilnig Appolonio. Eyn sch'one und lustige Histori nit mynders nutzlich dann kurtzweilig zu 1 "Griseldis. Apollonius von Tyius, Aus Handschfiften herausgegeben von Carl Schroder, Leipzig, T. O. Weigel, 1873." This is Heft ii, Pt. 5, of Mit- theilungeii der dciitschen Gesellschaft ziir Erfoi'sc/mng vaterldndiscJur Sprache iind Altertilnier in Leipzig, pp. 85-13 1. 2 Haupt speaks of another MS. in Breslau ( O pus c 11 la, iii, 28). 3 A conjecture of Schroder, adopted by Penon. *Paul, Grintdriss, ii, i, 403 (article by F. Vogt), Wackernagel-Martin, Gesch. der dent. Lit.,S. 454, A. 234, gives 1420 as the year of birth. For the biography of Steinhowel, see Keller Litteratur Verein, 51 : 673, and Wunderlich, St. und das Decameron, 1889. 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLOXIUS. 229 lesen Vdr Jam durcJi D. Gotfrid von Viterb. im late in beschrieben. Nachnialn inns Tents ch verwendet. IS 40, Augsburg, H. Steyner. And again, Ein schone History AppoIo7iius, wie er von seinem Landt vertrieben, schiffbruch und mancJierlei U7iglilck erlitten, und dock endlich durch Gliick wider in sein Landt kommen ist. Augsburg, 1556} Steinhowel fixes the date of the reign of Apollonius with great care : — " Das ist ain Vorred in die hystorie des KUniges Appolonii das man wisse wen er geregnieret hab." He arrives at the proper period by a gradual descent from Eden and the flood to the fall of Troy, the building of Rome, the divi- sion of the world after the death of Alexander, etc. There is a mild pathos and humor in the author's personal re- miniscence and profession : " Ett ichs geton sumnus bass Ain rapp singt all zeit eras eras eras, In soliehem gsang han ich gelebt Nun und viertzig iar in Hoftnung gewebt Ruwiger als vergangen Zeitt leh gedaeht allweg bis morn beitt Cumst du dannoeht gelernen wol Usz dem bleib ich an kiinsten vol." After settling the time of the reign, the translator enters upon a ■description of the incest, in which he closely resembles Wynkyn de Worde(i5io). Apollonius guesses the king's riddle, whereupon Antiochus lies angrily saying that his solution ^'in no way answers the question." When Apollonius reaches home he looks in his books and finds that in all things he has answered the king aright. He departs from Tyre in the middle hour of the night, unknown to all the citizens. When his flight is discovered there is great sad- ness, no dancing, no marriages — " alle tabernen waren beschlossen. Elemitus (Hellenicus) is the bearer of the warning to Apollonius. The prince relieves the distress of Tarsus with 100,000 measures of wheat, declines compensation, and the grateful burghers erect a statue of him with corn in his right hand and his left foot spurning gold. The king's daughter in this version is called Cleopatra;^ 1 Grasse, Tresor de livres rares et precieux,'\, 165; Grasse, Lehrbiich einer allgemeinen Literdrgeschichte , ii, 3: 459, 460. ^ She is called " Camilla" in two Latin MSS., Vienna 362 and Vienna 510, (ssec xiii), and the daughter of Antiochus is called in them Creusa. 230 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, she is instructed in music by ApoUonius, to whom she says, ^' You are called ApoUonius; it were better to call you Apollo." As they walk by the seashore a ship approaches land. " We are from Tyre," says the captain. " A land well known to me," replies ApoUonius. '•' Do you know ApoUonius? " queries the captain, and xA-poUonius replies, '' Ja, ich kenn im so wol alsmich selber." Whereupon the king says, "Yesterday he was like me, to-day he is a lord of the earth; before this he has been my son, now I am less than he." The rest of the story follows closely the outlines of the Historia. Ain Hilbsche Hystori von dem Kimig Appolonius [with woodcuts], Augspurg, 1552 ; Hans Zimmerman. This is a reprint with slight changes of the edition of 1471. The woodcuts are curious : on the title page is a picture of Alexander the Great, and the other illustra- tions represent the king issuing from his daughter's chamber ; the king stating the riddle to the princely suitors ; ApoUonius setting forth on his voyage homeward from Antioch; the return of Taliarchus from an unsuccessful journey, and reporting to the king the flight of ApoUonius ; the landing of ApoUonius in Tarsus ; his boats laden with bags of corn ; relieving the famine ; shipwreck ; fisher- man receiving ApoUonius ; ApoUonius in the bath at Pentapolis ; at table with Archistrates and his daughter; the king's daughter playing on the harp ; the love-sick daughter visited by her father ; the king joining the hands of the lovers ; the burning of Antiochus and his daughter ; the casting overboard of the chest ; Cerimon finding the chest ; Stranguillio and Dionysia with the infant Tharsia ; death of Ligorides ; Philomancia and Tharsia in school ; pirates escaping with Tharsia ; Tharsia sold to the Gemein Frawen- hausz ; arrival of ApoUonius ; interview of Athenagoras and Thar- sia ; ApoUonius, Tharsia and her husband sail for Ephesus ; Apol- lonius recognizes '' Cleopatra," his wife ; journey in state to An- tioch ; rewarding the fisherman. The whole eventful history ends with this rustic clapping of hands and sequent prayer : " Damit sag ich Lob, Panck und Eer Alpha und ort widerkeer Pillich wann er hat gegeben Appolonius strenges Leben Klar zu Teutschem ausz Latein Etlicher alten Hystoryen. Mit namen liesz ich nicht verderben Doctor Gotfrides von Viterben 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 231 Obersters Cronickschreyben Mit dem die Kirch auch wil beleyben Jesus Christ Helff uns Gnad erwerben Nit lasz uns in den Sinden sterben Ewig das wir sind behalten Mit alien Rainen Jungen Alten." Hie endet sich die Hystory des Kiinigs Appolonius. Getruckt und Vollendt in diser Kayserlichen uund Loblichen Stat Augspurg. Durch Hausen Zimmerman, Anno MDLII. Scandinavian Versions. Eine sch'one ufide kortwylige Hisioria vam Konige Appollonio wa he van Landt icnde LUden vordreve7i unde vorjaget .... unde dock tho)n lesten wedder in syn Lundt gekamen ys. Hamborch, 1601, octavo. This version by Herman Moller, which follows the Augs- burg of 1552, corresponds to the Danish folkbook entitled, E7i dejlik og skj'on Historie om Kong Apollonio i hvilken Lykkens Hjul og Verdens Ustadighed beskrives ; lystig og fornojelig at Icese og hore. Kjobenhavn, udi dette Aar, 1627. (The beautiful and charming history of King ApoUonius, in which the wheel of fortune and the mutability of life are described ; jolly and novel to read and hear.) A copy of this scarce book is in the Karen Brahes Library in Odensee (Finland). Another edition is dated 1731 (see Grundtvig, Otn Nordensgamle Literati^-, Copenhagen, 1867, p. 5. It is also quoted in Rasmus Nyerup, Ahnindelig Morskabslcesningy Copenhagen, 1816, p. 168, 169. Cf. Haupt, Opuscula, iii, 29). The same version (corresponding to the Gesia Romanoriun and containing two riddles — unda and navis) was printed at Copen- hagen, 1660, and a translation of it (Icelandic) is *' Additional MS. 4857 " in the British Museum. The title, identical in meaning^ with the Danish, is '' Ein Agiset og fogur Historia wmm Kong ApoUonius i huorre luckunnar og veralldarin nar ostodugleike skrifast miog nitsamleg ad heira og lesa Prented i Kaupmannahafn, af Christen Jenssyne Wering Acad, og Bokpryckiara, anno 1660, Sagann af ApoUonius Konunge til Tyro," January 7, 1670. " Additional MS." 4864 (British Museum) is a modified version of the former. The ApoUonius is also to be found in Rafn's translation of the Didrig saga, Nordiske Fortids Sagger efter den udgivne islandske 232 SMYTH — PEEICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, €lse7' gamle nordiske Grundskrift, oversatte of C. G. Rafn, P. D. Tredie Bind, Kjobenhavn, 1830. The Apollonius is found on pages 3, 231-238, 242-247, 252-254, 257. The Swedish version bears the title '■^ Apollonii Konungens af Tyro Historia uti hwilken Lyckornes Hjul, och themta IVerldenes Ostadighet beskrifwes : Med Lustiga Fragor och Gator beprydd och Nu efter Mangas astundan pa nytt fdrfiirdigat utgifwen af Andrea Johan Arosiandro Tryckf,''' {The History 0/ King Apollonius of Tyre, in which fortune's wheel and the world's unsteadiness are described, with merry questions and riddles, and now after many- requests, revised and published anew). It was issued in 1732, and again in 1747. The last three pages of the 1747 edition of this little book are taken up with a tavern song, '' En wisa som lampas kan til Historien om en man som sin Hustru bortsalde til Rofware, och huru hon blifwit fralst ifran doden " (A song which may be applied to the history of a man who sold his wife to a robber, and how she was rescued from death). The edition 1747^ is not recorded in Backstrom, whose Index records editions of 1642, 1732 and 1835. The Swedish version is derived from the Gesta Romanorum (see parallelisms in Singer, pp. 130-132). There are also points of resemblance with Steinhowel which induced Haupt to believe that the Danish and Swedish books were both indebted to that text, particularly as the '* wheel of fortune " plays so important a part in Steinhowel. Danish Ballad. In 1880, Rudolph Klein's Kort Udsigt over det philologisk- historiske Samfunds Virksomhed, 1 878-1 880 (Copenhagen), con- tained a brief of a paper presented by Kr. Nyrop upon " De Historia Apollonii regis Tyri," in which a singular ballad of the thirteenth century relating to the shipwreck of Apollonius was described. The ballad had been referred to by Haupt {Opuscula, iii, 29), a fact of which Nyrop appeared to be ignorant, and it was published in Svend Grundtvig, Danmarks ganile Folkeviser^ ii, 88. The ballad is limited to a single episode, the shipwreck of Apol- lonius. Nyrop compared it with the Chanson of Jourdain de Blaivies. As the ship sinks, Apollonius, according to the ballad, is 1 I am indebted for my examination of this book at the University of Lund to my friend, Prof. Hjelmerus. 1898.] SMYTH — PEKICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 233 thrown upon a rock, but retains his lyre upon which he plays. Some fishermen, attracted by the sound, draw near. They say : '^ We have fished here eighteen years, and lived in darkness and light ', now is come hither a sea-demon (a haffuetrold) who will spoil our fishing." Apollonius says : " I am no sea-demon ; I am a poor shipwrecked man ; may God bring me safe to land." ''Are you a Christian ?" ask the fishers, *' and can you pray to Jesus, the Son of Mary, who died for us all?" He raises his right hand, makes the sign of the cross and cries : " Help me now, Jesus, the Son of Mary, who died to save me." In the old French poem the shipwrecked Jourdain has no lyre whereon to play, but he wails so loud that the fishers hear him. The poem proceeds : Si com Jordains se gaimentoit ainsiz, Garde par mer, voit un home venir En un batel qui moult estoit petis, Et quiert poissons, c'est li ars, dont il vit ; Et li peschierres tout droit a lui s'en vint, Et li demande : " Va, quel chose iez tu ci ? Se iez fantosmes, de deu te contredi, Que de parler n'aiez vers moi loisir." Et dist Jordains : " Se dex m'ait, nenil ; Ainz sui uns anfes d'autre terre chaitis. Parmi la mer m'en venoie un juesdi A grant compaingne de chevaliers gentiz ; Mais Sarrazin nouz orent assaillis, Vos gens ocistrent et s'en remest des vis," etc. (Jourdain de Blaivies, ed. Hofmann, p. 142, lines 1296- 1 309). The resemblance here is more than accidental. The circum- stance is found in neither the Latin Historia nor any of the other versions. Riese reads, '' Et prosternens se illius ad pedes effusis lacrimis ait ' miserere mei, quicumque es, succurre naufrago et egeno, non humilibus natalibus genito ! Et ut scias, cui miserearis, ego sum Tyrius Apollonius,' " etc. Nyrop's conclusion was that in Denmark as in France there had been two diverse redactions, and that the Danish folks-book, a translation, as has been said, of the Augsburg folks-book, had no connection whatever with Jourdain de Blaivies. 234 SMYTH — PERICLE3 AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, Dutch Versions. The story of Apollonius entered the Netherlands through the Gesta Romanorum, of the Dutch translation of which — Die Gesten of gheschienissen van Ro7tien — there are three editions — Gouda, 1 48 1, Delft, 1483, and ZwoUe, 1484 (cf. Campbell, Annales de la Typographie Neerlandaise an XVe Steele, 226, 227). The first popular version of the story apart from the Gesta, but derived from it, appeared in Delft in 1493, entitled Die schoone ende die Suuerlicke historie van Appollonius van Thyro. The book is excessively rare ; only two copies, I believe, are known to exist — one is in the Bibliotheque National of Paris,^ the other is in the library of the Zeeland Society of Sciences at Middelburg (Zeeuwsch Genootschap der Wetenschappen).^ The directors of the Society permitted Dr. Georg Penon to borrow the little book (boekje) and to copy it. His account of it is in his Bijdj-agen tot de Geschiedenis der Nederlandsche Letterkunde, Groningen, 1880, pp. 109-113, and the book itself is reprinted in the same work (123-182). Penon fol- lows the original almost literally and indicates in footnotes the pas- sages in which it differs from the Gesta,^ and occasionally appends the reading of the Latin Historia, in Riese's edition. The resemblance of the folks-book to the Gesta is so marked that Penon believes the former to have been a version made by a bookseller who was impressed with the story as he found it in the Gesta and who believed that it would make a popular book if printed independently. Penon comments indignantly upon Grasse's "guess" that the Netherland book was a translation from the German of Steinhowel. " Woher das hollandische Volksbuch ist, ob aus dem Deutschen, was am Wahrscheinlichsten ist, oder unmittelbar aus dem Lateinischen, ist noch nicht entschieden," says Grasse {Lehrbuch, ii, 3, 458), to which Penon replies, ^^Is nog niet beslist ! Hoe komt de man bij zoo'n praatje? Wie zou beslis- 1 The book was formerly in the library of the Hague, but was taken to Paris in 181 1 (cf. Campbell, Annales, '^. 267). 2 The book is described by Campbell, Annales, No. 965, Hain Repertoriiim Bibliographicii7n, 1303, and by Grasse and Brunet, but it was never seen by the two latter. Even the learned librarian at the Hague (L, Ph. C. van den Bergh) says in his Nederlandsche Volksi-ofuans, p. 158, that this book is known to him only by name — "alleen bij naam kent." 2 The copy of the Gesta used by Penon for comparison was the edition of Johannes de Westfalia, 1484. 1898.1 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 235 sen ? Gewis alleen hij, die het Nederlandsche Volksboek gelezen had. En Grasse heeft het boek gewis nooit gezien."^ Following Grasse's venturesome conjecture, the Dutch writer, A. Winkler Prins {Geilhistreerde Encyclopcedie, ii, 91), declares the folks-book to have been made after the German model: ''de Nederlandsche overzetting vermoedelijk naar eene Duitsche." The adventures of Apollonius were dramatized in Holland and published in 1634, under the title, ^^Twee Tragi-coinedien in prosa, d^ Eene vanAppoIlonius, Prince vaft Tyro, Ende d^ ander van de?i sel- ven, ende va7i Tharsia syn Dochter. Wesende niet alleen lustigh ende vertnakelijck om lesen : maer oock vorderlijch oin weten, hoe men hem in voorspoet ende ieghenspoet behcort te draghen. Nu van nieus oversien ende verbetert door P. B. C. ins ' Graven- hage, Ghedruckt by A erf Meuris, Boeck-verkooper ivoonende inde Papestraet, in den Bijbel, Anno 16J4.'* The first part has eighty-four pages, the second part eighty pages without separate title"^ and with continuous pagination. It is possible that the work was printed before 1634 and that the words ''nu van nieus oversien ende verbetert" refer to the prior publication. An imprint of 161 7 (The Hague) is men- tioned in the Biographisch Woordenboek of Huberts, Elberts and van den Branden, p. 48, but I know nothing of the existence of the book. The Twee Tragi- comedien was written by Pieter Bor Christiaensz. In the Preface, addressed to his nephew, "the respectable, pious, and intelligent " ["den Eersamen, Vromen, ende verstandighen "] " Pietor Bor Jansz., Secretaris van den Gherechte der Stadt Utrecht," the author tells how he came to write the play; he had read, he says, in " seker oudt versuft Boeck." The book was most likely the Gesta and not the folks-book of 1493. Dr. Penon dis- covered that in the play Apollonius sells his wheat to the people of Tarsus for acht pennifigen a bushel, which corresponds to the Gesta^s acht placken, but not to the folks-book's vier hellinks. Moreover, in the play, as in the Gesta, Lucina gives to Apollonius a present of ten maidens (" tien Meyskens "), of which gift there is no reference in the folks-book. 1 Penon, Bijdrageu, p. 112, 2 Penon observes that the Catalogue of the Library of the Society of Nether- land Literature at Leiden (^Catalogus der Bibliotheekvan de Maatschappij der Nederlandsche Letterkunde te Leiden, Derde Gedeelte, Nederlandsch Tooneel [stage]), 1877, ?• xxvii, cites this work under two titles. 236 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, The dramatist evidently found himself embarrassed by the variety of adventure in his story, and, while it is unlikely that he was fam- iliar with Shakespeare's Pericles, he resorts to the introduction of characters who are strangers to the plot but who by their con- versation account for the many incidents for which the action of the drama has no room or time — an expedient not unlike the intro- duction of Gower as chorus. Bor lived at the time of the rhetorical guilds and he introduces upon the stage characters after the manner of the rederij'kersperiode, as, for example, Fama, Verdriet en Blys- chap (Chagrin and Gayety), Verneem-al ett Veel-snaps (Eavesdropper and Gossip). Bor's verse is monotonous and drowsy, and, as the Dutch proverb says, ^*^hangs together like dry sand." There is yet another drama in the literature of Holland — Appol- lonms, Koningh van Tyrus, Treuer-spel {h.ms\.QTd2iva, Jacob Vinckel, 1662) — which has the name but not the story of our ApoUo- nius. It is the performance of the cruelties of a mad king, and while in the dramatis perso7t(B we find the familiar names ApoUo- nius, Licoris, Stragulio, Archistratus, and Antiochus, yet the char- acters are changed, and Antiochus is a mild and benevolent king of Syria, and Apollonius is a murdering madman. The work is dedicated to a woman well known in the history of Netherland literature, Anna van Hoorn (wife of Cornelis van Vlooswyck), and the dedicator declares that the play is none of his invention, but the work of another hand, left in his care by the real author, who had departed on a journey. D. Lingelbach, who writes the dedi- cation or inscription (Opdracht), concludes, ''Ontfangh dan, Hooghwaerde Vrouwe, 't geen ick UE opdrage : niet als eygen, maer als een werck dat vry hooger draeft " ('* receive, estimable lady, this work, which I dedicate to you, not as mine, but as a work which /r(?/i- much higher^'). The dedication is dated '^Am- sterdam, den 4 van Grasmaent [April 4J, Anno 1662." Maugre this denial of authorship the work is nevertheless ascribed to Ling- elbach by Grasse {Tresor, i, 166), Schroder {Grise/dis, Ixxix), and in the Catalogue of the Library of the Maatschappij der Neder. Let- terkunde te Leiden (iii, No. 432). Still another Dutch version is De Wonderlyke Gevallen van Apol- lonius van Tyr, T' Amsterdam, by Isaac Trojel, Boeckverkoper op 't Rokkin, in M. Antonius (/. c., ''at the sign of Marcus Anto- nius "), 1 710. The little work is dedicated to Jan Munter Cornelis, " Geheimschryver van de vermaerde Koopstad Amsterdam " (clerk 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 237 of the celebrated commercial city Amsterdam). Trojel says in his dedication that he has sought to be brief in the narrative of adven- tures, not diffuse (wytlopig), and that he has translated the story from the Latin Historia, and mentions Velser's edition. Penon's attention, after the publication of his work, was called to this rare book by Mr. A. van Wessem, of Tiel (a judge of that city), a pos- sessor of a copy. Hungarian Versions. An Hungarian version of the sixteenth century I have seen at the British Museum, but as my attainments in Magyar are of the same extent as De Quincey's in the Malay, I am unable to establish the history of it. I quote the title: "Szepj'eles Historia egy Apollonius nevu Kiraly Fiurol^ Mikeppen o egy Mefhiek, meg. fejtefe miatt el-bujdosvan a tengeren valo hajo kazasban minden javait el-vesz tette, es halasz ruhaban Altistrates Kiral ynak udvaraba jutott : Annak utanna sok viszontagsaginak vegen, a szerencsenek jobb szarnyara fel vetetvin, Kiraly allapottyahoz illo csendesseggel megkoronaztatott. Most ujjobban ki-nyomtattatott es rendes rhyth- musokkal meg-ekesitetett. Budan. Nyomtat. Katalin Landererne Betuivel."^ On the reverse of the title is, "Adagio Virorum Sapi- entium. In via virtute nulla est via; tamen itur per aspera ad pros- pera; post nubila phoebus." A copy in the Hungarian National Museum in Buda-Pesth is said, in the last stanza of the work, to have been written in 1588. The copy lacks a title-page. It is bound up with another book, and written in the volume are the words '* Irta Bogati F. Miklos nyom. Kolozsvar, 1591," that is, written by M. F. Bogati, printed at Kolozsvar, 1591. Miklos Fazekas Bogathi was a Unitarian preacher who died 1592 (Singer gives from Simonyi an account of his life and writings). A second Miklos (Nicholas) Bogathi, some- times confounded with the first, died in 1603. It is not certain that the work in question was written by Bogathi ; only it is bound ^A beautiful and excellent history of Apollonius, a king's son ; how he, after solving a riddle, wandered away ; how in sailing about on the ocean he lost all his possessions, and in sailor's clothes arrived at the court of King Altistrates, At the end of his many adventures, having been taken up on a better wing of for- tune, he was crowned with a silence befitting his stale as a king. Now, again, reprinted and embellished with regular rhyme, in Buda. Printed with Catalme Landerer's types. 238 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, with a book which is certainly by him, entitled : ''Ez vilagi nagy soc ziir zavarrol valo Enek " (a song of the great tangle of the world). The title of the book, according to Szabo Karoly, is Szep Chron- ica mikeppen az Apolionius nevo Kirdlyfi egy Mesenec meg feytese- vegett ellmjdosiidn^ Az Tengeren mtftdeneket eluesztuen Halasz ruh- aban Altisirates Kiraly udvardban juta^ melynec Leanya a szep Lu- cina aszszony az Kiraly fit meg szeretuen hozza mene. JSs jnikeppen az Apollo7iius az Kiraly sdgra haza menuen, az Tengeren Feleseget £S Lednydt el veszte es mikeppen oket soc eszledo mulua nagy orommel egessegben taldld. Most vyionnan, az Lucretia notaydra Magyar njelvre forditatot, es meg nyo7ntattatot, Colosvdrat azohvdrban 1591, Esztendoben (A pretty story concerning Prince Apolionius who having solved a riddle was forced to wander. Having lost every- thing at sea, he arrived in fisher's garb at the court of King Altis- trates, whose daughter, the beautiful Lucina, fell in love with him and married him ; and how Apolionius returning home across the ocean lost his wife and daughter, and how, after many years, he found them again in good health. Now again, after the aria of Lu- cretia, translated into Hungarian, and printed in the year 159 1). There are other publications of the story in 1722, 1741, 1751 ; five editions of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries without hint of place or date, but all probably printed at Buda-Pesth. The 1 75 1 copy has for title, '' Igen szep chronica Apolionius nevii Kiraly firol, mikeppen egy mesenek meg-fejteseert elbujdosvan az tengeren mindeneket el vesztven. Halasz ruhaban Altistratus Kiraly Udvar- abanjuta Nota: sokeros vitezek, bolksek." Esler Marton, 1 75 1 (A beautiful story of a Prince Apolionius who having solved a riddle wanders abroad ; having lost all upon the sea, he ar- rives, clad as a fisher, at the court of King Altistrates Song : Many strong knights, wise ones, etc. Esler Martin, 1751). The poem consists of 202 stanzas of nine lines each, of which the third, sixth and ninth lines rhyme, and the others are without rhyme. The source of the story is the Gesta Romanorufu. Italian Versions. A MS. of the middle of the fourteenth century is preserved in the Biblioteca Nazionale of Turin. The story occupies the entire Codex N.V. 6 (Pasini, cci. 1. i. 97). It consists of twenty-eight leaves 189S.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 239 and is well written in Gothic characters. Thirty-five minia- tures illustrate the MS. The work has been printed (at Bel- linzona) in a limited edition (loo copies), edited by Carlo Salvioni {La Storia di Apollonio di Tiro, Versions Tosco- Ven- eziana, della met a del Sec. xiv edita da Carlo Salvioni). The editor detects the presence in the MS. of the hand of a second scribe whose work of correction follows close upon the labor of the original amanuensis. The second writer was probably a Veronese and his changes give to the text a more Tuscan aspect.^ Salvioni, with the aid of Prof. Count Carlo Cipolla, has succeeded in repro- ducing the original text. The oldest Italian edition is La Storia di Apollonio di Tiro in ottava ri?na,'Vt\\tz, i486; reprinted in 1489, 1490, 1492, 1520, 1535? i555» 1560, 1598, 1610, 1629, 1679 and 1709. The edi- tion of 1492 is entitled '■^ Historia di Apolonio di Tiro reforniata per Paulo de Taegia in f anno I4g2 nel mese settemdre a contem- plazione della magnifica Madona S. da Ferrara e poi per placer del popolo,^^ Milafi, I4Q2 (cf. Paitoni, Bibl. degli Volgarizz, i, 79; and Leone del Prete : Storia di ApolL, etc., Lucca, 1861). An edition said to have been made in Florence in 1580 is adorned with wood cuts. It contains six cantos and thirty-two pages. It is devout, each canto beginning with an invocation to Jesus Christ, the Father of Mercies. It is entitled Historia d^ Apollonio de Tiro nuovamento Ristampota. It ends with " Mi fu recato in questa lingua prima perche ciascum si bella storia intenda et io k voi ve I'ho contato in rima perche diletto ciasche dun ne prenda signer c'havete dal pie alta cima da me udita la bella leggenda io prego Dio, che a tutti sia in acoto Al vostro honor questo libro e finito." Spanish Versions. In the library of the Escurial there is a Spanish MS. (iii, k, 4to) containing three compositions: (i) *' Libro de Apo- lonio," (2) *' Vida de Santa Maria Egipciaqua," (3) ''Adoracion 1 Notice oio for olio (oil), and perdti for perso (lost), alto for olto (high) and tieni for tienis (hold). PROC. AMER. PHILOS, SOC. XXXVII. 158. P. PRINTED DEC. 15, 1898. 240 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, de los Reyes. "^ It is a quarto codex, on parchment, and has eighty leaves well and clearly written. It has generally been be- lieved to belong to the thirteenth or fourteenth century, and the nameless author or ''arranger" is believed to have been contempo- rary with the author of the Poema del Cid"^ (1135-1175). The MS. was first published by its discoverer, Pedro Jose Pidal, in 1844. It is in Sanchez's Coleccion de poetas Castellanos anteriores al siglo dechno quinfo, which is a collection found in Biblioteca de Auiores Espatioles desde la formacio7idel lenguaje hasta nuestros dias (tomo quincuagesimosetimo [57] Madrid, 1864.^ The 'Mibre de Apol- lonio " of this publication occupies pp. 283-305, and has a pre- liminary note by Pidal (pp. xxxvi-xli). It is written in stanzas of four verses, all terminating with the same rhyme. The verses contain fourteen syllables and bear evi- dence of Provencal origin. The metre was a novelty'' and was ** properly regarded by the author as his chief distinction," and he implores the divine aid in his new experiment while he essays his six hundred stanzas : ** Componer un romance de mieva nKzstria, Del buen rey Apolonio e de sa cortesia, El rey Apolonio de Tiro natural, Que porlas aventuras visto grant tenporal, Como perdio la fija e la mujer capdal Como las cobro amas, ca les fue muy leyal." " I will write a romance (story) in the new mastery {inethod).'*^ Nueva maesiria no doubt refers to the form of the stanza and to its rhyme. George Ticknor says '' The merit of the poem is small. It contains occasional notices of the manners of the age when it was produced — among the rest, some sketches of a female jongleur^ of the class soon afterwards severely denounced in the laws of Al- fonso the Wise, that are curious and interesting. Its chief attrac- tion, however, is its story, and this, unhappily, is no original" (^History of Spanish Literature^ ist ed., 1849, ^o^- b P- 25). The 1 Or, Libre dels Tres Reyes dorient. ^ According to Fitzmaurice-Kelly, the most recent historian of Spanish litera- ture, the narrator of the ApoUonius story was " probably a native of Aragon " {Spanish Literature , 1898). 3 This is the admirable collection of Spanish classics in 79 vols, by Manuel Rivadeneyra. *F. Wolf, Blatter fUr literarische Unterhaltiing, Jahrgang 1850, zweiter Band, No. 232. 1893.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 241 (emsile JO ng/eur or jug/aresa mentioned in the Apolonio is the primi- tive strolling actress. Alfonso in Las siete Pai'tidas denounces the class as infamous. The Spanish text obviously rests upon the French or Provencal, and in turn inspired a production of the aljamia or Spanish-Arabic literature. T\\q. Maid of Arcayona\it\orig% to i\\Q texios aljamia- dos and is an outgrowth of the Apolonio. ^ The Spanish Apolonio has a perfervid Christian tone. Christian piety and honor have been breathed into the ancient pagan story. It is the voice of an angel that summons Apollonius to Ephesus, where his wife is the abbess of a convent / A later Spanish version is found in the Patramielo of Juan de Timoneda (1576). Timoneda was a book-seller of Valencia, who printed the pasos (dramatic interludes) of Lope de Rueda (cf. De- leitoso Coi7pendiOj 1567, and Registro de Representanies, 1570). He was an early writer of Spanish tales, or rather an arranger (for he had little originality) of previously existing plays and narratives. The very popular picaresque novel, Lazarillo de Tonnes^ had excited a desire for stories of wit, intrigue and adventure, which Timoneda attempted to satisfy with a collection of twenty-two traditional tales {^Patranuelo, or story-teller). His version of the Apollonius he derived from the Gesta Romanorum (cf. Brunet, La France litterai7'e au XVe siecle, p. 12). It only remains to note that the character of Tarsi ana in the early Spanish text appears to be the type of Preciosa, the heroine of Cervantes' Gitanilla, and of Weber's opera.^ Provencal and French Versions. Wilhelm Cloetta, Abfassungund Ueberlieferungdes Poeme Moral, Erlangen, 1884, may be consulted for the bibliography of the Apol- lonius saga among the troubadours. Numerous references also occur in Raynouard, Poesias d. Troubadours, ii, 301. The allusions to the story in the songs of the troubadours, and the frequent Proven- cal words and phrases in the Spanish MS. point to a very early ap- pearance of the story in France (cf. Fauriel, Histoire de la Poesie Proven^ale, iii (1846), 486, 487). ^ Castilian written in the Arabic alphabet was called rt'/^rt/z/zi^ (/.2^scu/a, iii, 27, and B. Schmidt, Griechische Mdrchen Sagen und Volkslieder^ Leipzig, 1877, p. 7, and Th. Griisse, Lehr- buch ei?ier allgemeineJi Lite?'drgeschicJite, ii (1842), 457-460, and K. Goedecke, Grundriss zur Geschichte der deutschefi Dichiung, I (1884), 367)- I have studied an edition of 1778 (^A. too iv rupoj, Frj/idda/EveTc- Tjffiv, 1778) and have come to very different conclusions from those arrived at by previous scholars. Wagner says, '^ The language is very difficult and seems to be the bad jargon of the islands " {Af. G. T., p. xviii). It is evident that Wagner knew very little of the Greek dialects, and this bit of superficial criticism is characteristic of the carelessness and ignorance which prevail in both his books, and yet critics and bibliographers seem blindly to have followed Wagner's lead without undertaking to examine for themselves the language of the text. The work (translation or transcription) was done in Crete, a fact which was unknown to most of the scholars who described the poem, although the place and time are explicitly stated in the body of the text. The language is difficult for any one unfamiliar with the dialect. It is not *' bad jargon ;" on the contrary, the poem is well written, in the Cretan dialect, and it should be remembered that at the time the work was done (1500), Crete was more literary and more classical than Greece itself. Greece had passed under the Turkish yoke : Crete was still Vene- tian. Much difference of opinion has been expressed as to the source of the Cretan version. Prof. Konrad Hofmann thinks it was derived from the Italian (" Von zwei griechischen Bearbei- tungen die wir haben, ist die eine des 13. Jahrhunderts aus einem lateinischen, die andere des 16. aus einem italienischen Texte geflossen," Sitzungsberichte der ph. -ph. u. hist. CI. d. kdn.-bayei'. Akad. d. Wissensch. zu Milnchen, 1871, Ht. 4, S. 416). The con- sensus of opinion, however, favors translation from a Latin text. But Edelestand Dumeril asserted its derivation from the German of Johann (^sic) von Neuenstadt ! — *' la redaction en grec moderne a ete faite d'apres la version Allemande " {^Floire et Blanceflot'y Paris, Jannet, 1856, p. cv). What Dumeril's exquisite reason was, I do not know, but there is less resemblance, if anything, between Gabriel Kontianos and Heinrich v. Neustadt than between Gabriel and Shakespeare. 246 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, The name of the author or transcriber has also set the editors guessing. M. Sathos says that the translation of the poem into Greek was made by Constantinos Temenos, a Cretan (^K(i}v<$Tw^rho iv zupoj ^AnoXXai'^io, etc.; cf. Neo iX?.7]'>ixi) ^doXoyia, p. 230). Wagner puzzles over Sathos for awhile and decides that he does not know the rea- sons for the statement. The reason is to be found in Sathos' ignor- ance. He has mistaken the Cretan word dep-ho (^composed') for a proper name !^ But it is time to consider the text itself. It begins : ^ATtoXXib'^w^ ro> h Tbpoj. '^Frj/idda, d^oij^ iwerirjffi'^, ^77^t Ilapd Ayj/xTjzptw 0£o8u(TC(p T(p i^ '/a>avv:'vwv. Con Licenza de superiori. Inc. p. 3 : Mk du'^av too ^Irjffoo Xptarou, otz' oXot TzpoffxovoufiSy Tia.'jd. poo ScLXTTj du'^a/xr^j Xoyo'j^ xaXo'J vd Tzoops, — Klav iatpaXa xaX rcTZore? a9 £v (Topna^yjpivu, FtarT exapa to xdreya^ xai toy a pa^^vjpjvo, p. 71. The first two pages form an introduction on the part of the author. He invokes the help of Jesus Christ, attributes every event to Providence, justifies his attempt to have put into verse the story /le had read so?fiewhere and excuses himself for any mistakes committed on his part. The story begins on the first line of the third page and goes on to p. 69. The last eight verses of pp. 70, 71 state the Christian name of the author to be Constantine ; his family name is omitted. It is distinctly stated that the poem was concluded at Canea in Crete on the first of January, 1500, the fete day of St. Basilios. This statement, which has been consistently overlooked by the historians, is in the following lines : 'EreXeicDffa r'apyr^'jiaa pk too {j^soo ttjv ydprj, '9 TooTioo?) dspivOj ytd vd pe paxapt^ooffiv d7iiJTri<$ dizod-aivo). Kidv taipaXa xai ti7:ot£<^ a? eV o, yiaT). exapa to xd-Ttya xai Toya pa&rjpi\>o. Finally in regard to the name of the author, Wagner entertains in his second hook {Car mina) ** grave suspicions" that Gabriel Contiani is not the name of the poet, but only of the copyist, in which for once he is right. Some commentators have supposed ^ Numerous scholars, even the latest, S. Singer, have repeated the error. 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 247 Kontiani to be derived from Kofi-qq (Coiite), an Italian title intro- duced by the Venetians who then held Crete, and have believed that the writer therefore belonged to the Western Catholic Church. But this supposition is confuted by Koraes, in his Atacta, Vol. ii, prolegomena, p. 13, where he shows that " Gabriel " clearly points to the Oriental Church. Russian Versions. In Russian literature the story of Apollonius is derived from the Russian translation of the Gesta Romanorum^ which in turn rests upon the Polish rendering of the Gesta. G. Polivka, of all the Russian scholars, has studied the subject most closely. In the Lisiy filologicke^ 1889, 353~35S ^"d 416-435, he demonstrated the rela- tions of the Russian and Polish versions of the Gesta, and discussed the curious Bohemian version of the Apollo7iius. In the Drobne prispevky liter drne historicke (brief literary notes), Prague, 1891, he compared the Gesta Romanorum and the Tichonravov texts, but came to no positive conclusions. Dr. Murko, of Vienna, was of the opinion that the Tichonravov text was only a careful treatment by a Moscow scholar of the White Russian Rimskija Dejanija. In 1892 he contributed to the Archiv fiir Slavische Philologie (14: 405), a careful paper entitled, '^ Die russische Uebersetzung des Apollonius von TJ'r/zi'und der Gesta Romanorum.^ ^ For the Tichonravov text, see Letopisi russkoj literatury (chronology of Russian literature), 1859, and Russkij folol Vestnik (1891, Part ii, p. 314); for the Rimski/a Dejanija, see Obscestvo Ijubitelej drevnej pismennosti (St. Petersburg, No. 117). A selection of stories from the Rimskija Dejanija was made and published at Cracow by Siekielowicz in 1663, and this collection was translated from Polish into Russian ''in the summer of 7199" (that is, of the Byzantine era = 1691 A.D.). The Bohemian folk-book, to a description of which we shall arrive later, is entitled Kro7iyka o Apollonwi Krali Tyrskem, W. Gindrichowe Hradcy, 1733. ^^ was reprinted, Olomanci, 1769, and Praze, 1761. See Dobrowsky, Geschichte d. Rohm. Sprache, p. 303. It is also printed direct from the MSS. by A. J. Vrt'atko, Casopis Musea Ceskeho, 1863. The Story in English. We have now spoken of the story as it appears in Germany, Den- mark, Sweden, Holland, Italy, Spain, France, Hungary, Greece, 248 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLO'NIUS. [Oct. 7, Russia and Bohemia. It remains for us to consider its course in English literature. Most curious is the form it takes in Anglo- Saxon, where it exists as the only romance in that literature. The historian must take notice of eight versions of the story in English literature. 1. The Anglo-Saxon romance (a MS. in C. C. C, Cambridge). 2. An early English metrical translation (Wimborne, Dorset). 3. Gower's Co7ifessio Amantis, 1483. 4. Copland's translation from the French. Pr. by Wynkyn de Worde, 15 10. 5. TwinQ^s Fatierne of Faineful Adventu?'es, 1576. 6. Shakespeare's Pericles, 1609. 7. Geo. Wilkins' Pericles Frince''j)f Tyre, a novel, 1608. 8. Lillo's Marina. The old English or Anglo-Saxon version is believed by Wiilker to belong to the second third of the eleventh century. Ebert pre- fers to date it from the beginning of the century. It exists in a unique MS. in the library of Corpus Christi College, Cambridge. Thus before the Norman conquest brought the chivalry and ro- mance of southern Europe into England, some unknown but not unskillful hand, as if presaging the time when the new ideas of courtliness and chivalry should embody themselves in the romantic forms of the Elizabethan age, had translated this universal favorite. The MS. was first studied by Benjamin Thorpe, F. S. A., who published it with a literal translation in 1834. It is referred to by Wiilker, Grundriss, p. 504; H. Leo, Altsdchsische und Angels dch- sische Sprachproben, 32-34; B. Thorpe, Analecta Anglo-Saxonica, 108 (1846); Miiller Angelsdchsisches Lesebuch, 56-62, and by Zupitza, Anglia, Bd. i, 46^-46'j. The MS. has now been thoroughly edited by Zupitza.^ It is but a fragment. Thorpe fills the lacunse in his translation with quotations from Swan's rendering of the narrative in the Gesta Romanorum. Prof. A. S. Cook, in his First Book in Old English (Ginn & Co., 1894), has also reedited bits of the old text. 1 Zupitza discusses carefully and learnedly the question " Welcher Text liegt der Altenglischen Bearbeitung der Erzahlung von Apollonius von Tyrus zu Grunde?" in RoDianische Forsc/mngen^ Vol. iii, pp. 269-279. The article should be read for the interesting parallelism between the A.-S. and the Latin MSS. of Riese's third class. Zupitza's edition of the A.-S. is in Arckiv filr das Sticdium der netieren Sprachen u. Litteratureny 1896, Vol, xcvii, pp. 17-34; intro, note by A. Napier. 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 249 In 1850 J. O. Halliwell (Halliwell-Phillipps) printed for pri- vate circulation : A new boke about Shakespeare arid Stratford- ypon-Avon. He introduced into it a *' curious and interesting fragment of a very early English metrical translation of the story of Apollonius, King of Tyre." It is copied from a MS. on vellum which had formerly belonged to Dr. Farmer. The MS. had but two leaves and had been converted into the cover of a book, the edges were cut off, and some words were altogether lost in consequence. Steevens had quoted a few lines from it (cf. Ma- lone's Shakespeare, ed. 1821, Vol. xxi, p. 221). '* The author," says Halliwell, "appears to have resided at Wimborne Minster in Dorsetshire," and the MS. would appear from the language to be anterior to the appearance of Gower's Confessio Amantis. The fragment is of considerable philological importance, and as it was printed in a limited edition of seventy-five copies, of which I believe fifty were destroyed/ I have ventured to reprint it here as a singular and interesting fragment of early English literature.^ Sche was fairest of alle, The Kyng .... And on hys knees byfore hire falle He ofTryde and alle that wit him were And afterw .... drery chere ; Of Tire I Ar . . . . , . . . myself there king, 1 Halliwell-Phillipps was provokingly fond of printing his pamphlets and bro- chures in very limited editions. A wag said of him that he only printed two copies of his books — one he burned and the other he put in his private library. 2 1 have normalized the orthography of the MS. only in one particular, sub- stituting for the so-called Anglo-Saxon g symbol (which had in ME. the value of a spirant) its later ME. representatives gh, and y according to the phonetic value of the symbol in each instance ; following in this the orthographic usage of the later ME. MSS., which put gh for the guttural or back spirant, y for the pa- latal, and g for the stop. In Ags. up to the twelfth century only one character was used for the various sounds of g, viz., the Anglo-Saxon g. In ME. the so- called Prankish g (our modern g sign) v*^as introduced to denote the stopped sound as in go, and the French sound of g in rouge ; the Anglo-Saxon letter was re- tained for awhile to denote the spirant sounds of g, but in Chaucer's time it had been dropped and gh or y substituted. 250 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, Appolyn the .... .... wit mine ofryng ; As sone as ... . .... upon my letterure, The .... ing .... hedde .... was ful suyre ; I scholde him . . . . .... thulke cure, Therfore he did .... .... he gaf gret huyre ; To Tarse y- fledde that deth to ... . For hunger the cite was al nought, An hundred milianys they hadde of me Buschelles of whete, as y am by- thought. Tho made they an ymage of bras, A scheef of whete he helde an honde, That to my licknes maad was ; Uppon a buschel they dyde hym stonde ; And wryte about the storye. To Appolyn this hys y-do, To have hym ever in memorye, For he delyverede us fro woo. Tho wente y unto Cirenen ; The kings doughter he me yaf, I ledde here fro here kyn ; Ayeyn we broughte hire nought saf, Ffor sche deyde amydde the see ; And ther sche bare this maide child. That here stant byfore the : Goude goddesse, be to hire myld ! Tho tok y the doughter in Tarse to kepe, To Strangulion and Dame Denyse, Y couthe no ... . reed but ever wepe, Sorwe me t6k in ech wyse. I held me in the see ten and four yeer "Wit sorwe, care and wo; I cam aye and fond hire nought ther, Tho nyst y what was best to do. But, grete goddesse, y thanke the That evere sche deth so asterte. That ever y myyhte that day y-seo, To have this confort at my herte ! The whiles he expounede thus his lyf "Wit sorwe and stedfast thought. He tolde hit to hys awene wyf ; Sche knew him wel, and he hire nought. 18SH.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 251 Heo caught him to hire armes two, For joy sche ne mytjhte spek a word ; The kyng was wroth, and pute her fro, Heo cryede loude, ye beth my lord ! I am youre wyf, youre leof y-core, Archistrate ye lovede so I The kynges doughter y was bore, Archistrates he ne hadde na mo. Heo chpte hym, and efter gan to kysse, And tolde that was byfalle; Sche dipt and keuste with wouten lysse And saide thus byfore hem alle, — Ye seeth Appolyn, the kyng. My maister thot taughte me al my goud. • ••••• .... me out of my grace Archistra .... .... wham the other forsok, And to my lord you ches ; My lord that leide me on cheste, Or y were cast into the see, My lord that ofte me keuste, And never wende me more y-se2, My lord that y have founde, Y thanke God in Trinyte ! " Ure doughter on thys grounde, Ye, dame, par fay, thys hys sche ! .... te he hire, me scholde nought knowe. Ho was gladdest of the threo; .... They wepte alle arowe, That ech of other hadde pite ; Ephese hit was couth. The goddesse had hire lord knowe, .... An may no man telle wit mouth The grete mirthe thot was mad, y trowe ; .... An song and made gleo In gret conf<)rt of here goddesse, .... thes y- streghyt over al thoe cite. An keverede for gret gladnesse : They made a feste of gret plente. And fedde the citesaynes alle at ones. They made of him gret dente. The fest was gret for the nones. They made hym prest of the lawe, Here norry that sche loved mest, .... the maner by har dawe, Wymmen dide thoe offys of prest. 252 SMYTH — PEEICLES AND APOLLOXIUS. [Oct. 7, .... the joye of thoe londe, Sche dighte hire wit here lord to fare, . . . . e cite broughte hem at stronde, For deel of blisse wexeth al bare. .... nte hy to Antioche, Yutt was him kept thoe kyndom, . . . . Yt fro thennys hys passage To his lond Tire he nom ; Made Anategora kyng, Hys doughter quene thoe was his heir, . . . . ne hit was at her likynge, To schip hy wente alle y-fere. To Tarse they wente wit gret navye, Wederynge fel at wille, And all the citesaynes goune crye, Welcome lord, us tille : .... Yt6 anon Strangulion take, And hys wyf, Denyse, also, . . . . ed hem alle for here sake Wit hym to have mothalle goo. .... bet yif he hath trespased ought. Other eny offense ageyn hem do, .... yde alle nay lord ryght nought, Ye beth oure lord forever mo. . . . . ge have to lorde y- core, For evere love you ne mote .... hadde ye be ne hadde before. Of alle bales ye were bote ; An image of brass witnesse hys, Thot we schulle yow nevere disceyve, .... ol let deye for you y-wys Rather thon eny man schal you greve ; .... Angulion, my doughter y tok. And Denyse that hys hys wyf. That the citesaynes wit gret deal Hadde write hit to fore youre eyye : Appolyn gan to calle, Tarse, doughter, wherevere you beo, Sche we the forth by fore us alle, Fro deth to lyf arys aye ! Sche pytte hire forthe in riche atir. As fel to a quene. To fulfille her fader desir ; « Denyse," sche seyth, "hail ye! I grete the out of my grave ^898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLOXIUS. 253 Fro deth to lyve areved ! Wher liys Tiophele ? hym moste y have." He stoud sire aferyd. " Madame, y am her at youre wille ! " He stod as he schulde sterve : " Sche tok me the to spille, Deonyse whom I serve." The citesaynes Strangulion toke, And hys wyf for hire trecherye, Out of the cite drowe wit hoke Into a place ther-inne to dye : They stened him wit stone, And so hy wolde Teophele also ; Tarse bygan him defende sone. To dethe he ne was nought do. And saide, ye yaf me grace To pray God Almyght, I schal him yeve lyves space. Ellys ye ne hadde ne never seye in sight ; Appolyn dwellede ther fourty dayes, And gaf grete giftes to alle men; And thennes sailede to Cirenen : Yut was hys ffader-in-lawe alyve, Archistrates the goud kyng, ffolk come ayeynes him so blyve. As eny myghte by other thryng ; They songe, daunsede, and were blythe. That were hy myhte that day y-seo, And thankede God a thousand sythe ; The king was gladdest, suyr be ye : Tho he saw hem alle byfore, His doughter and hys sone in lawe, And hys doughter so fair y-core, A kinges wyf, he was wel fawe : And her child ther also, Al clene of kings blod; Pie kuste them, he was glad tho ; But the olde king so goud He made hem dwelle al thoe yer. And deyde in hys doughter arm. — Wit gret gladnesse he deyde ther, If God nolde hit was harm. Tho nolde Appolyn nevere fyne Ar he hadde the ffischere sought, That yof him half hys sclaveyne, Tho he was firste to londe y- brought ; 254 ' SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, Knyghtes him fette of gret honour, He was aferde to be slawe, He gaf him londes and gret tresour. And made him erl by al hys sawe : Olde man, ne dred the nought, For I am Apollyn of Tire, That ones help of the bysought, Tho I lay byfore the in the myre ; Thou gave me half thy sclaveyne. And bed me y schulde thenke on the ; Broughte hym dyeinge. Antiochus his deth hadde swore. He was marchaunt of many thynges ; .... the kyng to grete, He tok him up and gan him to kusse ; .... de he wolde him nevere lete, He scholde be on of hem to wysse ; . . . . im bothe lovde and lede. And made him erl a lite ther byside ; . . . . ful of wilde brede, Casteles and tourys that were wyde, He made him chef of hys consail, For he fonde him ferst so .... t fewe : .... as evere wit-oute fail, He ne leet for no newe ; .... the kyng goud lyf and clene Wit hys wyf in gret solas, .... and fourtene He lyvede after Ihys do was ; .... twey sones by junge age, That wax wel farynge men ; .... the kyndom of Antioche, Of Tire and of Cirenen. Were nevere verre on hys lond, Ne hunger ne no mesayse, .... hit yede wel an hond, He lyvede wel at ayse : .... tweye bokys of hys lyf That onto his awene bible he sette. .... at byddinge of hys wyf .... He lefte at Ephese so he hire fette; .... hys lond in goud manere Tho he drow to age, .... ora he made King of Tire, That was his owene heritage ; 1898-] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 255 The eldest sone of that empire He made king of Antiage, .... that he lovede dure, Of Cirenen that was .... When he hadde al thys y-dyght Cam deth and axede hys fee, .... hys soule to God Almyght, So wel God that hit bee ; . . . . de ech housbonde grace. For to lovye so hys wyf .... y-fed hem witoute trespace, As sche dyde hym al here lyf ; .... ne on alle lyves space, Heere to amende oure mysdede. .... of hevene to have a place, Amen ye synge here, y rede. .... ony thys was translatyd Almost at Engelondes ende. .... to the makers stat, Tak eich an ... . kynde ; .... hove y- take hys bedys on hond. And sayd hys Pater Noster and Crede, .... was vicary, y understonde^ At Wymborne mynstre in that stede ; . . . . y thoughte you have wryte, Hit is nought worth to be knowe, .... thot wole the sothe y-wyte Go Thider and me wol ye schewe ; .... Fader, and Sone, and Holy Gost, To whom y clepide at my begynnynge, .... de he hys of myghtes most, Brynge us alle to a goud endynge : Grannte us voide the payne of helle, O God, Lorde, and persones threo, And in the blysse of hevene dwelle ! Amen, pour charit6 ! 3. We next find Gower telling the story, to the pious disgust of Chaucer, in the Confessio Amantis, which was finished not later than 1393, and most probably a year or two earlier, and which was first printed by Caxton in 1483. Gower confesses the source of his tale in his opening lines : « Of a cronique in daies gon. The wich is cleped Panteon In loves cause I rede thus How that the great Antiochus," etc. PROC. AMER. PHILOS, SCO. XXXVII. 158. Q. PRINTED DEC, 15, 1898. 256 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, Pudmenzky^ thinks that Gower must also have used some other MSS., and his notion is perhaps borne out by Gower's own words when after a long digression he returns to his subject with : *' But now to my matere agen To telle as olde bokes seyn."^ 4. Kynge Apollyn of Thyre is a prose romance published in 15 10 by Wynkyn de Worde, and translated from the French by Robert Copland. Its French parentage is the MS. in the British Museum (Royal 20, C. ii). It exists in but one MS., in the possession of the Duke of Devonshire, at Chatsworth, and has been repro- duced m facsimile by Edmund William Ashbee, in 1870, only twenty-one copies printed. 5. We come now to the last version that preceded Shakespeare, and to which the latter is in part indebted. In 1576 appeared the novel, ''gathered into English," entitled ^^ The Paiterne of Painefull Adventures : Containing the most excellent, pleasant and variable Historic of the strange accidents that befell unto Prince Apollonius, the Lady Lucina, his wife, and Tharsia, his daughter. Wherein the uncertaintie of this world, and the fickle state of man's life are lively described. Gathered into English by Laurence Twine, Gen- tleman. Imprinted at London by Valentine Simmes for the Widow Newman." There are two Twines in English literature, and we must be careful not to entangle them. Malone, Steevens and Douce attributed the translation to Thomas Twine, "the continuator of Phaer's Virgil." Laurence and Thomas Twine were brothers The former and elder, the one of whom we have to speak, is defined for us by Anthony a Wood as '' a fellow of All Souls' College, Bachelor of Civil Law, and an ingenious poet of his time." Of Master Laurence Twine's "ingenious poetry" we have no examples save the songs and riddles of Tharsia. It is noteworthy that a new edi- tion of The Patterne of Painefull Adventures appeared in 1607, one year before Pericles^ by William Shakespeare, was entered in Stationer's Hall. It is reprinted in Shakespeare* s Library, Vol. iv, PP- 253-334. ^ Shakespeare^ s Pericles und der Apol. d. Heinrich von Neustadt^ Detmold, 1884, p. 4. 2 Gower's version of the Apollonius is to be found in Shakespeare'' s Library, Vol. iv, pp. 181-228, printed from two MSS. in the British Museum (Harl, 3940 and 3869). 189S.] SMYTH— PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 257 The line of succession does not cease with Shakespeare. We have still to name Pericles, Prince of Tyre, a novel by George Wilkins, printed in 1608, and having curious relations to the Shakespearean play. It was reprinted by Tycho Mommsen, under the title, ''Pericles, Prince of Tyre. A Novel by George Wilkins, printed in 1608, and founded upon Shakespeare's Play. Edited by Professor Tycho Mommsen. With a Preface by J. Payne Collier, Esq. Oldenburg, 1857." Shakespeare's plays were often founded upon novels, notably upon those of Cinthio and Bandello ; this is the first instance of a novel being founded upon a Shakespearian play. Collier told Mommsen that there was only one copy of Wilkins* novel in England. He cited the title-page as follows : ''The Pain- ful Adventures of Pericles, Prijice of Tyre. Being the true history of the play of Pericles as it was lately presented by the worthy and ancient poet, John Gower, at London. Printed by T. P. [avier?] for Nat. Butter,^ 1608." It is in quarto and consists of forty leaves. In the centre of the title-page is a wood-cut of John Gower, at- tired in a theatre cloak, with a staff in one hand and a bunch of bays in the other; before him, upon a desk, lies a copy of Co?tfessio Amaniis. In " The Argument of the whole Historic," with which the book begins, the reader is entreated ''to receive this Historie in the same maner as it was under the habite of ancient Gower, the famous English Poet, by the King's Maiesties Players excellently presented." Another copy was found in Zurich, which had belonged to the Swiss poet, Martin Usteri (i 741-1827), a minor writer who had composed some lines in the style of Herrick : " Freut euch des Lebens Weil noch das Lampclien glflht, Pfliicket die Rosen Eh sie verbliiht." It was this copy that Prof. Mommsen reprinted. The contents of the novel we will consider when we discuss the stability of the saga. Other late reappearances of the story are in Davenport, who uses the brothel scene, and in the Dutch play, Alexander and Lodwick, Amsterdam, 1618, supposed to be an adaptation of a 1 It was for Nathaniel Butter that the first and second quartos of King Lear (1608) were printed. THE Painfull Aduentures oCTericIes Prince of Tyre. The trucHiRory of the Play o( Pericles, as it wa J lately prcfcmed by the worthy and an- cient Poet hhn Cower. At Lo nd on TrinteSj J.?, for K&tiButtcr, I 6 O t^ 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 259 lost play by Martin Slaughter, that was performed for Henslowe in 1597-8. We have also hints of it in Randolph's Oratio Prevari- catoria, 1632, and Hey for Honesty (1636?). It is curious in the last-named work to notice that Randolph slaps Shakespeare for his ''greed," to use a harsh word that became agreeable to the tongue of R. G. White after he had lost his early enthusiasm for Shakespeare, and when he was editing the Riverside edition. George Lillo has a play entitled Marina, dedicated *'to the Right Honourable the Countess of Hertford." The '' Prologue " distinguishes between Shakespeare's part in Pericles and that of an inferior hand, and thus ''strove to wake, by Shakespeare's ner- vous lays, the manly genius of Eliza's days." Prologue. Hard is the task, in this discerning age, To find new subjects that will bear the stage ; And bold our bards, their low harsh strains to bring "Where Avon's swan has long been heard to sing ; Blest parent of our scene ! whose matchless wit, Tho' yearly reap'd, is our best harvest yet. Well may that genius every heart command. Who drew all nature with her own sti-ong hand ; As various, as harmonious, fair and great, With the same vigour and immortal heat. As thro' each element and form she shines : We view heav'ns hand-maid in her Shakespeare's lines. Though some mean scenes, injurious to his fame, Have long usurp'd the honour of his name ; To glean and clear from chaff his least remains. Is just to him, and richly worth our pains. We dare not charge the whole unequal play Of f^ericles on him ; yet let us say, As gold though mix'd with baser matter shines, So do his bright inimitable lines Throughout those rude wild scenes distinguish'd stand. And shew he touch'd them with no sparing hand. With humor mix'd in your fore-fathers way, We've to a single tale reduc'd our play. Charming Marhia's wrongs begin the scene; Pericles finding her with his lost queen. Concludes the pleasing task, Shou'd as the soul. The fire of Shakespeare animate the whole, Shou'd heights, which none but he cou'd reach, appear, To little errors do not prove severe. 260 ' SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, If, when in pain for the event, surprise And sympathetic joy shou'd fill your eyes ; Do not repine that so you crown an art, Which gives such sweet emotions to the heart : "Whose pleasures, so exalted in their kind. Do, as they charm the sense, improve the mind." In Lillo's play the story is told in three acts. Naturally several of the dra7natis persQ7i(B of the first act disappear ; King Antiochus and his daughter, King Simonides, Lychorida, the nurse of Marina, and Cerimon and Philemon are not to be found. Escanes alone attends upon Pericles. In place of Cleon and Dionysa, Philoten appears as Queen of Tharsus ; Shakespeare's Valdes is refashioned as chief of the pirates ; Lysimachus appears as governor of Ephe- sus, and the scene is transferred from Mitylene to Ephesus. Lillo begins with Shakespeare's fourth act, in which Marina first appears. The reader is referred for an analysis of the plot of Marina to- Shakespeare' s ^^ Pericles " tind George Lillo^s ^^ Marina " von Dr. Paul von Hofmann-Wellenhof, Wien, 1885, pp. 13-21. Shakespeare's ''Pericles Prince of Tyre." The first mention of Shakespeare's Pericles is in the Stationers* Register^ under date of May 20, 1608 : '' Edward Blount entred for his copie under thandes of Sir George Buck Knight and Master Warden Seton a booke called The booke of Pericles prince\of Tyre' ^ (Arber's Transcript, iii, 378). It appears to have been produced in 1607 or 1608. In Pimlyco or Ru7ine Redcap, the extant copies dating from 1609, but originally pro- duced, according to Warton, in 1596, occurs the following refer- ence to Pericles : << Amazde I stood, to see a crowd Of Civill Throats stretched out so loud ; (As at a new-play^ all the Roomes Did swarme with Gentiles mix'd with Groomes, So that I truly thought all these Came to see Shore or Per ides. '''' F. G. Fleay is inclined to think that the play was performed earlier than 1607. He fancies a resemblance between Act iii, Scene ii, oi Pericles (the restoration to life of Thaisa) and a scene of sham restoration in The Puritan, a play acted in 1606. It is quite probable, however, that the likeness is accidental. The pop- 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 261 ularity of the play is apparently attested by Robert Tailor in The Hogge hath lost his Pearle (yfyf ) : '* If it prove so happy as to please Weele say 'tis fortunate like Pericles ^ Richard Brathwaite, in his Strappado for the Diuell (1615), mentions ''valiant Boults," who might therefore be a popular stage character. The story itself was declaimed against by the judicious. Chaucer assumed indignation at the publication of the story by Gower, and denounced Apollonius as ''so horrible a tale for to rede." Owen Feltham, in Lusoria (1661), has the line : " displease as deep as Pericles.''^ And in like spirit Ben Jonson in his ode, Co?ne Leave the Lothed Stage {\^y), complains of "Some mouldy tale like Pericles.''' Neither is the contemporary allusion to the success of the play all of one mind. Jo : Tatham, in verses prefixed to R. Brome'sybz//^// Crew (1652), says: " There is a Faction (Friend) in Town, that cries, Down with the Dagon-Poet, "Johnson dies. Beaumont and Fletcher (they say) perhaps, might Passe (well) for current Coin, in a dark night : But Shakespeare the Plebeian Driller, was Founder'd in 's Pericles, and must not pass. And so, at all men flie, that have but been Thought worthy of applause." On the other hand, Dryden (in 1672), in his Prologue to The Conquest of Granada by the Spaniards, speaking of the early plays as notable for " some ridiculous incoherent story, which, in one play, many times took up the business of an age," supposes he "need not name Pericles, Prince of Tyre nor the historical plays of Shakespeare." In June, 1631, the play was performed on a special occasion, and the receipts, ;£'3.io, taken at the Globe, were paid to Sir Henry Herbert, Master of the Revels, "for a gratuity for the liberty gain'd unto them of playinge, upon the cessation of the plague.'^ Halliwell-Phillipps printed " a copy of a letter of News, written to Sir Dudley Carleton, at the Hague, May 24, 1619, containing a curious account of the Performance of the Drama of Pericles at the English Court. Printed anno domini 1865." [This performance of the play at court probably led to the publication of the fourth 262 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, edition of the play in that year.] In this little book, of which only twenty-five copies were printed and fifteen destroyed by Halliwell in his usual provoking fashion, we read: ''In the Kinges greate chamber they went to see the play of Pirracles, Prince of Tyre, which lasted till two o'clock. After two actes the playeres ceased till the French all refreshed them with sweetmeates brought on chynay voiders, and wyne and ale in bottelles. After the players begann anewe" (p. ii). In recent times Pericles has rarely been acted. Alfred Meiss- ner for a long time proclaimed that Pericles was the equal of Winter'' s Tale in its histrionic possibilities. His wish to see the play embodied in the German repertoire was finally realized. Possart produced it in Munich, October 20, 1882, and the magnificence of the acting and the stage appointments Meissner described with lively enthusiasm in the eighteenth volume of the Shakespeare Jahrbuch} The resuscitation scene and the storm scene seem to have impressed the audience greatly, and from the third act the spectators were irresistibly carried away. Pericles was several times published in quarto before it appeared in a folio edition. The first and second quartos appeared in 1609, the third in 161 1, the fourth in 16 19, the fifth in 1630 and the sixth in 1635. The play is not in the first or second folios, but is printed in the third folio (1664). That it was popularly ascribed to Shakespeare, however, there is sufficient evidence ; as in Shep- pard's The times displayed in six sestyads (1646) : " With Sophocles we may Compare great Shakespear Aristophanes Never like him, his Fancy could display Witness the Prince of Tyre, his Pericles. There is some doubt as to the priority of the two quartos of 1609. Both are in the British Museum, and both have been reproduced in facsimile by the Griggs process in the series of ''Shakespeare Q^zxlo facsimiles. "" Introductions to the two quartos were written by P. Z. Round of St. Catharine's College, Cambridge, to whom I am indebted for many courtesies in my study of the quartos. The British Museum Catalogue names the C. 34, K. T^d copy the first quarto, and C. 12, H. 5 the second; but the Cambridge editors ^The play was performed to the accompaniment of music. Herman Merivale has also written some charming songs for Pericles. 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 263 reverse the order of the two, and Mr. Round agrees with them (see introduction to Q. 2, p. x). The title-page is the same for all the quartos : ''The Late, | And much admired Play, | Called | Pericles, Prince I of Tyre | with the true Relation of the whole Historic, | Adven- tures, and fortunes of the said Prince : | As also, | The no lesse strange, and worthy accidents, | in the Birth and Life, of his Daugh- ter I Mariana. | As it hath been divers and sundry times acted by I his Maiesties seruants, at the Globe on | the Banck-side | By William Shakespeare | Imprinted at London for Henry Gosson and are j to be sold at the signe of the Sunne in | Pater-noster row &c I 1609." It will be observed that the publishers call Pericles ''a late and much admired play." The only hesitation in believing the play to be of 1608 arises from the allusion in Edward AUeyn's Memoirs to the use of " spangled hose in Pericles ^^' which may refer to an earlier play of the same title. Dryden in the Prologue to Davenant's Circe 1684, excused the blemishes in Pericles on the ground of its being the first heir of Shakespeare's invention : " Shakespeare's own muse her Pericles first bore, The prince of Tyre was elder than the Moored There is a discussion of the date and authorship of the play in the Jahrbuch d. dent. Shak.-Gesellschaft, Vol. iii, in an article by Delius.^ Prior to 1890 the British Museum copy (imperfect) of the third quarto- (161 1) was believed to be unique. A perfect copy owned by Morris Jonas was described in Notes and Queries, August 2, 1890. I have collated this copy with Q. i, and find very few im- 1 A. H. Bullen ( The Atheiiceiun, Sept. 21, 1878) directed attention to an early reference to a passage of Pericles found in Law Tricks a play by John Day : Joculo : But, Madam, do you remember what a multitude of fishes we saw at sea? And I do wonder how they can all live by one another. Emilia : Why, foole, as men do on the land, the great ones eate up the little ones (Sig. B3, recto). Cf. the fisherman's colloquy in Pericles^ ii, I : 3 Fish. : Master, I marvel how the fishes live in the sea. 1 Fish. : Why, as men do a-land, the great ones eat up the little ones. Law Tricks appeared in 1608. 2 The British Museum copy lacks leaves D2 and D3 (27-30) of the facsimile of Qi. 264 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, portant differences. The changes are chiefly in spelling and in punctuation. The fourth quarto (1619) was probably published in consequence of the revival of interest in Pericles owing to the performance of the play at court. No Shakespearian play, save one or two Histories, was so many times printed in quarto. Sir William Davenant's company acted the play between 1660 and 167 1, and, according to Downes, ''Roscius Anglicanus," Pericles was a favorite part with Better- ton. Why did not John Heminge and Henry Condell see fit to include Pericles in the first folio ? The attempt to answer the question opens the whole problem of Shakespeare's part in the authorship of the play. Its first appearance in folio is in 1664, and the editors of that edition seem to have used the quarto of 1635 (this is the opinion of the Cambridge editors). Three theories concerning the authorship of Pericles have received the critical attention of Shakespearian scholars. Accord- ing to the first theory, Shakespeare is the sole author of Pe^-icles but the play combines two periods of his life. In other words, it was taken up, as Staunton believed, soon after its appearance in 1590 and experimented upon by Shakespeare in his youth; then from some inexplicable cause it was cast aside, only to be resumed and completed after a lapse of twenty years. Malone, who ad- vanced this hypothesis, afterwards abandoned it. Charles Knight restated it, but, in defiance of the contemporary accounts of it as a ^' new play " in 1 608, insisted upon its having been acted at the outset of Shakespeare's career. If it had been played so early would Meres have forgotten to mention it when he named Shakespeare's plays in 1598? Prof. Paul Stapfer, the learned author of 6'/;^/C^j;/!' for five books, one of which was a play of Alexander afid Lodwick. Mr. W. C. Hazlitt believes that this lost play was in some degree like the Dutch tragi-comedy. Orendel, the hero of the poem which Berger has edited, is the son of Eigel. The name is found in Franconian and Bavarian from the eighth to the eleventh centuries and appears in its earliest form in Lombardy as Auriwandalus, which corresponds linguisti- cally with Aurvandill or Horvandillus. The name, as Miillenhoff 284 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, points out, indicates a seafarer (Norse Aurr, A.-S. ea)-, moisture — Lat. Aqua). Orendel is the son of Ougel or Oiigel, who must have been the central figure of a sailor myth. Singer supposes the name to be derived from that of one of the rejected suitors of the daugh- ter of Archistrates, called Ardaleo or Ardaleon in the Latin His- toria Apollonii. Singer indulges in some bold speculation in his effort to account for "Orendel, son of Eigel." He remembers that in Vienna Codex 3332 the unsuccessful suitor is called Ardonius, as in Velser and the Gesta, and in the Spanish Libre de Apolonio he is named Aguylon, and Singer supposes that the Spanish may be a mutilated form and may lead back to Artlgilon (of the middle German prose). He then imagines that Ardonius Agilon came to stand to- gether, so that the French version, leaning upon domestic names, and mistaking the second form to be a genitive, converted it into Arondeus fils Aiglon, and the German poem in turn transmuted it into "Orendel, Kiinec Eigels sun." Similarly Singer supposes Jourdain to be a corruption of Ardonius, perhaps by attraction to St. Jordan who in 1236 suffered shipwreck on his way to Palestine. The names of the characters in this world-traveled tale have suf- fered in their journeys strange transformations and bewilderments. ApoUonius becomes Perillie in Bohemian and Pericles in Shake- speare. Timoneda names the murderer Estrangilo (Stranguillio) and gives the real murderer's name to a senator, Teofilo (The- ophilus). Orendel in the poem is shipwrecked on his way to meet his bride, as ApoUonius is in the Danish ballad. Notice the confusion between the daughter of Antiochus and the daughter of Archis- trates. Orendel consults with his father concerning his purpose. ApoUonius consults with his mother (according to the Danish bal- lad), or with his councilor (according to the Bohemian folks-book). The mother and councillor dissuade ApoUonius ; the father en- courages Orendel. The description of the departure of the vessel abounds with lively touches, after the manner of Diimmler's me- trical Latin version. Huge quantities of food are taken on board, enough for eight years, in which there may be a reminiscence of the heavy freighing of the ship on the occasion of the second em- barkation of ApoUonius (to Tharsus) when he takes with him 100,- 000 bushels of corn. A storm drives Orendel into the Klebermer (literally, sticky sea ; 1898.] S:\IYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 285 a traditional sea, possibly the Sargasso), where he is detained three years, until redeemed by divine help. So in Heinrich von Neu- stadt the fleet of Apollonius is driven upon the Lebermer (same as Klebermer) and detained a year, until the heathen gods chance to pass by and free the hero. Orendel has a successful sea-fight with the fleet of the pagan king Pelian von Babilon, which corresponds in Jourdain with the surprise attack by the Saracens upon the sea. Doubtless both inci- dents grew out of the circumstance that in all the versions of the Apollonius story Antiochus equips a fleet that vainly pursues Apol- lonius after his solution of the king's riddle and his subsequent flight. In the old French prose version Antiochus prepares snares for Apollonius even before he comes to Antioch as a suitor, and sends out soldiers to destroy him. Curiously enough in Heinrich von Neustadt Thaliarchus, the major domo of Antiochus, fights with Apollonius, but is conquered in the duel. It is easy to account, also, for the appearance in Orendel of the heathen king Pelian von Askalon, who craves possession of Orendel's bride, and threatens to hang Orendel on a gallows in the castle moat. No doubt this is the same Antiochus who desires to live in shame with his daughter and threatens to kill her suitors and impale their heads upon his castle wall. Orendel is shipwrecked, lies three days in the sand, and then sees a fisherman approaching in a boat. In the Bohemian folks- book Apollonius swims three days and nights upon a log of wood, and on the fourth day he sees a fisherman in a boat. A similar situa- tion is in the French prose romance. In Jourdain the fisher arrives in a boat, as also in the Danish ballad and the Cretan version. The fisher is old but robust — quendam robustum senem (Riese). The fisherman displays fear of Orendel, precisely as in the Danish bal- lad the fishers fear Apollonius (see p. 233). Orendel tells him that he is a shipwrecked fisherman. In some versions Apollonius refuses to tell his name. So in Godfrey, and Steinhovvel, and Shakespeare — "What I have been I have forgot to know." In the French version he says he is a shipwrecked merchant ; in Timoneda he is questioned by a bather, and he says he is a banador from Tyre. Orendel offers himself as a servant to the fisherman. In the Bohemian the fisher says, '' Do you not know that having come out of the sea you are my serf? But God forbid that I should do you 286 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, any harm ! " The fisher takes Orendel into his boat (cf. Pericles, '' Canst thou catch any fishes then? "), who prays God to help him for he cannot fish.^ He casts out his net, just as in the Danish bal- lad Apollonius must fish, and even carry the fish-basket. Among the fish that are caught is one in whose stomach they find a gray coat. Blood stains are observed on it, which makes the fisher say that a slain prince wore it. The coat has the appearance of armour. Orendel entreats the fisher to give him the coat, but he refuses, and instead gives Orendel a pair of shoes and a mantle. The coat is sold to him later at a low price, and the fisher pretends that he has given it to him, and begs him if he shall have good fortune in the world not to forget the fisher who succoured him. He is also given a pair of stockings, but there is no word of a partition of the fisher's mantle.'' In Wilkins' novel Apollonius even gets a blanket for his horse. Orendel remains six weeks with the fisher and then goes to the city, where he is imprisoned, and released by an angel. He comes to Jerusalem and, asking after the meaning of a noise that fills the air, is told that the Knights Templar are tourneying. In the Latin text Apollonius learns from a herald. In Pericles the fishermen have instructed him in advance of a tournament which the suitors have instituted. Orendel meets two pagans who are rivals for the possession of the queen. They are Merzian and Sudan. Merzian lends his horse to Orendel, who overthrows and kills Sudan, whereupon Merzian takes flight. In Jourdain the hero first tries his valor with King Marques, the father of the princess, and then conquers an enemy of the king (Sortin) in serious combat. Marques and Sortin, Mer- zian and Sudan, are evidently identical names, or names of common origin. Singer conjectures that Marques arose from regem Arches- tratem / In the Latin Apollonius, it will be remembered, there is ball play, and gifts by the king, and then the dismissal of three suitors. In Copland there are only two suitors (as in Stein- howel, Bohemian and French). In the French story the suitors go to war, and are conquered by Apollonius. Only one of the suitors has a name — Ardalio^ Pericles buys a horse with a jewel, conquers ' In the French and Spanish he declines smilingly the invitation to fish. '^ The Bohemian and the Danish know nothing of the division of the cloak which the Latin speaks of. The Italian calls it *< vestimento di Grigio." ^ In Twine only have the other suitors names — Munditius and Camillas. 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 287 five suitors, and in a later scene, Act ii, Sc. v, three more appear who are dismissed. In Wilkins, the king gives the hero, after his successful tourney, a horse and a pair of golden spurs. The queen sends a messenger to Orendel to summon him to her presence. The messenger at first hesitates to go, awed by the terrible appearance of Orendel. When at last he obeys the queen's com- mand and delivers her message, Orendel, like ApoUonius, believes that he is mocked and made sport of because of his shabby clothes. His path is beset with perils. The Knights Templar attempt tO' kill him ; at the court of the king he finds an envious old man who calumniates him. Battles with giants follow. He fights with Mentwin and Mer- zian. The queen asks him if he is not King Orendel. He replies that he is only a poor pilgrim. She calls him Mr. Graycoat, for she cannot learn his real name. In battle with the giant Pelian he utters his own name aloud (like Rustum), and the Knights Templar,, realizing that he is indeed a king, worship him, and the queen exclaims, " Now I am indeed happy that I have always been faith- ful." After the scene in which the fisher is rewarded, which is com- mented upon elsewhere, the combat for Westphal follows, at which siege Orendel by means of a grappling hook is pulled over the wall and captured. A somewhat similar scene is in Jourdain, and in Heinrich von Neustadt there is a naval battle between ApoUonius and Absalon, in which the latter is drawn by a grappling hook into the hostile vessel. Orendel is called home by an angel to protect his kingdom against the pagans. In the French the kingdom in question is the hereditary kingdom of ApoUonius : Antiochus is merely a satrap who wrongfully kept it from him. In Timoneda and Pericles the kingdom is Tyre, which in Timoneda has been usurped by Taliarca, while in Pericles an insurrection is threatened. Orendel at first thinks to return alone, but Bride (his queen) is resolved to journey with him. She proposes to make the fisher a ruler in their absence, but the fisher refuses and all three depart to. gether. In Timoneda the fisher is master of the galleys to Apol- lonius, and is finally made Viceroy of Tyre. Upon the voyage the queen falls into a trance and is thrown into the sea in a chest. She is found by Daniel and Wolfhart and brought to the pagan King Minolt. With the help of the fisher Orendel rescues her., PROG. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXXVII. 158. S. PRINTED DEC. 16, 1898. 288 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, Again Durian brings her to the pagan King Wolfhart, but Durian, himself, helps her to preserve her chastity. It is interesting to note the confusion here, and to see the queen playing the role which the Latin Historia assigns to the daughter. The scenes here correspond to the scene in the brothel. In the second scene Wolf- hart (Singer suggests, p. 15) is a translation of Lupanar, and Du- rian takes the place of Villikus, who is to deprive the queen of vir- ginity, but he figures in the light of a protector, and in Heinrich is called Turpian (or Turian, as it is in a Spanish romance related to the Jourdain). The Danish ballad has already been described and its correspond- ence to Jourdain indicated. The home of King Apolonn in the ballad is Naples. The emperor, who at one time represents Anti- ochus and at another Archistrates, lives in Speier. He has a daughter whom he rates at the sea's worth, and thinks no one worthy of her save Apolonn. She writes a secret letter, in which she confesses her love for him, as the daughter of Archistrates does in the Apollonius story. The emperor now bewitches the shore of his kingdom so that Apollonius is shipwrecked there. To this end he commands the aid of twelve troldqutn?ter, as in the Fridthtofsage Helgi makes use of two witches for the same purpose (Singer, p. 31). All the mariners are lost save Apolonn only, who retains his lyre. (The remainder of the story is as upon page 233.) The riddles form an extremely interesting and important part of the Apollonius story. They incline to the Salomon-Markolf type of romance. Kemble's introduction to the Anglo-Saxon Salomon and Satiirnus^ is still a classic chapter in the history of this curious and universal literary type. Schaumberg's '* Salomo und Markolf " in Paul and Braune's Beit rage, ii, i, and Vogt, Die deuischen Dich- tungen von Salomon U7id Markolf, illustrate the mythic dignity of character which originally belonged to the disputatio. This leg- endary stock, as Prof. Earle says, sent its branches into all the early vernacular literatures of Europe. From a rabbinical root, the strange legend in which at first Solomon and Hiram, King of Tyre, exchanged hard questions, and in which at a later time Solomon and Mercury, and Solomon and a ** Chaldean Earl" dispute seri- ously, develops into a mocking form of literature in which religion is a burlesque and the poet a buffoon. 1 The Dialogue of Salomon and Saturnus, with an historical introduction by J. M. Kemble, London, 1848. 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 289 King Hiram of Tyre helps in the building of Solomon's temple (see I Kings v. i). Solomon sends a messenger to Hiram, demand- ing, " Send me a learned man," and Hiram replies, " I have sent to thee a prudent and wise man (a cunning man indued with under- standing) of Hiram my father's" (2 Chron. ii. 13) [misi ergo tibi virum prudentem et scientissimum Hiram patrem meum]. The Vulgate here merely translated the half name. Chiram Abi (Heb.) signifies literally " my father noble born," and so Churam abiv is equivalent to '' his father is noble born." According to the Vulgate the passage (2 Chron. ii. 13) would seem to mean that the architect Hiram was the father of King Hiram, and then again the father of Solomon. In close connection with this passage is the famous description of the wisdom of Solomon (i Kings iv. 29-34): '^Dedit quoque Deus sapientiam Solomoni, et prudentiam multam nimis et- latitudinem cordis quasi arenam, quae est in litore maris. Et praecedebat sapientia Salomonis sapientiam omnium orientalium et ^gyptiorum, et erat sapientior cunctis hominibus, sapientior Ethan, Ezrahita et Heman, et Chalcol et Dorda, filiis Mahol, et erat nomi- natus in universis gentibus per circuitum. Locutus est quoque Salomon tria millia parabolas, et fuerunt carmina ejus quinque et mille et disputavit super lignis a cedro, quae est in Libano, usque ad hyssopum quae egreditur de pariete et disseruit de jumentis et volu- cribus et reptilibus et piscibus, et veniebant de cunctis populis ad audiendam sapientiam Salomonis et ab universis regibus terrae, qui audiebant sapientiam ejus." In this Biblical Mahol Hofmann sees the later romantic Marcol, Marcolf, Morolf, who disputes with Solomon in riddles. And he adds, " Wenn man erwagt, wie gewaltig die Namen des alten Testamentes in der Septuaginta, Vulgata, bei Flavins Josephus und sonst verandert werden, so wird die Verwandlung von Mahol (Machol) in Marcol, vielleicht unter Einwirkung von Chalcol, nicht besonders auffallen." The saga made an ambassador of this King of Tyre who com- peted with Solomon in riddles, and who on the one hand occupies the place of the architect, Hiram Abi, and on the other that of Marcol and his sons. This myth developed in the first century after Christ and is mentioned by Josephus (Bk. viii, Chap, v) after Menander who translated the Tyrian originals out of Phoenician into Greek. After the death of Abibal, says Josephus, his son Hiram succeeded. At this time the youngest son of Abdemon 290 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, lived, who always solved the riddles which Solomon proposed. Dion says Solomon sent riddles to Hiram and received some from him. Whoever could not find the answers was to pay money to him who was successful. Hiram failed and was obliged to pay a heavy fine. However, he learned the answer to the riddle from Abdemon, a Tyrian, who also gave other riddles to Solomon which he could not answer, and so was compelled to forfeit to Hiram. This Abdemon or his son is the Hiram Abi of the Bible, and in two MSS. he is called 'Aftr^og. (It has been suggested that we have here the original source of Biirger's ballad of the king and the abbot of St. Gall, and of Schiller's Teilung der Erde.) At the end of the fifth century this history first appeared in western literature. The decree of Damasus, or Gelasius, the first index librorum prohibitorum, mentions among other notable books the Contradictio Salof?ioms, which was withdrawn from the Canon because of its deviation from the Scriptural narrative. The Salomon- Marko If was in Germany in the tenth century, for it is quoted by Notker, of St. Gall. It is not improbable that the Proverbs in the St. Gall Rhetoric are taken from the St. Gall Salomon-Markolf. In the twelfth century, Bp, William of Tyre recognized the identity of the Salomon-Abdemon story with the Salomon-Markolf story. By a change of names and localities a second type of myths appeared, in which a princess is wooed by riddles with risk of life to the unfortunate suitors. Here we ha/e the Antiochus type. A very early indication of this condition is to be found in Tatian, Oratio ad Grcecos, cap. 6d), where Salomon and Hiram are shown to be brothers-in-law, and, according to the Phoenician histories of Theodotus, Hypsicrates and Mochus, it is reported that Chiram has given his daughter to Solomon in mar- riage. The change of the scene of the history from Jerusalem to Antioch points to the time when Jerusalem, conquered for the second time, had ceased to exist, and had even disappeared as a name, its site being occupied by a Roman colony, Aelia Capitolina, while Antioch had become the chief city of Syria. The middle link between Machal and Markolf is Marcol, the Hebraized name of Mercury, which could only have become known to the Jews after the Roman conquest of Palestine (see B. Stentz, Die Hirafn Sage, Hands chrift fur Briider Meister, Berlin, 1871). The figures of Christian and pagan literature and mythology 1898.1 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 291 often proceed in medieval romance in strangely assorted com- panies. Solomon and Mercury seems an oddly chosen companion- ship. In the stories of Solomon we find him frequently engaging in conflicts with djinns or demons. He overpowers and holds in subjection all but Sachr (or Asmodeus), whom he finally conquers by artifice and from whom he learns how to obtain possession of the worm Schamir which cuts stones without noise — an obvious reminiscence of the building of the temple of Solomon, without the sound of a hammer ("like a tall palm the silent temple grew"). With the conception of Solomon as the wisest and most eloquent of men and the most powerful conqueror of spirits, there must have come a moment in the evolution of the story in which he would measure his prowess with the demons of the classic world. Mer- cury excelled in discourse. It was therefore but natural that with him Solomon should enter into argument. When Paul and Bar- nabas preached in Lystra, the people cried, " The gods have come down to us in the likeness of men," and they called Barnabas, Jupiter, because of his stature, and Paul, Mercury because of his eloquence. In the Vienna Apollonius, MS., 480, occurs the following note : *^ Nota quod de isto Apollonio tyro magister in scolastica ystoria in libro tercio regum in rubrica de opidis datis yram a Salomone. Testatur Josephus Menandrum fenicem ystoriographum scripsisse quod Salomon et yram mutuo sibi scripserunt enigmata et figuras quod qui non solueret tercam daret alteri pensionean cumque artar- etur yram in solucione conpelebat tyrum juvenem abdimum abde- monis filium qui omnino de facili explicabat." A deeply interesting theory, set forth with much learning and in- genuity by A. Vesselovsky — Iz istorii literaiurnavo obstchenia vostoka i ZapadUf Slavianskaia Skazania. Solomonge i Kiiovrase i Zapadnya legendy 0 Marolfe i Merline, St. Petersburg, 1872 — seeks to identify Markolf with Merlin, and so associate the ancient disputatio with the Celtic story of Arthur. In Elie de Saint-Giles (early thirteenth century) the abduction of Solomon's wife as nar- rated in Solomon and Markolf is described, and the names of Ar- thur, Gawain and Mordred appear. Arnold de Guisnes, Chronique de Guisnes et d* Ardres, par Lam- bert, cure d'Ardres ed. par le Marquis de Godefroy Menilglaisey Paris, Renouard{i2>^^, Cxcvi, pp. 215-217) reads "cognatumsuum Walterum de Clusa nominatum, qui de Anglorum gestis et fabulis. 292 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, de Gormundo et Isembardo, de Tristanno et Hisolda, de Merlino et Merchulfo, et de Ardentium gestis diligenter edocebat." Prof. Vesselovsky concludes, ^' Our comparison of Merlin with Asmodeus- Kitovras, and the type of Morolf, has shown us that the legend of Merlin is more archaic than the German poem of Solomon and Morolf, and more nearly approaches the Talmudic-Slavonic legend" (p. 331).' The universal popularity and wide circulation of the tale of Apol- lonius of Tyre is further illustrated by the Thidrik-Saga, in which ApoUonius appears, and by the Vi/kina-Saga, in which King Artus of Bertangaland has two sons, named Iron and ApoUonius, the latter of whom was appointed by Attila, Jarl of Tyre (see P. E. Miiller, Saga Bibliothek, ii, 209). The explanation of the firm hold that this story has had upon so many centuries and peoples is a tempting subject of philosoph- ical study. It comes to us stained through and through with me- dieval legend and superstition. As ancient Gower says in the play : *' It has been sung at festivals, At ember eves and holy ales, And lords and ladies in their lives Have read'it for restoratives." COLOPHON TO WYNKYN DE WORDE. CCI)UiSenbet^ t^e mooapFtefttUl^pQo^? of t^nobto 3lp pol?n fomtpmc ftpngeof (d^je netolptranflateD out of frenf O^e m to ettgMe*3lnD enp^tmteDm t^e famouiS cp^ teoe:flonDonin^eifieteftrete at^Ci^ne oftl^elbtmebp tdpnbpndetdo>De*3|tttl)c pereof mt\oiU.Q^.XiMSi.%. of tl)etei?8ne of t^emoodejcceUent anOnoUe p^tjntceonp vpg^t naturall auD reooubteti fouetajm^ tqziK }t)pnae ^n THE END. ^ F. Liebrecht (Zur Volkskunde, pp. 346-348) discusses the name Marcolf and its relations (?) to Merlin and Moloch. 1898.] SMYTTI — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 293 APPENDIX. The Gesta Romanorum Text. De Antiocho qui filiam propriam cognovit et tantum earn dilexit, quod nullus earn in uxorem habere potuit nisi problema ab eo propositum solveret. Antiochus in civitate Antiochia regnavit, a quo ipsa civitas Antiochia nomen accepit. Ex conjuge sua filiam speciosissimam genuit. Que cum pervenisset ad etatem legitimam et species pulchritudinis accresceret, multi eam in matrimonium petebant cum magna et inestimabili dotis quantitate. Sed cum pater deliberaret, cui potissime filiam suam daret in matrimonium, nescio qua iniqua concupiscentia crudelitatisque flamma in amorem filie sue exarsit cepitque eam amplius diligere quam patrem opporteret. Qui cum luctatur cum furore, pugnat cum pudore, vincitur amore. Quadam die accessit ad cubiculum filie sue et omnes longe secedere jussit, quasi cum filia sua colloquium secretum habiturus. Stimulante furore libidinis diu repugnante filia nodum virginitatis erupit. Cumque puella quid faceret cogitaret, nutrix subito ad eam intravit. Quam ut vidit flebili vultu, ait: " ob quam rem affligitur animatua?" Puella ait : " o carissima, modo hie in cubiculo duo nobilia nomina perierunt." Ait nutrix: " domina, quare hoc dicis?" Ait ilia: "quia ante matrimonium meum pessimo scelere sum violata." Nutrix cum hec audisset et vidisset quasi aniens facta est et ait: " et quis diabolus tanta audacia virginis thorum et regine ausus est violare ? " Ait puella : "impietas fecit hoc peccatum." Nutrix ait: "Cur non indicas patri ?" Puella ait: "et ubi est pater? Si intelligis, peribit nomen patris in me; mortis mihi remedium placet." Nutrix ut audivit eam mortis remedium querere, blando eam sermonis colloquio revocavit, ut a proposito suo recederet. Inter hec impius pater, cum simulata mente ostenderet civibus pium patrem, inter domesticos parietes maritum se filie letatur. Et ut semper impiis filie thoris frueretur, ad expellendos petitores, qui eam in conjugem petebant, novum genus nequicie cogitavit. Questionem vero proponebat, dicens : "si quis questionis mee solucionem invenerit, filiam meam in uxorem habebit, et si defecerit, decollabitur." Plurimi undique reges et principes patrie propter incredibilem et inauditam puelle speciem venerunt. Et si quis forte prudentia litterarum questionis solucionem invenisset, quasi nihil dixisset, decollabatur, et caput eius supra portam suspendebatur, ut advenientes imaginem mortis viderent et turbarentur, ne ad talem condicionem accederent. Hoc totum fecerat, ut ipsemet cum filia sua in adulterio poterat permanere. Cum vero tales crudeli- tates exerceret Antiochus, interposito brevi temporis spacio adolescens quidam Tyrus, patrie sue princeps locuples valde, Appollonius nomine, bene litteratus, navigans Antiochiam intravit, ingressusque ad regem ait : " ave rex ! " Et ille : " salvi sunt nupturi parentes tui?" Aitjuvenis: 294 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, "peto filiam tuam in uxorem." Rex ut audivit, quod audire nolebat, respiciens juvenem ait : " nosti nupciarum condicionem ? " Ait juvenis : " novi et ad portam vidi." Indignatus rex ait : " audi ergo questionem : Scelere vehor materna carne vescor, quero fratrem meum, matris mee virum ; nee invenio." Puer accepta questione paululum recessit a rege et, cum scienciam quereret, deo favente solucionem questionis invenit et reversus ad regem ait: "bone rex, proposuisti questionem, audi ergo solucionem nam quod dixisti ' scelere vehor ' non es mentitus ; te enim ipsum intuere. 'Materna carne vescor': filiam tuam respice!" Rex ut audivit solucionem questionis juvenem solvisse, timens, ne peccatum suum patefieret, irato vultueum respiciens ait: "longe es, juvenis, a questione, nihil verum dixisti. Decollari quidem promerueris, sed ecce habebis dierum triginta spacium : recogita tecum, revertere ad terram tuam ! Et si questionis solucionem inveneris, filiam meam in matrimo- nium accipies ; sinautem decollaberis." Juvenis turbatus accepto comi- tatu navem ascendit, tendens in patriam Tyrum. Sed post recessum adolescentis vocavit rex dispensatorem suum, Thaliarchum nomine, cui ait: " Thaliarche secretorum meorum minister fidelissime, scias, quod Tyrus Apollonius invenit questionis mee solucionem. Ascende ergo confestim navem ad persequendum eum. Et cum perveneris Tyrum, quere eum et cum ferro vel veneno interfice! Reversus dum fueris, premium magnum accipies." Thaliarchus statim sumens pecuniam simul peciitque navem, venit ad patriam juvenis. Appollonius vero prius venit et domum suam introivit, apertoque scrinio omnes libros respexit. Et nihil aliud invenit, nisi quod regi dixerat, et dixit intra se : " nisi fallor, Antiochus rex impio amore diligit filiam suam." Et recogitans secum dixit: " quid agis Appolloni ? Questionem regis solvisti, filiam ejus non accepisti : ideo delatus es a deo, ut non morieris." Continuoque jussit sibi naves preparare et eas centum milibus modiorum frumenti onerari et multo pondere auri et argenti et veste copiosa. Et cum paucis secum fidelissimis hora noctis tercia navim ascendit, tradiditque se alto pelago. Alia vero die queritur a civibus suis et non invenitur. Meror ingens nascitur, quod amantissimus princips patrie nusquam comparuit ; planc- tus magnus erat in civitate. Tantus vero amor civium circa eum erat, ut multo tempore tonsores cessarent, publica spectacula tollerentur, balnea clauderentur ; non templa, non tabernas quisquam ingreditur. Et cum talia agerentur, supervenit ThaHarchus, qui a rege Antiocho ad necandum eum missus fuerat. Et videns omnia clausa dixit cuidam puero : "indica mihi, si velis vivere, ex qua causa civitas hec in luctu moratur?" Ait puer : " o bone, nescis tu illud? Civitas hec in luctu moratur, quia Appol- lonius princeps patrie huius at Antiocho rege regressus nusquam compa- ruit ? " Thaliarchus cum hoc audit, gaudio plenus ad navem rediit et Antiochiam intravit. Ingressusque ad regem ait: " domine mi rex, letare, quia Appollonius vos timens nusquam comparuit. Rex ait: " fu- gere quidem potest, sed effugere non potest." Statim hujusmodi edic- 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 295 turn posuit : " quicunque AppoUonium Tyrum, contemptorem regni mei, mihi exhibuerit, accipiet quinquaginta talenta auri, qui vero caput eius, centum accipiet." Hoc facto non tantum inimici sed amici cupiditate seducti ad persequendum AppoUonium properabant. Querebatur vero Appollonius per mare, per terras, per silvas, per universas indagines et non inveniebatur. Tunc rex jussit sibi classes navium preparari ad per- sequendum juvenem ; sed et moram facientibus, qui classes navium sibi preparabant, Appollonius Tharsum devenit. Et deambulans juxta litus visus est a quodam cive suo Elamico nomine, qui supervenerat in ipsa hora. Et accedens ad eum dixit : " ave, rex Appolloni ! " Ille salutatus fecit, ut potentes facere consueverant : sprevit hominem plebeium. Tunc senex indignatus est valde et iterum salutavit eum et ait : "ave Appolloni ! Resaluta et noli despicere paupertatem honestis moribus decoratam ! Si enim scis, quod scio, cavendum est tibi." Et ille: "si placet, dicito mihi ! " Qui ait: " prospictus es." Et ille: " et quis patrie sue proscripsit principem?" Elamicus ait: "rex Antiochus." Appol- lonius: "qua ex causa?" Elamicus ait: "quia, quod pater est, tu esse voluisti." Appollonius ait: " et pro quanto me proscripsit?" Et ille: " ut quicunque te illi vivum exibuerit, quinquaginta talenta auri, qui vero caput tuum protulerit, centum accipiet. Et ideo moneo te : fuge in presidium." Sed cum hec dixisset Elamicus, discessit. Tunc Appollonius eum rogavit, ut ad se veniret, et centum talenta auri ei daret. Et ait : " accipe tantum de paupertate mea, quia meruisti ; et amputa caput meum et regi presentes et tunc gaudium magnum habebit. Ecce habes centum talenta auri et tu es innocens, quia te conduxi, ut gaudium offeras regi." Cui senex ait: " domine, absit hoc a me, ut hujusmodi rei causa premium accipiam ! Apud bonos homines amicicia premio non est comparanda." Et valedicens discessit. Post hec Appollonius cum spaciatur in eodem, loco supra litus, vidit hominem contra se venientem, dolentem et mesto veltu, Stranguilionem nomine. Accessit ad eum protinus, ait Appollonius : " ave, Stranguilio !" Et ipse ait: " quare in his locis turbata mente versaris ? " Appollonius ait : " quia filiam ejus (ut verum dixeram, conjugem) in matrimonium petivi. Itaque, si fieri potest, in patria vestra volo latere." Stranguilio ait: "domine Appolloni, civitas nostra pauperrima est et non potest tuam nolilitatem sustinere : preterea duram famem et sterilitatem patimur annone, nee etiam jam civibus ulla spes est salutis, sed crudelissima mors est ante oculos nostros." Appollonius ait : " agite gratias deo, qui me profugum vestris finibus applicuit. Dabo civitati vestre centum milia modiorum frumenti, si fugam meam tantum celaveritis." Stranguilio, ut hec audivit, prostravit se ad pedes ejus et ait : " domine Appolloni, si esurienti civitati subveneris, non solum fugam tuam celabimus, sed si necessitas fuerit, pro tua salute dimicabimus." Ascendensque Appol- lonius tribunal in foro presentibus cunctis civibus ejusdem civitatis dixit : Gives Tharsenses, quos annone penuria turbat ^t opprimit, ego Tyrius 296 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLOXIUS. [Oct. 7, Appollonius relevo. Credo enim vos, hujus beneficii memores, fugam celaturos. Scitote enim non me malicia Antiochi esse fugatum, sed vestra felicitate hue sum delatus. Dato itaque vobis centum milia modio- rum frumenti eo precio, quo sum in patria mercatus : octo ereis sin- gulos modios." Gives hec audientes, quod singulos modios octo ereis mercarentur, hilares effecti sunt ac gratias agentes statim frumenta porta- bant. Tunc Appollonius, ne deposita regia dignitate mercatoris magis quam donatoris nomen videretur assumere, precium, quod acceperat, ejusdem civitatis utilitatibus redonavit. Gives autem, ut tanta viderent ejus beneficia, bigam ejus in foro statuerunt, in qua stans dextra manu fruges daret et sinistro pede calcaret et in base scripserunt : " civitas Tharsia Tyrio Appollonio donum dedit, quod civitatem a seva fame liberavit." Deinde interpositis paucis diebus hortante Stranguilione et Dionysiade ejus conjuge ad Pentapolim Tyrenorum navigare proposuit, ut illic lateret, eo quod bene firma cum opulentia et tranquillitate ageren- tur. Igitur cum ingenti honore ducitur ad mare et valedicens omnibus ascendit ratim. Sed tribus diebus et noctibus totidem ventis prosperis navigans, subito est pelagus mutatum, postquam litus Tharsie reliquit. Nam paucis horis ventis concitatis, Aquilone vento Euroque instante clauso celo nimia se pluvia erupit. Populus Tiri procella corripitur, ratis pariter dissolvitur. Zephyri fretum perturbant, grando ac nubes tenebrosa incumbebant, flant venti fortiter intantum, quod mors cunctos occupat. Tunc unusquisque rapuit sibi tabulas. Tamen in ilia caligine tempestatis omnes perierunt. Appollonius vero unius tabule beneficio in Pentapolitanorum litore est pulsus. Stans autem in litore nudus, intuens mare tranquillum sic ait: " o pelagi fides !• Facilius incidam in manus crudelissimi regis ! Quo pergam ? Quam patriam petam ? Quis notus huic ignoto auxilium dabit ?" Hec dum loqueretur Appollonius, aspexit juvenem venientem contra se quendam, robustum piscatorem sordido sacco coopertum. Cogente necessitate prostravit se ad pedes ejus pro- fusisque lacrimis ait : " miserere, quicunque es, succurre nudo naufrago, non humilibus natalibus genito ! Et ut scias, cui miserearis : ego sum Tyrius Appollonius, patrie mee princeps. Deprecor te auxilium vite mee." Piscator, ut vidit speciem juvenis, misericordia motus erigit ilium et duxit infra tecta domus. Posuit epulas, quas habere potuit, et ut plenius sue pietati satisfaceret, exuens se, tribunarium in duas partes dividens, unam dedit juveni dicens : " toUe quod habeo et vade in civi- tatem : forsitan invenies, qui tui misereatur. Si non invenies, hue ad ad me revertere ! Paupertas quecunque sufficiat : piscemur simul. Illud tamen admoneo te, ut, si quando dignitati tue redditus fueris, ne despicias tribunarii paupertatem." Appollonius ait : " si non memor tui fuero, iterum naufragium paciar, nee tui similem inveniam !" Et hec dicens demonstrata sibi via ille carpens iter portas civitatis ingreditur. Dumque cogitaret, unde peteret auxilium vite, vidit per plateam puerum nudum currentem, oleo caput unctum, sabano precinctum, voce magna claman- 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLOXIUS. 297 tern et dicentem : " audite, cives omnes ! Audite peregrini et servi ! Qui ablui vult, pergat gymnasium !" Audito hoc Appollonius exuens se tribunarium ingreditur lavacrum, utitur liquore. Et dum singulos intue- tur, querit sibi parem nee invenit. Et subito Altistratus, rex totius regionis, ingressus est cum magna turba famulorum. Cum rex ludum spere cum servis suis exerceret, admisit se Appollonius regi et decur- rentem sustulit speram et subtili velocitate percussam ludenti regi remisit. Tunc rex suis famulis ait : " recedite ; hie enim juvenis, ut sus- picor, mihi comparandus est." Appollonius, ut audivit se laudari, con- stanter accessit ad regem, Et accepto ciromate docta manu circumlavit eum cum subtilitate. Deinde in solio gratissimo fovit eum et exeunte eo ab officio discessit. Dixitque rex ad amicos suos post discessum adoles centis : " juro vobis in veritate, melius me nunquam abluisse quam hodie, beneficio adolescentis nescio cujus." Et respiciens unum de famulis ait: "juvenis ille, qui mihi offieium fecit, vide, quis sit." Et ille secutus juvenem vidit eum sordido tribunario indutum. Reversusque ad regem ait: "juvenis ille naufragus est." Rex ait: " unde scis ?" Et ille: " tacente illo habitus indicat causam." Ait rex : " vade celerius et die ei : rogat te rex, ut venias ad cenam." Appollonius, ut audivit, acquievit et cum famulo venit ad regem. Famulus prior ingressus ait ad regem : " naufragus adest : sed propter sordidum habitum introire verecundatur." Statimque rex jussit eum indui vestibus dignis et ad cenam ingredi. In- gressus Appollonius triclinium regis contra regem assignato loco dis- eubuit. Infertur prandium, deinde cena regalis. Appollonius cunctis epulantibus non epulatur, sed aurum et argentum in ministerio regis diu flens intuebatur. Tune unus de discumbentibus ad regem ait : " nisi fallor, juvenis iste fortune regis invidet." Rex ait : "male suspiearis ; nam mee fortune non invidet, sed plura se perdidisse testatur," Et respiciens Appolionium hilari vultu ait : "juvenis, epulare nobiseum et de deo meliora spera!" Et dum hortaretur juvenem, subito introivit filia regis, virgo jam adulta, deditque osculum patri, deinde cunctis discum- bentibus amicis. Que dum oscularetur singulos, reversa est ad patrem et ait : " bone pater, quis est iste juvenis, qui contra te locum honoratum tenet, qui multum dolet ?" Ait rex : " o duldis filia, juvenis iste naufragus est et gymnasio mihi officio gratissime fecit, propter quod ad cenam vocavi ilium. Quis autem sit, nescio. Sed si vis scire, interroga eum ; te decet omnia nosse. Et forsitan, dum cognoveris, misereberis ei." Hec audiens puella ad juvenem accessit et ait: " earissime, generositas nobilitatem ostendit. Si tibi molestum non est, indica mihi nomen tuum et casus tuos !" Et ille : " si nomen queris, in mare perdidi ; si nobilitatem. Tyro reliqui." Ait puella : " apertius die, ut intelligam !" Tunc Appollonius nomen suum et omnes casus exposuit. Finitoque sermonis colloquio fundere lacrimas cepit. Quern ut vidit rex flentem, ait filie : " nata duleis, peecasti : dum nomen et casus adolescentis peti- visti, veteres ejus dolores renovasti. Ergo, duleis filia, ex quo jam scis 298 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, veritatem, justum est, ut liberalitatem tuam quasi regina ei ostendas." Puella, ut audivit voluntatem patris, respiciens juvenem ait : " noster es, Appolloni ! Depone merorem et a patre meo locupletaberis." Appol- lonius cum gemitu et verecundia gratias egit. Tunc rex ait filie sue : " Defer liram, ut cum cantu exhilares convivium !" Puella jussit afferri sibi liram et cepit cum omni dulcedine liram percutere. Omnes eam ceperunt laudore et dicere : " non potest melius, non potest dulcius audiri." Inter quos solus AppoUonius tacuit. Ait ei rex : "Appolloni, fedam rem facis. Omnes filiam meam in arte musica laudant : quare tu solus vituperas ?" Ait ille : " bone rex, si permittis, dicam, quod sencio : filia tua in artem musicam incessit et nondum didicit. Igitur jube mihi tradi liram et statim scies, quod nescisti." Ait rex : " Appolloni, video te eruditum in omnibus." Jussit sibi tradi liram et, egresso foras, corona capitis eum decoravit. Accipiensque liram introivit in triclinium, pul- sabat ante regem tanta dulcedine, ut omnes non Appollonium sed Ap- pollinem crederent. Discumbentes cum rege dixerunt, quod nunquam melius audissent nee vidissent. Filia regis hec audiens, respiciens juvenem capta est in amorem ejus et ait ad patrem suum : " o pater, per- mittas me dare juveni, quod mihi placet!" Rex ait: " permitto." Ilia respiciens Appollonium ait : " magister Appolloni, accipe ex indulgentia patris mei auri ducenta talenta, argenti libras quadringentas vestemque copiosam, servos XX, ancillas X." Quibus ait : " afFerte quod promisi, et presentibus amicis exponite in triclinio !" Jussu regine illata sunt omnia. Laudant omnes liberalitatem puelle. Peracto convivio levaverunt se omnes et valedicentes regi et regine dicesserunt. AppoUonius ait: " bone rex, miserorum misericors, et tu regina, amatrix studiorum, valete !" Et respi- ciens famulos, quos sibi regina donaverat, ait : " attollite, famuli, hec, que mihi data sunt, et eamus et hospicium queramus !" Puella timens, ne ama- torem perderet, tristis est facta. Respiciens ad patrem ait : " bone rex, et pater optime, placet tibi, ut AppoUonius hodie ditatus abscedat, et quod illi donavimus a malis hominibus rapiatur ?" Tunc rex festinus jussit illi assignari aulam, ubi honeste quiesceret. Puella vero amore accensa inquietam habuit noctem. Mane vero cubiculum patris adiit. Guam ut vidit pater dixit : " quid est hoc, quod preter consuetudinem ita mane evigilasti ?" Puella ait : " requiem habere non potero. Et ideo, carissime pater, peto, ut me tradas juveni ad doctrinandam, quod potero artem musicam et alia addiscere." Rex hec audiens gavisus est. Jussit ad se juvenem vocari, cui ait: " Appolloni, filia mea multum cupit artem tuam addiscere ; ideo rogo te, ut ei ostendas omnia que nosti, et ego mercedem condignam tibi retribuam." Et ille : " domine, paratus sum voluntati ves- tre satisfacere." Docuit puellam, sicut ipse didicit. Post hec cito puella pre nimio amore juvenis infirmatur. Rex ut vidit filiam suam incurrisse subito egritudinem, medicos vocavit. Illi vero venas et singulas partes cor- poris tangebant et nullam egritudinem invenerunt. Post paucos dies Ires juvenes nobilissimi, qui per longum tempus fiham suam in matrimonium 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 299 petierant, regem una voce pariter salutaverunt. Quos intuens rex ait : " qua de causa venistis ?" At illi: " quia nobis sepius promisistis uni ex nobis dare filiam vestram in matrimonium. Propter quod hodie simul veni- mus. Gives tui sumus, locupletes et ex nobilibus geniti. Etideo de tribus tibi elige, quern vis habere generum !" Rex ait : " non apto tempore me interpellastis. Filia mea studiis vacat et ob amorem studiorum imbecillis jacet. Sed ne videar vobis nimis differre, scribite in codicillis vestris nom- ina vestra et dotis quantitatem ; que transmittam filie mee, ut ipsa eligat quem voluerit." Illi hoc fecerunt. Rex accepit scripturas et legit sig- navitque et dedit Appollonio dicens : " tolle, magister, has scripturas et trade discipule tue." Appollonius accepit scripturas et puelle portavit. Puella, ut vidit quem diligebat, ait: "magister, quid est, quod solus in- troisti in cubiculum ?" Appollonius ait: " sume hos codicellos, quos tibi misit pater tuus, et lege." Puella codices aperuit et legit trium nom- ina petitorum. Perlectisque codicellis respiciens Appollonium dixit : "magister Appolloni, utrum non doles, quod alteri debeo in matrimon- ium tradi ?" Et ille : " non ! Quia omne, quod est tibi honor, erit et commodum meum." Ait puella : "magister si amares, doleres." Hec dicens rescripsit et signavit codicellos tradiditque Appollonio, ut eos regi deferret. Et scripsit hec : " rex et pater optime, quoniam dementia tua permisit mihi, ut rescribam, rescribo : ilium naufragum volo conju- gem habere." Rex cum legisset voluntatem puelle, ignorans, quem naufragum diceret, respiciens ad juvenes ait : " quis vestrum naufragium passus est?" Unus ex illis nomine Ardonius dixit: " ego sum passus naufragium." Alius ait: " tace, morbus te consumat nee salvus nee sanus sis ! cum sciam te coetaneum meum, portam civitatis nunquam existi : ubi naufragium fecisti?" Rex cum non invenisset, quis eorum naufragium fecisset, respiciens Appollonium ait : " tolle codicellos et lege I Potest enim fieri, ut, quod ego non novi, tu intelligis, qui presens fuisti." Appollonius acceptis codicellis velociter percurrit et, ut sensit se amari, erubuit. Cui rex ait: "Appolloni, invenisti naufragum?" At ille pre rubore pauca dixit. Rex vero intellexit, quod filia sua eum dilexit. Juvenibus ait: "cum tempus fuerit, mittam ad vos." Illi vero ei valedicentes recesserunt. Ipse vero solus intravit ad filiam suam et ait : " quem tibi eligisti conjugem?" Ilia autem prostravit sead pedes patris sui et ait : " pater carissime, quia cupis audire desiderium filie tue : ilium volo et amo naufragum, Appollonium magistrum meum ; cui si me non tradideris, filiam amisisti." Rex cum lacrimas filie sue vidisset, levavit eam a terra et alloquitur dicens : " nata dulcis, noli de ahqua re cogitare, quia talem concupisti, quem et ego, ut enim vidi, quia et amando factus sum pater. Diem ergo nuptiarum sine mora con- stituam," Postero ergo die vocantur amici vicinarum urbium ad regem. Quibus ait: " carissimi, fiha mea vult nubere Appollonio magistro suo. Peto itaque, ut vobis omnibus sit leticia, quia filia mea prudenti viro so- ciatur." Hec igitur dicens constituit diem nupciarum. Fiuntque convi- 300 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, via prolixa, celebranturque nupcie regie dignitatis. Puella cito concepit. Et cum puerum in utero haberet, accidit, quod, cum ambularet cum rege Appollonio, viro suo, juxta litus maris, vidit navim speciosam. Cogno- vit eam Appollonius, quod esset de patria sua. Conversus ad nauclerum ait: " unde venis ?" At ille : "a Tyro." Appollonius ait: " patriam meam nominasti." Nauclerus ait: "ergo Tyrus es tu?' Et ille: "ut dicis." Nauclerus ait: " nosti aliquem patrie illius principem nomine Appollonium ?" Et ille : "quasi me ipsum." Nauclerus dixit : " peto, ut ubicunque ilium videris, dicas ei, ut gaudeat et exultet, quia rex An- tiochus fulmine percussus est cum filia sua ; opes autem regni Antiochie reservantur Appollonio." Appollonius ut audivit, plenus gaudio ad con- jugem suam ait: "peto itaque, ut me abire permittas ad percipiendum regnum." Ilia ut audivit, profusis lacrimis ait : " o domine, si in longin- quo itinere esses constitutus, ad partum meum festinare debueras ; et modo recedere veils, cum juxta me sis ? Sed si hoc velis, pariter navi- gemus ! " Et veniens ad patrem ait: " o pater, letare et gaude, quia se- vissimus rex Antiochus cum filia sua dei judicio in fulmine percussus est, opes autem et diademata nobis reservata sunt. Permitte me navigare cum viro meo !" Rex autem exhilaratus naves jubet produci in litus et omnibus bonis impleri. Preterea nutricem ejus nomine Ligoridem et ob- stetricem propter partum ejus simul navigare precepit. Et data proficis- cendi copia deduxit ad litus osculaturque filiam et generum. Naviga- bant. Sed cum per aliquot dies in mari fuissent, surrexit tempestas. Gravis puella infirmatur interim et peperit filiam, quod facta est quasi mortua. Ouod cum videret familia, exclamavit voce magna et ululatu. Hecaudiens Appollonius cucurrit. Vidit conjugemjacentem mortuam, ut ei videbatur. Scidit a pectore suo vestes, profusis fletibus jactavit se super corpus ejus et ait : " caro conjux, Altistratis regis filia, quid respondebo patri tuo pro te ?" Et cum hec dixisset, dixit gubernator : "domine, corpus mortuum navis sufferre non valet. Jube ergo hoc corpus in pe- lagus mitti, ut possimus evadere !" Appollonius ait ad eum : "quid dicis, pessime ? Placet tibi, ut hoc corpus in pelagus mittam, quod nau- fragum me et egenum suscepit ?" Vocavit servos suos et ait : "faciatis loculum et foramina et cum bitumine liniri . . . ." Et sic carta plumbea intus posita facit obturari. Perfecto loculo regalibus ornamentis exornat et puellam in loculo posuit et copiam auri ad caput eius. Et dedit oscu- lum funeri fundens super eam lacrimas. Tunc jussit infantem tolli et diligenter nutriri, ut pro filia neptem regi ostenderet. Et jussit loculum mitti in mari cum maximo fletu. Tercia vero die unda maris ejecit lo- culum ad litus Ephesiorum non longe a domo cujusdam medici Ceri- monis nomine, qui cum discipulis suis eadem die in litore ambulavit. Tunc vidit loculum effusis fluctibus jacentem. Ait servis suis : " tollite hunc loculum cum omni diligentia et ad villam perferte !" Quod cum fecissent, medicus aperuit, vidit puellam regalibus ornamentis decoratam et speciosam valde et quasi mortuam jacentem, obstupuit et ait : " o bona 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 301 puella, quare estis sic derelicta ?" Vidit subtus caput ejus pecuniam po- sitam et sub pecunia cartam scriptam et ait: " perquiramus, quid conti- neter in carta !" Guam cum aperuisset, invenit titulum scriptum : " quicunque hunc loculum invenerit peto, ut X aureos habeat et X funeri impendat. Hoc enim corpus multas lacrimas reliquit parentibus et do- lores amaros. Quodsi aliud fecerit, quam quod dolor exposcit, ultimum diem incidat, nee sit qui corpus ejus sepulture commendet !" Perlectis autem cartulis ad servos suos ait ; " prestemus corpori, quod dolor ex- poscit ! Juro vobis per spem vite mee, in hoc funere amplius me eroga- turum, quam dolor imperat." Continuo jubet parari rogum ; sed cum edificatur atque componitur, supervenit discipulus medici, aspectu ado- lescens et, quantum ad ingenium pertinet, senex. Hie cum corpus spe- ciosum super rogum positum vidisset, intuens eum magister ait : " bene venisti : hec enim hora expectavit te. Tolle ampulam unguenti et, quod supremum est de funere, beneficio superfunde sepulture !" Venit juvenis ad corpus puelle, extraxit de pectore vestes, fudit unguentum tractans manu, Totum corpus ad precordia vivere sensit. Obstupuit juvenis, palpat venas et indicia rimatur narium, labia labiis probat, sen- sit vitam cum morte luctantem et ait ad servos suos : " supponite faculas per Iin angulos lente et temperate !" Quo facto sanguis ille, qui coagu- latus erat, liquefactus est. Quod ut vidit juvenis, ait magistro : " puella, quam dicis mortuam, vivit. Et ut faciliu? mihi possis credere, experi- mento satisfaciam." His dictis tulit puellam et in cubiculum suum posuit, calefaciens oleum madefecit lanam et posuit super pectus ejus. Sanguis vero ille, qui intus coagulatus fuerat, accepto tepore liquefactus est, cepitque spiritus per medullas descendere. Venis itaque patefactis aperuit oculos et recipiens spiritum ait : " qualis tu es, non tangas aliter, quam oportet tangere, quia filia regis sum et regis uxor." Juvenis hoc audiens gaudio plenus introivit ad magistrum in cubiculum et ait : " ecce, magister, puella vivit." Qui ait : " probo peritiam, artem laudo, pruden- ciam, miror diligentiam. Et audi, discipule : nolo te artis tue esse in- gratum ; accipe mercedem. Hec enim puella multam pecuniam secum attulit." Et jussit eam salubribus vesci cibis et fomentis optimis recreari. Post paucos dies, ut cognovit eam regio genere ortam esse, adhibitis amicis filiam sibi adoptavit. Et ut rogabatur ab ea cum lacrimis, ne ab aliquo tangeretur, inter sacerdotes Diane templi eam cum feminis misit, ut inviolabiliter servaretur. Inter hec dum Appollonius navigat cum in- genti luctu, gubernante deo applicavit Tharso et descendens a rati petiit domum Stranguilionis et Dyonisiadis. Quos cum salutasset, omnes casus suos exposuit eis dicens : " cum dolore mortua est conjux mea ; tamen filia est servata, de qua gaudeo. Et ideo, sicut in vobis confido, (Amis- sum regnum, quod mihi servatur, accipere volo neque ad socerum re- vertar, cujus in mari perdidi filiam, sed agam potius opera mercatoris) : vobis commendo filiam meam, ut cum filia vestra Philomacia nomine nutriatur, et ut filia mea vocetur Tharsia. Preterea uxoris mee nutri- 802 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, cem Ligoridem nomine curam sue puelle custodire volo." Hec dicens tradidit Stranguilioni infantem deditque aurum et argentum et vestes copiosas, Et juravit neque barbam neque capillos nee ungulas tonsurum, nisi prius filiam suam dedisset in matrimonium. At illi stupentes, quod tarn graviter juraverat, cum magna diligentia educaturos se puellam pro- mittunt. Appollonius autem navim ascendit et ad longinquas Egipti re- giones navigabat. Interea puella Tharsia expleto quinquennio traditur liberalibus studiis una cum Philomacia, filia eorum, coetanea sua. Cum- que ad XIIII annos venisset, reversa de auditorio invenit nutricem suam Ligoridem subitaneam invalitudinem incurisse et sedens juxta eam cau- sas infirmitatis explorat. Cui nutrix : " audi, bona filia, verba mea et in corde tuo reserva. Ouem tu putas patrem aut matrem vel patriam ? " Ait puella: "patriam Tharsum, patrem Stranguilionem, matrem Dyon- isiadem." Nutrix ingemuit et ait: " audi, filia, originem natalium tuor- um, ut scias, quomodo post mortem meam agere debeas : est tibi pater nomine Appollonius et mater Lucina, Altistratis regis filia, que, cum te pareret, statim precluso spiritu mortua est. Guam pater tuus Appollon- ius effecto loculo cum ornamentis regalibus in mare misit, et viginti sis- tercias auri posuit sibi sub caput, ut, ubicunque esset devoluta, ilia in aux- ilium ejus fuissent. Navis quoque luctantibus ventis cum patre tuo lugente et te in cunabulis posita pervenit ad banc civitatum. Hiis ergo hospiti- bus, Stranguilioni et Dyonisiadi, una mecum te commendavit Tyrius Ap- pollonius, pater tuus, votumque fecit nee barbam nee capillos nee ungues tonsurum, nisi prius te nuptum traderet. Nunc ergo moneo, si post mortem meam hospites tui, quos parentes appellas, iniuriam aliquando tibi forte fecerint, ascende in forum, et ibi invenies statuam patris tui, stantem. Apprehende illam et clama : "filia ejus sum cujus est hec statua." Gives vero, memores beneficiorum patris tui, injuriam tuam vindicabunt." Cui Tharsia: " cara nutrix, deum testor, si ita mihi non dixisses unde essem, penitus nescirem." Et cum adinvieem lo- querentur, nutrix emisit spiritum. Tharsia vero corpus nutricis sue se- pelivit et per totum annum mortem ejus lugebat. Post vero induit prio- rem dignitatem, petiit scolas ad studia liberalia. Et cum de scolis rever- teretur, non prius cibum sumpsisset, antequam nutricis monumentum introisset. Kerens ampuUam vini ingrediebatur et ibi manens parentes suos vocabat. Et cum hec agerentur, quadam die Dyonisiades cum filia sua Philomacia et Tharsia transibat per forum. Videntes omnes cives speciem Tharsie et ornamentum dixerunt : " felix pater, cujis filia Thar- sia est! Ilia vero, que adheret ei, turpis est et dedecus ; " Dyonisiades, ut audivit Tharsiam laudari et filiam suam vituperari, conversa in insan- iam furoris, sola sedens secum cogitavit : " pater eius ex quo hinc pro- fectus est, habet annos XIIII : non venit ad recipiendum fiham suam nee letteras pro ea misit. Puto quod mortuus est — nutrix ejus mortua est : neminem habeo emulum. Oecidameam et ornamentis ejus filiam meam ornabo." Et cum hec cogitasset, venit quidam de villa nomine Theophi- 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 303 lus, quern vocans ait: "si cupis piemium accipere, Tharsiam interfice." Aitvillicus: " quidpeccavitinnocens virgo ? " At ilia : " pessima est, et ideo mihi negare non debes. Fac, quod jubeo; et si non feceris, male tibi eveniet." Et ille : " die mihi, domina, qualiter hoc potest fieri." Que ait : " consuetudo ejus est, mox ut venerit de scolis, non prius sumere ci- bum, quam nutricis sue introierit monumentum. Ibi te cum pugione pa- ratum invefliat. Apprehende crines ejus a vertice et earn interfice et corpus ejus mitte in mare et libertatem tuam cum magno premio a me accipies." Villicus tulit pugionem. Gemens et flens ibat ad monumen- tum et ait: " heu, non merui libertatem nisi per sanguinis effusionem in- nocentis virginis ? " Puella autem rediens de scolis monumentum cum ampulla vini intravit, sicut solebat facere. Villicus impetum fecit et ap- prehendens crines puelle jactavit eam in terram. Dum autem volebat earn percutere, ait ad eum Tharsia : " o Theophile, quid peccavi contra te vel contra ahquem, ut moriar : " Ait villicus: " tu nihil peccasti, sed pater tuus, quite cum magna pecunia et ornamentis reliquit." Cui pu- ello : "peto, domine, ut, si nulla est spes vite mee, permittas me deum testari." Villicus ait: " testare ! Et deus ipse scit, quod coactus te inter- ficio." Ilia vero cum esset posita in orationem, venerunt pirate, et vi- dentes puellam su jugo mortis stare et hominem armatum volentem percutere eam, clamaverunt : " parce, crudelissime barbare ! Ilia est nos- tra preda, non tua victoria." At ille, ut talia audivit, fugiens post monu- mentum latuit in litore maris. Pirate vero rapiunt virginem, mare pet- unt. Villicus rediit ad dominam et ait : " quod jussisti factum est; tu vero, ut consulo, induas te lugubrem vestem et ego tecum, et effundamus lacrimas falsas in conspectu civium et dicemus eam ex gravi infirmitate defunctam." Stranguilio ut audivit, tremor et stupor invasit eum et dixit : " da ergo et mihi vestem lugubrem, ut lugeam, quia tali scelere sum involutus. Heu, quid faciam ! Pater puelle istam civitatem nau- fragium pertulit, bona perdidit et penuriam perpessus est, et restitutum •est ei malum pro bono ! Filiam suam, quam nobis commisit nutriendam, crudelis leena devoravit. Heu cecatus sum ! lugeam innocentem vir- ginem ! Vinctus sum ad pessimam venenosamque serpentem." Ele- vans oculos ad celum ait : " deus, tu scis, quia mundus sum a san- guine Tharsie, et requiras a Dyonisiade ! " Respexit uxorem suam et ait: " quomodo suffocasti filiam regis, inimica dei hominum- que obprobrium!" Ilia vero induit se et filiam suam lugubres ves- tes, falsasque lacrimas fundunt et clamabant coram civibus : " cives carissimi, ideo ad vos clamamus, quia spes oculorum nostrorum, Tharsia, quam vidistis, subito dolore defuncta est et nobis cruciatus et amaros Ac- tus reliquit. Quam digne sepelire fecimus." Tunc pergunt cives, ubi fig- uratum erat sepulchrum et pro meritis patris fabricabant loculum ex ere et scripserunt: " dii manes: cives Tharsie virgini pro beneficiis patris ejus sepulchrum ex ere coUatum fecerunt." Igitur qui puellam rapuer- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXXVII. 158. T. PRINTED JAN. 4, 1899. 304 SMYTH — PERICLES AXD APOLLOXIUS. [Oct. 7, ant, venerunt ad civitatem Machilenam. Deponitur ergo ilia inter ce- tera mancipia venalis. Audiens earn leno infaustissimus ac impurus ac dives contendere cepit, ut earn emeret. Sed Athanagora, princeps ejus- dem civitatis, videns earn nobilem, sapientem pulchramque obtulit de- cern sestercias auri. Leno ait: "ego dabo XX." Athanagora dixit: " ego XXX." Leno : " ego XL." Athanagora : " L." Leno : " LX." Athanagora: " LXX." Leno: " LXXX." Athanagora: " XC." Leno: " in present! C sestescias auri dabo." Et ait : " si quis amplius, X dabo supra." Athenagora ait: "ego, si cum lenone contendere voluero, ut unam emam, plures venditurus sum. Permittam eum emere, et cum prostituerit earn in lupanar, intrabo prius ad illam et eripiam nodum vir- ginitatis ejus, et erit mihi sicut emerim earn." Quid plura ? Perrexit cum lenone in salutatorium, ubi habuit Priapum aureum et gemmis ador- natum et ait : " puella, adora istum ! " Ait ilia : " nunquam tale ador- em ! " Et ait: "domine, numquid Lapsacenus es tu ? " Leno ait: "quare?" Et ilia : "quia Lapsaceni colunt Priapum." Leno ait: " nescis, misera, quia in domum lenonis avari incurristi ? " Puella prosternens se ad pedes ejus ait: "o miserere, domine, virginitati mee ! Ne prostituas hoc corpus sub tali turpi titulo." Cui leno ait: " nescis, quia apud lenonem et tortorem nee preces nee lacrime val- ent?" Tamen vocavit villicum puellarum et ait: " hec puella ornetur vestibus puellaribus preciosis, et scribatur ei titulus : " quicunque Thar- siam violaverit, mediam libram dabit ; postea ad singulos solidos patebit populo." Villicus fecit, quod jussum fuerat cum lenone. Tercia die an- tecedente turba cum symphonia deducitur ad lupanar. Sed Athanagora princeps civitatis primus ingreditur velato capite. Tharsia videns eum procidit ad pedes ejus et ait: "miserere mei, domine, propter deum ! Et per deum te adjuro, ne velis me violare ! Resiste libidini tue et audi casus infelicitatis mee et originem, unde sim, diligenter considera! " Cui cum universos casus suos exposuisset, princeps confusus et pietate plenus ait ei : " habeo et ego filiam tibi similem, de qua similes casus metuo." Hec dicens dedit ei XX aureos dicens : " ecce habes amplius quam vir- ginitatis propositum est. Die advenientibus, sicut mihi dixisti, et libera- beris ! " Puella profusis lacrimis ait : " ego pietati tue gracias ago. Et ne alicui narres, que a me audisti ! " Athanagora ait : " si narravero, filie mee, cum ad talem etatem penenerit, similem casum ne patiatur." Et cum lacrimis discessit. Cui exeunti obviavit ei alius et ait: " quomodo tibi convenit cum puella?" Ait princeps : " non potest melius : erat enim tristis." Intravit juvenis et puella more solito ostium claudit, Cui juvenis ait : " quantum dedit tibi princeps ? " Ait puella : " c|uadriginta aureos." At ille : " accipe integram libram auri !" Princeps audivit, ait : " quanto plus dabis, tanto plus plorabit." Puella nummos accepit, procidit ad pedes ejus et casus suos indicavit. Aporiatus juvenis ait: " domina, surge! Homines sumus. Casibus subjacemes." Hiis dictis exiit. Vidit itaque Athanagoram ridentem et ait illi : " magnus homo es I non habes, 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 305 cui lacrimas propines nisi mihi ?" Et jurabant, ne hec verba cuiquam proderent, et ceperunt adventum aliorum expectare. Venerunt multi. Dantes pecuniam intrabant, flentes exibant. Postea obtulit pecuniam le- noni dicens : " ecce precium virgini tatis mee ! Leno ait: "Vide, ut cotidie tantas pecunias afferas ! " Altera die iterum ait ad eum : " ecce precium virginitatis mee, quam lacrimis et precibus custodio." Iratus leno audiens, quod virgo esset, vocat villicum puellarum et ait : " due earn ad te et frange nodum virginitatis ejus!" Cumque eam villicus duxissetin cubiculum, dixit ad eam : " die mihi, si virgo es." At ilia: " quamdiu deus vult, virgo sum." At ille : " unde tantam tulist pecuniam ? " Puella ait : "lacrimis profusis exponens casus meos rogavi homines, ut misericordiam virginitatis mee haberent." Et prosternens se pedibus eius ait: " miserere mei, domine, subveni captive regis filie ! ne violes me ! " At ille : " leno est avarus : nescio, si possis virgo perman- ere." At ilia : " studiis liberalibus. Erudita sum et in genere musicali possum modulari. Due me in forum ! Ibi poteris facundiam meam au- dire : proponam questiones populo et proposita solvam et hac arte ap- plicabo pecunias cotidie." At ille : " mihi bene placet." Omnis populus cucurrit ad virginem videndam. At ilia aggreditur facundiam studiorum ; questiones sibi proponi jubet, omnes clare solvit. Tunc clamor populi factus est magnus circa eam et multam pecuniam a populo recepit. Athanagora vero illam integra virginitate ut unicam filiam custodiebat, ita ut eam donis multis villico commendaret. Cum hec ageren- tur, venit AppoUonius XIIIT anno jam transacto ad domum Stran- guilionis et Dyonisiadis in civitatem Tharsum. Ouem cum vidisset Stranguilio, perrexit rabido cursu dixitque uxori sue Dyonisiade : " dixisti Appollonium naufragium fecisse : ecce venit ad repetendam filiam suam I Quid dicturi sumus patri pro filia ? " Et ilia dixit: " miser vir et ego conjux ! Accipiamus vestes lugubres et perfundamus lacrim.as ! Et credet nobis, quod filia ejus morte naturali defuncta est." Cum hec ita dicerent, intravit AppoUonius. Ut vero vidit eos lugubri veste indutos, ait : " quare in adventu meo funditis lacrimas ? Credo, quod iste lacrime non sunt vestre sed mee." Ait mulier nequam : " utinam ad aures tuas alius et non ego aut conjux meus diceret, quod jam dicam ! Tharsia, filia tua, subito defuncta est." AppoUonius hoc audiens, totum corpus ejus contremuit, diuque defixus stetit. Tandem resumpto spiritu intuens mulierem ait : " o mulier, si filia mea defuncta est, ut dicis, numquid et pecunia ac vestes simulque ornamenta perierunt ? " Ait ilia: " aliqua sunt, aliqua perierunt." Et dixerunt : " crede nobis, quia credidimus, ut filiam tuam viventem invenires. Et ut scias nos non esse mentitos, habemus testimonium : cives enim nostri memores beneficiorum tuorum in proximo litore ex ere collato filie tue monumentum fecerunt, quod potes videre." AppoUonius credens eam esse defunctam ad famulos ait: "toUite hec, famuli, et ferte ad navem ! Ego vadamj ad filie mee monumentum." Legit titulum sicut superius est scriptum. 306 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, Stetit quasi extra se maledicens oculos proprios et ait: "o cru- deles oculi, potuistis titulum filie mee cemere, non potuistis la- crimas fundere ! " Hiis dictis ad navem perrexit et ait famulis suis : "projicite me, quero, in profunditatem navis ; cupio enim in undis exhalare spiritum." Et dum prosperis navigat ventis Tyrum reversurus, siibito mutatum est pelagus, et per diversa maris discrimina naves jacta- bantur. Omnibus autem deum rogantibus ad Machilenam civitatem, in qua erat filia sua Tharsia, venerunt. Gubernator autem cum omnibus magnum plausum dedit. Ait Appollonius : " quis sonus hilaritatis aures mea»percussit ? " Ait gubernator: " gaude, domine, quia hodie Neptu- nalia celebrantur." Appollonius ingemuit et ait : " et omnes diem festum celebrent preter me!" Tunc vocavit dispensatorem suum et ait ei : " sufficiat famulis meis pena mea ac dolor — dona eis X aureos, et emant, si que voluerint, et diem festum celebrent. Et quicunque vocaverit me vel gaudium mihi fecerit, crura illorum frangi jubeo." Dispensator itaque emit necessaria et rediit ad navem. Cum igitur inter omnes naves navis Appollonii honoracior esset, cum magno convivio ceteris melius celebrant naute Appollonii, Athenagora, qui Tharsiuni diligebat, juxta navem in litore ambulabat viditque navem Appollonii et ait: "amici, ecce navis ista mihi placet, quam video decenter esse paratam." Naute, ut audiunt suam navem laudari, dixerunt ei : "o domine, rogamus, in navem nos- tram ascendatis." Et ille : "mihi placet." Ascendit et libenti animo discubuit posiutque decem aureos in mensa et ait : " ecce, ne frustra me invitaveritis ! " Et dixerunt : " domine regraciamur vobis." Cum autem princeps vidisset omnes discumbentes, ait: "quis est dominus navis ? " Ait gubernator : " dominus navis in luctu moratur, jacet inferius et opsti- nat : in mari conjugem perdidit et in terra filiam." Athanagora ait uni servo, Ardalio nomine : " dabo tibi duos aureos ; tantum descende et die ei: " rogat te princeps civitatis hujus : procede de tenebris ad lucem ! " Ait juvenis : " non possum aureis tuis crura mea reparare. Ouere alium, quia jussit, ut quicunque eum appellaverit, crura ejus frangantur." Athanagora ait: "banc legem vobis constituit, non mihi; ego autem descendam ad eum. Dicito mihi, quis vocatur." At ille: "Appollonius." Audito hoc nomine ait intra se : " et Tharsia appellavit patrem suum Appollonium." Descendit ad eum. Quern ut vidit barba, capite squali- dum, submissa voce dixit : " ave AppoUoni ! " Appollonius ut audivit, putans se ab aliquo servorum suoruni appellari, turbulento vultu respi- ciens vidit ignotum hominem, honestum et decorum. Siluit. Ait prin- ceps : "scio te mirari, quod ego ignotus te appellavi. Disce, quia prin- ceps sum hujus civitatis, Athanagora nomine. Descendi ad litus ad naves contuendas, inter ceteras vidi navem tuam decenter ornatam et amavi aspectum eius. Invitatus eram a nautis tuis. Ascendi et libenti animo discubui. Inquisivi dominum navis. Quern dixerunt in luctu grandi esse ; quod et video. Propter quod ad te descendi, ut de tenebris producerem te ad lucem. Spero autem, quia dabit tibi deus 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 307 post luctum gaudium." Appollonius levavit caput et ait: "quisquis es, domine, vade in pace ! Ego autem non sum dignus epulari et ideo amplius vivere nolo." Athanagora confusus ascendit in superiora navis et dixit: "non valeo persuadere domino vestro, ut ad lucem exeat. Quid faciam, ut revocem a proposito mortis?" Vocavit unum de pueris suis et ait: "vade ad lenonem et roga eum, ut mittat ad me Tliarsiam. Habet enim sapienciam et sermonem suavem ; potest eum forsitan exhortari, ne talis taliter moriatur." Venit igitur puella ad navem, ad quam ait Athanagora : " veni ad me Tharsia domina ! Hie est necessaria ars studiorum tuorum, ut consoleris dominum navis in tenebris sedentem et ut provoces eum exire ad lucem, quia nimis dolet pro conjuge sua et filia. Accede ergo ad eum et suade, ut ad lucem veniat, quia forte deus per te luctum suum in gaudium convertet. Si enim hoc poteris facere, dabo tibi XXX sestercias auri et totidem argenti et XXX dies redimam te a lenone.' Puella hec audiens constanter ad eum descendit et humili voce salutavit eum dicens : "salve, quicunque es, salve et letare ! Scias, quia innocens virgo, que virginitatem suam inter naufragia sua et castitatem inviolatam conservavit, te salutat." Tunc in carminibus cepit modulata voce cantare in magna dulcedine, intantum quod mirabatur Appollonius. Et dixit cantando ea que hie sequuntur : " Per sortes gradior, sed sortum conscia non sum, Sic spinis rosa non scit violari et ullis. Corruit et raptor gladii ferientis ab ictu. Tradita lenoni non sum violata pudore. Vulnera cessassent animi, lacrimeque deessent, Nulla etenim melior si nossem certa parentes. Unica regalis generis sum stirpe creata. Ipsa jubente jleo letari credo aliquando. Fuge modo lacrimas, curam dissolve molestam, Redde polo faciem mentemque ad sidera tolle ! Jam deus est hominum plasmator, rector et auctor : Non sniet has lacrimas casso finire labore!" Ad hec Appollonius levavit oculos et, ut vidit puellam, engemuit et ait : " heu mihi misero ! quamdiu luctabor ? Gratias ago prudencie tue et nolilitati. Hanc vicem rependo, ut memor tui sim. Ouando letari licet, regni mei viribus levabor : forsitan, ut dicis, regio genere orta est, nata- libus parentum tuorum representaberis. Nunc accipe centum aureos et recede ! Noli me appellare ; recenti enim luctu renovata calamitate tabesco !" Puella accepds aureis abire cepit. Et ait ad eam Athanagora : " quo vadis, Tharsia ? Sine effectu laborasti ? Non potuisti facere misericordiam ac subvenire homini interhcienti se .'*" Et ait Tharsia : " omnia, quecunque potui, feci, et datis mihi centum aureis abire rogavit." Athanagora ait- 308 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7 " dabo tibi ducentos, descende et redde ei, quos dedit, et die: " salutem tuam quero, non pecuniam." Descendens Tharsia sedit juxta eum et ait : " si in isto squalore manere destinasti, permitte me tecum sermoci- nari. Si ergo parabolarum mearum nodos absolveris, vadam; sin, alias, refundam tibi pecuniam et abscedam." Tunc AppoUonius, ne reciperet pecuniam, sed eciam puelle prudentes ne negaret sermones, ait: "licet in malis meis nulla cura mihi suppetat nisi flendi et lugendi, tamen, ne ornamento prudencie tue caream, die, quod interrogatura es, et abscede! Peto enim, ut fletibus meis spacium tribuas." Ait Tharsia : jam audito me : Est domus in terris, que nobis clausa resultat. Ipsa domus resonat, tacitus sed non sonat hospes. Ambo tamen currunt, hospes simul et domus una. Et ait : " si rex es, ut dicis, convenit te mihi esse prudenciorem : solve questionem !" Ait AppoUonius: " ut scias me non esse mentitum : domus, que in terra resonat, unda est, hospes tacitus piscis est, qui cum domo sua currit." At ilia : Longa feror velox formose filia silve, Innumera pariter comitum stipante caterva, Curro vias multas, vestigia nulla relinquo. AppoUonius ait : " o si licitum esset, ostenderem tibi multa, que ignoras. Tamen respondebo questionibus tuis ; miror te tam tenera etate mirifica prudencia esse imbutam. Namque arbor stipata catervis, vias multas currens et vestigia nulla relinquens, navis est." Et addidit puella: Per totas edes innoxius pertransit ignis. Est calor in medio magnus, quern nemo removit, Non est nuda domus, nudus sed convenit hospes. Si luctum poneres, innocens intrares in ignes. AppoUonius ait : " intrarem balneum, ubi hinc inde flamme per tabulas surgunt. Nuda domus, in qua nihil intus est, nudus hospes convenit, nudus sudabit." Cumque hec et similia dicerent, puella misit se super AppoUonium et distractis manibus amplexebatur eum dicens ei : " exaudi vocem deprecantis, respice virginem, quia virum talis prudencie mori nefarium est. Si conjugem desideras : deus ex sua graeia tibi restituat ; si filiam : salvam, quam defunctam dicis, invenire poteris. Pre gaudio oportet te vivere !" AppoUonius, cum verba hec audisset, in iraeundiam versus est, surrexit et puellam eum pede percussit. Impulsa vero virgo cecedit et gene eius rupte cepit sanguis effluere. Conturbata virgo cepit flere et dixit: " o deus, conditar celorum, vide afflictionem meam ! Nata sum inter fluetus et proeellas maris, mater mea doloribus constricta de- functa est, et sepultura est ei negata in terris. Ornata a patre meo et in loculo posita cum XX sisterciis auri mari tradita est. Ego infelix Stran- 1898.] SMYTH — PERICLES AXD APOLLOXIUS. 309 guilioni et iDyonisiadi, impiissimis hominibus, a patre meo sum tradita cum ornamentis et regalibus vestibus. Et per Dyonisiadem veni, quia jussa sum a servis eorum occidi. Tandem petivi, ut deum invocarem, antequam me occideret : mihi concessit. Piratis supervenientibus rapta sum (et qui occidere me volebat, fugam petiit) et in hunc locum deducta. Et deus, quando ei placet, reddet me Appollonio patri meo !" Appollonius audiens omnia hec signa certissima, exclamavit voce magna et ait : " o domine misericors, qui conspicis celum et abyssum et omnia secreta patefacis, benedictum sit nomen tuum !" Cum hec dixisset, cecidit super amplexus Tharsie, filie sue, et osculatus est eam et pre gaudio flevit amare et ait: " o dulcissima nata mea et unica, dimidium anime mee! Non moriar propter te ; in veni propter quam volebam mori !" Alta voce clamabat dicens : " currite, famuli ! currite, amici ! currite omnes, et miserie mee finem imponite ! Inveni quam perdideram, scilicet unicam filiam meam." Audito clamore famuli cucurrerunt, cucurrit inter illos Athanagora princeps. Et descendentibus illis in navim invenerunt eum flentem pre gaudio super collum filie sue et dicentem : " ecce filia mea, quam lugeo, dimidium anime mee. Jam volo vivere!" Omnes pre gaudio cum eo flebant. Tunc erigens se Appollonius, projectis vestibus lugubribus indutus est vestibus mundissimis. Et omnes dixerunt : " o domine, quam similis est vobis filia vestra ! Si non esset aliud experi- mentum, sufficeret ejus similitudo ad probandum, eam esse filiam ves- tram." Tunc filia bis, ter, quater osculata est patrem et ait: "o pater, benedictus sit deus, qui mihi gratiam dedit, quod te videre potero, tecum vivere, tecum mori !" Et narravit ei, quomodo a lenone comparata et in lupanari est posita, et quomodo deus suam virginitatem custodivit. Audiens hec Athanagora, timens, ne alteri filiam in uxorem daret, misit se ad pedes Appollonii dicens: "adjuro te per deum vivum, qui te patrem filie restituit, ne alteri des filiam in conjugem nisi mihi. Sum enim princeps hujus civitatis, meo auxilio virgo permansit et me duce te patrem agnovit." Cui Appollonius ait: "non possum tibi esse con- trarius, quia multa pro filia mea fecisli. Et ideo opto, ut sic uxor tua. Tunc restat, ut vindicem me a lenone, qui tot injurias fecit filie mee." His auditis Athanagora civitatem intravit convocatisque civibus dixit : " ne pereat civitas propter unum impium ! Sciatis Appollonium regem, patrem Tharsie ad hoc venisse. Ecce classes navium properant cum grandi exercitu ad destruendam civitatem propter lenonem, qui filiam suam Tharsiam in lupanari constituit." Hiis dictis concursus magnus lactus est et tanta commotio populi, ut nee viri nee femine remanerent, quin currerent omnes ad Appollonium regem videndo eum et misericor- diam petendo. Ait Athanagora : " consulo ad hoc, ut, ne destruatur civitas, deducatur ad eum leno." Captus est statim leno et ligatis mani- bus a tergo deducitur ad regem. Appollonius, regia veste indutus, tonso capite, diadema imposuit capiti suo, tribunal ascendit cum filia et civibus dixit : " videtis Tharsiam virginem a patre suo hodie cognitam, quam 310 SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. [Oct. 7, cupidissimus leno, quantum erat in eo, . . . . ejus corruptionem et con- fusionem perpetuam procurabat nee a malicia sua prece nee precio desistere volebat. Facite ergo filie mee vindictam !" Omnes una voce dixerunt : " domine, leno vivus comburatur, et divicie eius puelle dentur." Protinus adducitur leno et coram omnibus in igne ponitur et totaliter comburitur. Tharsia ait villico : " dono tibi libertatem, quia beneficio tuo et civium virgo permansi." Et donavit ei ducentos aureos et libertatem. Libertatem vero cunctis puellis coram se presentatis per- donavit et dixit : " quidcunque de corpore vestro actenus .... servistis, ex hoc libere estote." Appollonius loquitur ad populum dicens : " gratias vobis reddo de beneficiis vestris mihi et filie mee factis. Nunc ergo tribuo vobis auri pondera quinquaginta." Illi ei capita sua inclinabant gracias referentes. Gives vero statuam Appollonii in medio civitatis fecerunt et in basi scripserunt. " Tyrio Appollonio, restauratori domuum nostrarum, et Tharsie, sanctissime filie ejus, virgini." Intra paucos dies Appollonius tradidit filiam suam in conjugem Athanagore cum ingenti leticia totius civitatis. Et cum genero et filia navigans, cum omnibus suis volens per Tharsum profiscendo in patriam suam ire, in sompnis admoni- tus est per angelum, ut Ephesum descenderet et intraret templum Ephesiorum cum filia et genero suo ibique omnes casus suos alta voce exponeret, quos passus esset a juventute sua. Postea veniret Tharsum et vindicaret filiam suam. Appollonius expergefactus omnia indicavit genero et filie sue. Et illi dixerunt: " fac, domine, quod tibi videtur."^ Tunc jussit gubernatori navigare Ephesum. Qui cum descendisset ratim, cum suis templum petiit, ubi conjux sua inter sacerdotes sancte vixit. Rogavit, ut templum ei aperiretur. Quod et factum est. Hec audiens uxor eius, quod quidam rex venerat cum filia et genero, gemmis regalibus ornavit caput suum et induit se vesta purpurea et cum honesto comitatu templum intravit. Erat enim nimis pulchra et ob nimium castitatis amo- rem asserebant omnes nuUam tam gratam esse virginem. Quam videns Appollonius in nuUo noticiam eius habebat. Misit se ad pedes eius cum filia sua et genero ; tantus enim splendor eius pulchritudinis imminebat, ut ipsa Diana esse videntibus putaretur. Statim in templo optulit munera pre- ciosa. Et post hec cepit Appollonius dicere, sicut ei angelus in sompnis dixerat : "ego ab adolescencia rex, natus Tyrus, Appollonius nominatus, cum ad omnem scientiam pervenissem, regis iniqui Antiochi questionem exsolvi, ut eius filiam acciperem. Ille vero eam defloraverat ac in impietate sua continue tenuit : et me occidere conabatur. Fugam petii et in mari omnia perdidi. Et post hec a rege Altistrate gratissime susceptus intan- tum eius benevolentiam sum expertus, ut fiHam suam mihi in uxorem daret. Deinde mortuo Antiocho cum properarem ad regnum percipien- dum, uxorem meam mecum duxi. Hanc filiam in mari peperit uxor mea, de cujus partu defuncta est. Quam ego cum XX sisterciis auri in loculo clausam in mare misi, ut inventa digne sepeliretur. Et hanc filiam meam nutriendam nequissimus hominibus commendavi et superiores 1S98.] SMYTH — PERICLES AND APOLLONIUS. 311 Egipti partes pecii. Quarto autem decimo anno adveniens, ut filiam meam expeterem, dixerunt earn esse defunctam. Et dum credidi, in luctu vixi et in lugiibribus veslibus, et mori cupiens mihi fiiia mea red- dita est," Cum hec et hiis similia narraret, Altistratis regis filia, uxor ipsius, levavit se et rapuit eum in amplexus volensque eum osculari. Appollonius autem repulit eam a se cum indignacione, ignorans, quod uxor'sua esset. At ilia cum lacrimis dicebat : " o domine mi, dimidium anime mee, cur sic agis ? Ego sum conjux tua, Altistratis regis lilia, et tu es Tyrius Appollonius, maritus et dominus meus, tu es magister meus, qui me docuisti, tu es naufragus, quem amavi non causa libidinis sed sapiencie." Appollonius hec audiens statim eius noticiam habebat, cecidit super collum eius et pre gaudio lacrimas emisit dicens : "bene- dictus sit Altissimus, qui mihi uxorem cum filia reddidit !" At ilia : " ubi est filia mea ?" Et ipse ostendens Tharsiam dixit : " hec est filia nostra, quam vides." Ilia vero osculata est eam. Fit leticia magna in tota civitate et in circuitu : quod rex Appollonius uxorem suam in templo invenit, famatum est, Appollonius ascendit navim cum uxore et filia et genero, revertentes ad patriam suam. Veniens igilur Appollonius Antiochiam regnum sibi reservatum recepit et^ pergens Tyrum constituit in locum suum Anthanagoram generum suum, Deinde cum ipso genero et filia sua et cum exercilu regio venio Tharsum jussit comprehendere Dyonisiadem et Stranguilionem et duci ante se et coram omnibus civi- bus ait : " cives Tharsenses, numquid ego alicui vestrum exstiti ingratus ?" Omnes dixerunt: "non, domine! Parati sumus pro vobis mori, Hec statua est facta in signum, quia nos amorte salvastis." Appollonius ait : " commendavi filiam meam Stranguilioni et Dyonisiadi uxori sue, et eam mihi reddere noluerunt," Infelix mulier ait: "bone domine, numquid non tu ipse titulum monumenti eius legisti ?" Appollonius jussit venire filiam suam Tharsiam in presencia omnium, Et Tharsia maledixit mulieri et dixit: " ave, salutat te Tharsia ab inferis revocata!" Infelix mulier videns eam toto corpore contremuit, Cives mirabantur et gaude- bant. Et jussit Tharsia venire villicum, cui dixit: " Theophile, ut possit tibi ignosci, clara voce responde : quis me interficiendam tibi obli- gavit ?" Tunc cives rapuerunt Stranguilionem et Dyonisiadem et extra civitatem trahentes lapidaverunt, volentes et Theophilum occidere. Sed Tharsia eum a morte liberavit. Et dixit : " nisi mihi spacium ad orandum dedisset, modo eum non defenderem," Appollonius dedit munera ad restaurandam civitatem, Et moratus est ibi tribus mensibus, Navi- gans inde Pentapolim civitatem curiam ingreditur ad Altistratem regem. Gaudens rex vero senex factus est, vidit filiam suam et neptem cum marito suo, rege. Per integrum annum letanter insimul permanserunt. Post hec moritur perfecta etate in manibus eorum, dimittens dimidieta- tem regni sui Appollonio et medietatem filie sue. Omnibus hiis peractis dum ambularet Appollonius juxta mare, vidit piscatorem, qui eum post naufragium recepit, Jussitque eum apprehendere et ad palatium duci. 312 MILLER — ON THE QUATEENION GROUP. [Oct. 7, Videns piscator a militibus se comprehendi putavit occidi. Ingressus Appollonius jussit eum adduci ad se et ait: "hie est paranymphus meus, qui mihi post naufragium opem dedit et ad civitatem venire ostendit." Et dicit ei : "ego sum Tyrius Appollonius." Et jussit sibi dan CC sistercias argenti, servos et ancillas, et fecit eum comiteni suum, quamdiu vixit. Elamitus vero, qui ei de Antiocho nunciavit, procidens ad pedes Appollonii .... et ait: " domine, memor esto Elamiti servi tui !" Appollonius apprehensa manu eius erexit eum fecitque eum divitem et ordinavit comitem. Hiis expletis genuit Appollonius fi-lium de conjuge sua, quem in loco avi sui Altistratis constituit regem. Vixit vero Appollonius cum conjuge sua annos LXXIV et tenuit regnum Antioche et Tyri et Tyrenensium quiete ac feliciter. Casus suos ipse descripsit, ipse duo volumina perfecit, unum in templo Ephesiorum, alterum in sua bibliotheca coUocavit. Et defunctus est et perrexit ad vitam eternam, ad quam vitam nos perducat, qui sine tine vivit et regnat Amen. ON THE QUATERNION GROUP. BY G. A. MILLER, PH.D. {Read Octoher 7, ISDS.) Although the quaternion group {Q) has received some attention/ yet many of the properties of this important group remain to be investigated. It is the object of this paper to enter upon the study of some of these group properties after stating the known principles which underlie the investigations that follow. We shall also deter- mine the different ways in which Q may be represented as a substi- tution group. It is well known that every group of a finite order may be repre- sented as a regular substitution group and that any two regular substitution groups which are simply isomorphic are also conjugate. A complete list of the regular substitution groups of order g must therefore include every possible group of this order and no group can occur twice in such a list. In following Prof. Cayley's ^ Dedekind, Maiheniatische Annalen, 1S97, ^^^' xlviii, pp. 549-552. 1898.] MILLER — OX THE QUATERNION GROUP. 313 notation we represent Q as a. regular substitution group in the fol- lowing manner : ^ I ae. bf. eg. dh aceg. hdfh agec. hhfd abef. chgd afeb. cdgh adeh. bgfc ahed. befg The Different Ways in Which Q May be Represented AS A Substitution Group. We observe, in the first place, that Q cannot be represented as a non-regular transitive substitution group. If such a representation were possible Q would have to contain some subgroup of a prime order that is not self-conjugate." As it contains only one subgroup of order 2 this must clearly be self-conjugate. Hence we observe that there is only one transitive substitution group that is simply iso- morphic to Q. It is known that the number of the intransitive substitution groups that are simply isomorphic to a given group is an increasing function of the degree, which becomes infinite when the degree becomes infinite. We proceed to determine the nature of this function in the present case. Since every group whose order is the square of a prime number is Abelian, a substitution group which is simply isomorphic to Q must contain at least one transitive con- stituent of order 8 and its degree must be 2 71, n being a positive integer greater than 3. We have seen that Q contains only one subgroup of order 2. With respect to this it is isomorphic to the four-group, since this subgroup contains the square of each one of its operators. As a subgroup whose order is one-half of the order of the entire group must always be self-conjugate, Q contains three self-conjugate sub- groups of order 4. Since none of these three subgroups is charac- teristic^ they must be transformed into each other by the largest 1 Cayley, Quarterly Journal of Mathematics, 1891, Vol. xxv, p, 144. - Cf. Dyck, Alathematische Annalen, 1883, Vol. xxii, p, 90, It may be remarked that the statement on p. 10 1 of this article that a group which can be represented only in the regular form contains only self-conjugate subgroups is not quite correct, as may also be inferred from other parts of the same article. 3 Frobenius, Berliner Sitziingsberichte, 1895, p. 183. 314 MILLER — ON THE QUATERNION GROUP. [Oct. 7, group that contains ^ as a self-conjugate subgroup. Hence we need to consider only one of these three subgroups in connection with tlie study of the intransitive substitution groups that are simply isomorphic to Q. We may now state the problem of finding all the substitution groups that are simply isomorphic to Q in the following manner. Such a group contains a transitive constituents of order 8, where a is an integer greater than o. Its other constituents form a group whose order is either 4 or 2. If this order is four these constitu- ents must form the four-group. If it is two these can form only one group for a given set of values off/ and a. Hence we observe that the number of quaternion substitution groups of degree 2 n, « > 3, which contain no constituent group of order 4 is a.^^, where fli is the largest integral value oi x that satisfies the relation: n X <^ . To find the number of these groups that contain a constituent of order 4 we may first find the number of those that contain only one transitive constituent of order 8, then the number of those that contain two such constituents, etc. The sum of these numbers is the number required. Each of these numbers may be directly found by means of the following formula/ in which tV is the num- ber of all the possible substitution groups of order 4 and degree 2 «, m is any positive integer, and a^ is the largest value of y that satisfies the relation n y <^2 When n = 6 m, N ^= m {^ ni- -^ 6 m -\- 1) -}- a^ ^ , T,T ^'^ ^^ ^'^' 4- 15 ^^^ + 5) , n^=^ d jn -\- 2, N ^^ -i^ 7n {in -{- i) {tti -\- 2) -\- \ -^ a^ (2 m -f I) (3 ^fi' ■\- ^^n A^ 4) « = 6 w -f 3, N ^=^ ^ + «! ;2 =r 6 w + 4, iV^ r=r (w + i) (3 ?;r -f 9 w -f- 4) -[- a^ ,. 3 {^n + I) (2 m'' -f 7 m + 4) « = 6 ;;2 -L- 5, N= — — — — -f a^ 1 Miller, Philosophical Alagazine, 1896, Vol. xli, p. 437, 1898.] MILLER — OX THE QUATERNIOX GROUP. dlo If we add ao to the sum of the numbers obtained by means of these formulas we obtain the total number of the substitution groups of degree 2 71 that are simply isomorphic to Q. Among these substitution groups the given regular group is especially con- venient for the study of the properties of Q. In what follows we shall, therefore, suppose Q written in this way unless the contrary is explicitly stated. It is known that all the substitutions that involve no more than g letters and are commutative to every substitution of a regular group involving the same g letters form a group which is conjugate to the regular group. ^ This conjugate of the given regular group con- tains the following substitutions : I ae. bf. eg. dh aceg. bhfd agec. bdfh abef, cdgh afeb. chgd ad eh. bcfg ahed. bgfc One of the 192 substitutions in these 8 letters that transform one of these two regular groups into the other is the transposition dh. The Group of Isomorphisms of Q. The largest group in these eight letters that transforms one of the two given regular groups into itself must be transitive, since it includes a regular group. Its subgroup which includes all its substitutions that do not involve a given letter is the group of isomorphisms of Q. We proceed to prove that this is simply iso- morphic to the symmetric group of order 24. To prove this we observe that an operator of order 4 may be made to corre- spond to any other operator of this order in a simple isomorphism of <2 to itself. Hence the first correspondence can be effected in 6 ways and the second can evidently be effected in 4 ways, so that the group of isomorphisms must be of order 24. This group of isomorphisms may be represented as a transitive substitution group of degree 6, since there are 6 operators of order ^ Jordan, Traite des Substitutions ^ p. 60. 316 MILLER — OX THE QUATERNION GROUP. [Oct. 7, 4 that can be made to correspond and these generate Q. As this substitution group cannot contain a substitution whose degree is less than 4 and the transitive groups of degree 6 and order 24 that have this property are simply isomorphic tg the symmetric group of this order it follows directly that the group of isomorphis?7i5 of Q is the symmetric group of order 24 and that the group of cogredient isc- vi07phisms is its s e If -co7tj agate subgroup of order 4. There are two transitive groups of degree 6 that are simply iso- morphic to the symmetric group of order 24. In one of these the subgroup which contains all the substitutions that do not include a given element is the cyclical group of order 4 while in the other it is the four-group. It remains to determine which of these two groups is the substitution group of isomorphisms of Q. This may be easily done by making Q simply isomorphic to itself in the fol- lowing manner : I I abef chgd ad eh. hfc ae. If. eg. dh ae. bf. eg. dh afeb. cdgh ahed. bcfg aceg. bdfh aceg. bdfh ad eh. bgfc afeb. cdgh agec. bhfd agec. bhfd ahed. bcfg abef. chgd The substitution which corresponds to this isomorphism is given by the second columns of letters ; hence it is bdfh and the substi- tution group of isomorphisms of Q is the one which Prof. Cayley represents by (=t abcdefja^-^ It is known that Q is simply isomorphic to the eight unities (i, — I, i, — i, j, — -j, k, — k) of the quaternioji mwiber system. As Q can be made simply isomorphic to itself in 24 different ways the simple isomorphism of Q to these unities or of these unities to themselves may also be written in 24 ways. The following is one of these ways : ae. bf. eg. dh aceg. bdfh agec. bhfd abef. chgd J afeb. cdgh —J ad eh. bgfc k ahed. bcfg k It may be very easily verified that the following relations are 1 Quarterly foinnal of Mathematics, 1891, Vol. xxv, p. 80. 1898.] MILLER — ON THE QUATERNION GROUP. 317 satisfied by the substitutions which correspond to the unities that are employed.^ tj =^ k ji = — k /- = — I jk --= i kj = — / / = -i ki=} /k = -j Iz- =^ I J k -J k ■k — / k i These relations between the quaternion unities could also have been obtained directly by means of the corresponding substitutions. As any relation between quaternion unities remains true if we re- place all these unities by those which correspond to them in any simple isomorphism of their group to itself, it follows directly that a knowledge of the group of isomorphisms of this group to itself is of great utility in transforming quaternion relations j e. g., from the simple isomorphism I I I — I I — I I ; J — i i —j it follows that / may be replaced by j, j by k, and k by i at the same time. In other words, we may always perform the substitu- tion ijk. ( — i) ( — /) ( — /^) on the three imaginary unities of quater- nions. By means of this substitution we can obtain each of the three relations given above from any one of the set. The twenty- # four possible substitutions in these imaginary unities can be directly obtained from the given group of isomorphisms of Q. They are the following : ijk. (-/) {-j) (-k) j (-k) (-j) k ij. {-i) (-j). k (- k) -0- J (-J) i (-» (-^)- Jk (-0 jk {-J) {-k) i (-/). /k. {-j) (-k) -/). k (-k) ij i—k). k (—i) (— » ik (— /) {—k) i (-0. j i—k). {—j) k -j). k {—k) i {—j) k.j (—k) (-i) i (—k) (~i) k i (—j).j (_/). k (—k) ikj. (-0 i—k) (—j) i (—j) {—i)j ik.j i-j), {—i) {—k) ik (—/)• j (—0 (—k) ij (-0 i—j) i {-k).j {—j). k (-i) i{-k){-j)-j{-i)k i{-k)j,k{-j){-i) when an equation between the quaternion unities admits a of these 1 Cf Tail's Quaternion, 1890, p. 46. 318 MILLER — 0>r THE QUATERNION GROUP. [Oct. 7, substitutions these substitutions must form a subgroup of this group of isomorphism and the given equation must assume 24 -^ a dif- ferent forms which are equally true in case it is transformed by all these substitutions, e. g., each of the three equations in the last set given above admits a cyclical subgroup of order 4. Hence each of these equations gives rise to 24 -f- 4 = 6 true equations. In addition to the three that have been given we have ( — if= {—Jf^= We have already noticed that the group of cogredient isomor- phisms of ^ is the four-group. Hence Q has only two operators that are commutative to each one of its operators. ' These are evi- dently the operators which correspond to i and — i in the quater- nion unities. These two unities are therefore the only ones in the quarternion number system that are commutative to all the numbers of the system. It need scarcely be remarked that any one of the three cyclical subgroups of order 4 contained in Q may correspond to the unities of the ordinary complex number system. Relation Between the Quaternion Group and the Hamil- TONiAN Groups. One of the most remarkable properties of the quaternion group is that each of its subgroups is self-conjugate. Dedekind has called all the groups which have this property Hamiltoniaji groups and he has pointed out that the quaternion group is of fundamen- tal importance in the study of the Hamiltonian groups.^ It has recently been proved that every Hamiltonian group is the direct product of an Abelian group of an odd order and a Hamiltonian group of order 2", and that there is one and only one Hamiltonian group of order 2" for every integer value of a greater than 2? It is easy to see that the direct product of the quaternion group and the Abelian group of order 2""^ which contains 2""' — i operators of order 2 is Hamiltonian. Since there is only one Hamiltonian group of this order it follows that every such Hamil- tonian group may be constructed in this manner. Hence we have that every Hamilto7iian group whose order is divisible by 2", but not 2""^^ t7iust be the direct product of some Abelian group of an odd order, the Abelian group of order 2""^ which contains 2*^"^ — i operators of order 2, and the quaternion group. 1 Dedekind, loc. cit. 2 Miller, Comptes Rendus, 1898, Vol. cxxvi, p. 1406. "J898.J MINUTES . 319 While the direct product of the quaternion group and any Abelian group of an odd order is always a Hamiltonian group, the direct product of the quaternion group and an Abelian group whose order is divisible by a power of 2 is only Hamiltonian when the latter group contains no operator whose order is divisible 4. This follows directly from the fact that the group generated by the product of an operator of order 4 in the Hamiltonian group and any operator in such an Abelian group must be self- conjugate. We may determine the number of the quaternion groups that are contained in a Hamiltonian group whose order is divisible by 2' without being divisible by 2*"^^ in the following manner. Such a group contains a single subgroup ^ of order 2". This subgroup in- cludes 3 times 2"~^ operators of order 4. Each quaternion subgroup includes two of the operators of order 4 that are included in a sub- group of order 2"".^ which involves only 2""^ operators of order 4. Hence there are 2^' * quaternion subgroups in the given Hamiltonian group. All of these have the commutator subgroup of the entire group in common. In other words, the commutator subgroup of a Hamiltonian group is the same as that of any one of its quaternion ■subgroups. Cornell University, June, 1898, Stated Meeting, October ?>1, 1898. Vice-President Sellers in the Chair. Present, 12 members. Prof. Lighter Witmer, a newly elected m^ember, was pre- f;ented to the Chair, and took his seat. The minutes of the last stated meeting were read and approved . Dr. Frazer read a letter from the International Geological Congress in regard to the establishment of an international floating institute, and offered the following resolution : Resolved, That the President of the Society be requested to memorialize Congress in favor of an appropriation in aid of the in- * Sylow, Mathematische AnnaUn, 1872, Vol. v, p. 584. PROC. AMEB. PHILOS, SOC. XXXVII. 158. U. PRINTED FEB. 23, 1899. 320 MINUTES. [Oct. 21, vestigations proposed at the meeting of the International Geological Congress held at St. Petersburg, Russia, in August, 1897, and that the President be requested to communicate to the Secretary of State what had been done at the St. Petersburg Congress in respect of establishing an international floating institute for the purposes named in the action of that Congress, and to request the Secretary of State to bring the subject to the attention of the proper commit- tees of Congress. which resolution, on his motion, was referred to the Officers and Council. The Librarian presented a list of the donations to the Library, and called special attention to a valuable gift from Mr. Henry Pettit, of five volumes of contemporaneous clip- pings, illustrating the day-to-day history of the Hispano- American War ; and of two volumes of V Illustration^ J^ljr 1870-July, 1871, being the numbers issued in Paris during the Commune. Mr. Pettit, by invitation, made some interesting remarks in connection with this donation. Announcement was made of the decease of Prof. Gabriel de Mortillet, of St. Germain-en-Laye, France, who was elected to membership on February 15, 1895. Prof. Albert H. Smyth read a paper on " Thomas Moore in Philadelphia," which was discussed by Messrs. Dickson and Wood. A paper by Dr. Daniel G. Brinton was presented on " Two Unclassified Eecent Vocabularies from South America.'' Pending nominations for membership Nos. 1432, 1464, 1469, 1470, 1471, 1472, and ncAV nominations Nos. 1473 and 1474 were read. The rough minutes were read, and the Society was adjourned b}^ the presiding officer. IMfl.] BRINTON — VOCABULARIES FROM SOUTH AMERICA. 321 ON TWO UNCLASSIFIED RECENT VOCABULARIES FROM SOUTH AMERICA. BY DANIEL G. BRINTOX, M.D. {Read October 21, 1808.) The time has' almost passed when any South American Indian can speak in an unknown tongue. The hundreds and even thou- sands of '* radically distinct " languages which the early travelers and missionaries supposed to exist on that continent have been r.educed to about sixty linguistic stocks, with a fair prospect of further diminution when materials for analysis become available. To aid in this work it is important that each vocabulary collected by travelers be scrutinized and referred to its appropriate stock, if known, and, if not, that it be noted for further consideration. In pursuance of this, I shall briefly examine two vocabularies from South America which have been published within the last year, but which have not been referred by the writers who obtained them to any of the leading stocks. The first is furnished by Mr. A. Rimbach, in his ''Reise ini Gebiet des oberen Amazonas," printed in the Zeitschrift der Gesellschaft filr Erdkunde, Berlin, 1897, p. 379. He calls it the " Gay " language, and adds that he obtained it from some Andoas Indians whom he encountered on the lower reaches of the river Pastaza. He gives only five words, which are as follows : Sun, mpandn. Eye, genamie. House, ite. Water, muaka. Path, nuguako. This vocabulary belongs to what I have called in my work. The- Americafi Race, to the *' Zaparo " linguistic stock, as is easily seen. Ji)y comparing it with the Zaparo vocabulary collected by the Italian, traveler, Osculati.' Although by some writers the Andoas have been said to speak Quichua, this has been refuted by Tyler and others.' The name. ^ Esplorazione delle Regioni Eqiiatoriali, K^t^^. (A'lilan, 1850). ^ Cf. Tyler, in The Geographical Journal, ^yyn^, 1894. 322 SRINTON — VOCABULARIES FROM SOUTH AMERTCA. [Oct. 21. '^Gay" or ''Gae," applied to their tongue, is a Quichua word, and appears to be an abbreviation of simi-kayay, "mouth callers," another tribal name given them by the Quichuas, apparently from some peculiarity of their intonation. An ancient authority of 1661 informs us that a group of tribes, including the Gayes, Avixiras, Coronados, Guasagas and Ailpayos, " othervirise called Andoas and Toqueoreos," dwelt on the adjacent branches of the rivers Bobonaza, Tigre and Pastaza, all speaking the same language/ About a century later, another report speaks of the Andoas, Gaes and Semigaes as using the same tongue and dwelling together, '^one hour's journey from the west bank of the river Pastaza."^ These facts indicate how little was their change of location in two and a half centuries. The second vocabulary is given in the Geographical Journal, J"l.y> 1898, in an interesting article written by Col. George Earl Church, on information supplied him by Dr. Jose Bach, of La Plata. The latter describes a remarkable method of subterranean telegraphy in use among the tribe whom he calls the " Catuquinaru," who occupy the lands between the rivers Embyra and Embyrasu, branches of the Tarauaca, which itself flows into the Jurua. They fill a cavity in the earth with broken bones, ashes and other solid substances, and by striking this with a club can convey the sound for about a mile to the next village. Dr. Bach gives a short vocabulary of their tongue, and says that it '' is very similar to the Miranhas of Amazonas and has a few words of the Therena of western Matto Grosso." He adds that they have usually been called the " Catuquinas. " This is a Tupi word which Martins translates " good doors," and explains as meaning, either that the tribe lived in well-built houses, or else that they were hospitably inclined. He regards it as a compound of catu, good, and nay, door.* But it seems to me more likely to be a compound of caiu, good, and gutnay, female ^^ompanion ; and to refer'to the sociability of the softer sex. They certainly do not belong to the Tupi stock, as D'Orbigny thought,* nor are they related to the Tecuna stock, as Von MartiUs inclined to believe f but those at least whom Dr. Bach visited are ^'See Boletin de la Soc. Geog, de Madrid, T. xxix, pp. 246, 261, 262. * F. X. Veigl, A^achrichten uhcr Maynas, p. 47 (Nurnberg, 1798,,) ^ Beitrage zur Ethnograpkie Siid Anierikas,V>A i, p. 424. * L* HoiJitne Aviericaitt ^ Tome ii, p. 355. ^Martius, ii. s., p. 446. 1898.] BRINTON — VOCABULARIES FROM SOUTH AMERICA. 323 unquestionably a branch of the great Arawack family and are related, as he suggests, to the Terenos and Miranhas. This position has already been assigned to certain ''Cataquinas " by Ehrenreich ;^ and the relationship is evident enough from Dr. Bach's vocabulary. But another problem faces us in explaining the wide discrepancy which his list of words shows when compared to the Catoquina vocabulary printed by von Martins.'' The latter, taken by von Spix on the river Jurua, is certainly not of the same tribe, and it might appear doubtful if it belongs to the same stock, so wide are its discrepancies. But an extended comparison lines it up more closely with the Arawack than elsewhere. I subjoin a comparison : Catoquina Catoquina Arawack OF Bach. OF Spix. dialects. Arm, yano. pang, ghano. Arrow, uhynasu. Bow. uhynarasitco. Breast, putia. ish a niana-ghyta , ichomi. Eyes, cesd. ygho. ki(a, iki-se. Eyebrow?,, namy. ghoata^ ichama. Feet, ■ pihii. achman. Hair, anaht. ghyiai. itschy, iti. Hammock, ouysauarusit. Hands, pun^^ pagky, ako, p-aco. Head, tacasu, ghy^ • iia, vida, iquUo. House, ocausii. Legs, getemaupii, buric, poro. Mouth, agaho^ nunaghy. jaca. Neck, yayorua, ghyuan. Nose, tinoa. opaghpG, a. Teeth, canha, y, hai, hi, y. Water, uhehy , uata-hy^ uhii. It is interesting to note that all the words in Bach's vocabulary which are not Arawack are pure Tupi. The word for " bow " is derived from that for '* arrow," uhyna, which is the Tupi hui, or uhi ; foot, pihu^ is the Tupi pi ; hammock, ouysa, is the Tupi quiha ; and house, oca, is the same in Tupi. Except one, these are all *' culture words," and indicate that the Catoquinas first became acquainted with the objects to which they refer after they had met the Tupi tribes. ^ In Petermann's Mitiheilungen, 1891, p. 17. * Published in hxs Wdrtersam?tiliing biasilianischer Spraihen (Leipzig, 1867). 324 MINUTES. [Nov. 4/ Stated Meeting, November Ip^ 1S98. Vice-President Sellers in the Chair. Present, 14 members. The minutes of tlie hist stated meeting were read and, approved. Letters were read from Dr. Endolph Buti, of Baltimore, Md., inquiring if the Society would publish a translation of a fras^ment of the Book of the Dead ; also another letter accompanying the manuscript. On motion of Dr. Frazer, the paper of Dr. Buti was referred to a committee of three to be appointed by the President.- The President subsequently appointed Prof. H. V. Hil- precht, Mr. Talcott Williams and Mrs. Cornelius Stevenson. From Prof. H. Y. Hilprecht, accepting tbe appointment as delegate to the Twelfth International Congress of Orientalists. From the Academy of Sciences, Letters and Art of Modena, announcing the death of its President, Prof. Comni. Pietro Riccardi, on September 30, 1898. From Dr. Frederick Prime, resigning his membership of the Committee on the Librarj^ On motion of Dr. Frazer, Dr. Prime's resignation was accepted, and the President was requested to appoint a mem- ber to fill the vacancy during the remainder of the unexpired term. Mr. J. G. Rosengarten was subsequently appointed. Donations to the Library were announced by the Librarian. Dr. Frazer presented to the Library and Cabinet a photo- graph of the reading of the annexation resolution of Congress to President Dole on the steps of the Royal PaLace in Hono- lulu. Also a copy of the Honolulu Commercial Advertiser^ ^ and a statistical statement to date regarding the Islands of Hawaii, by the Commissionaire and Consul of France, formerly. Consul of France in Philadelphia, M. Louis Yossion. Senator Edmunds, on ' behalf of the Special Committee appointed for the consideration of the- Magellanic Fund, pre- 1898.] MINUTES. 825 sented a report, and offered the following resolutions, which were adopted : Resolved, i. That Mr. Samuel Dickson be and he is hereby authorized and requested to commence and prosecute in the proper court proceedings in the name of the Society to the end of obtain- ing a decree which will authorize this Society to offer premiums not exceeding ^looo to be paid out of income for approved papers which may be submitted to the Society under the provisions of the foundation of John Hyacinth de Magellan established in the year 1785, and that the President of the Society be and he hereby is authorized and requested to sign and verify the papers necessary to that end. Resolved, 2. That the Treasurer be and he is hereby directed, under the advice of the Finance Committee, to invest the accumu- lated savings by the Magellanic Fund, as will, with the present investment of that fund, produce a clear income of $50 per year; and that the whole of such income shall be kept and specially invested to meet payments of premiums in respect of the Magel- lanic foundation. Dr. Frazer exhibited specimens of flowers and scoriaceous lava from the " P'lnch Bowl, ' ' a short distance from the city of Honolulu, and sketched some of the geological features of the Hawaiian group. Dr. Frazer also exhibited a reproduction, in cast iron made in sand scraped from the rafters of Mr. Garretson's foundry in Buffalo, of a bronze medal and pin, and compared it with the cast-iron medal presented to some of the members of the Seventh International Geological Congress by the pro- prietors of the Kytchtym Iron Works in the Urals. Propositions for membership Nos. 1432, 1464:, 1469, 1470, 1471, 1472 and 1474 were read. Mr. Ingham, on behalf of the Committee on the Hall, presented a report, together with the two following resolu- tions, which were unanimously adopted : Resolved, That the Hall Committee are authorized at their dis- cretion to sell for the best price attainable the houses bequeathed to the Society by the will of the late Henry Phillips, Jr., and to 326 MINUTES. [Nov. 4. invest the proceeds and to apply the revenue thereof for the pur- chase of books on Archeology and Philology for the library in accordance with the provisions of said will. Resolved, That the Treasurer, Dr. Jayne, be and he is hereby authorized to execute conveyances in the name of the Society for the houses, singly or otherwise, the bequest of Henry Phillips, Jr., sold by order of the Society. On behalf of the Committee appointed by the Society to revise the Rules of Administration and Order, Mr. Dickson presented the following report, and submitted printed copies of the proposed new rules : Philadelphia, November 4, 1898. The Committee appointed at the meeting of May 13, 1898, to revise the rules of administration and order respectfully reports : That it has considered the existing rules in relation to the laws as now established, and respectfully submits the accompanying draft for the consideration of the Society. [Signed] Samuel Dickson, W. A. Ingham, Henry Pettit, Horace Jayne, I. Minis Hays. Mi. Dickson gave notice that he would call up the rules at the next meeting of the Society and ask for their considera- tion and adoption. Dr. Morris, on behalf of the Curators, moved that the Curators be allowed to deposit the collection of rocks and minerals in the basement of the Society's hall in the Wagner Free Institute, or elsewhere, at their discretion, in the name of the Society, and under proper guarantees for their preser- vation and recovery. Adopted. The rough minutes were then read, and the Society wa^- adjourned by the presiding officer. [Note by the Secretary. — There having been no quorum for the disposal ot property, the adoption of the resolutions oflfered by the Committee on the Magellanic Fund and on the Hall remain inoperative.] 189fl.] MATHEWS — ItlVlvSIONS OF QUEENSLAND ABORIGINES. 327 Stated Meeting^ Novernhrr JS^ 1898. Vice-President Sellers in the Chair. Present, 15 members. Letters were read from President Fraley, Prof. Ililprecht, Mr. Rosengarten, Mrs. Stevenson, and R. H. Mathews, ol Queensland, Australia. Dr. Frazer presented the proceedings of Officers and Council. The paper by R. H. Mathews on " The Divisions of the Queensland Aborigines," was read bv title and referred to the Secretaries. Pending nominations 1432, 14(34, 1469, 1470, 1471, 1472, 1474 were read, and new nominations 1475, 1476, 1477, 1478 and 1479 were read. On motion of Dr. Frazer the resolution approved by the Officers and Council regarding the International Floating Institute was unanimously adopted (see minutes of October 21, 1898"). On motion of Dr. Frazer, it was ordered that when the Society adjourns, it adjourn to meet November 25, 1898. DIVISIONS OF QUEENSLAND ABORIGINES. (With Map. Plate XIII.) BY R, H. MATHEWS, L.S. {Read November IS, 1898.) In an article on the '* Initiation Ceremonies of Certain Tribes of Australian Aborigines," published in the Proceedings of this Society, Vol. xxxvii, No. 157, pp. 54-73^ ^ established the bound- aries of the different organizations spread over the whole of New South Wales. In the present article it is intended to show the limits of the aboriginal nations inhabiting that portion of Queens- ■328 MATHEWS — DIVISIOXS OF QUEENSLAND ABORIGINES. [Nov. 18, land lying between the northern boundary of New South Wales and the nineteenth parallel of south latitude. Each of these nations is composed of certain communities or aggregates of tribes who adopt identical section or class divisions, the particulars of which are explained under each head in the fol- lowing pages, and the boundaries of the nations are accurately defined on the accompanying map. Each nation has been named after one or two of the tribes whose section or class divisions were first reported in it, and they are numbered on the map to corre- spond with the numbers given in the letter-press. On the map referred to there is also represented the dividing line, AB, between the area in which circumcision is practiced, and that in which such rite is not in force. From B, this line con- tinues in the same northerly direction till it meets the shore of the Gulf of Carpentaria. The continuation of this line southerly from the point A passes through the northwest corner of New South Wales, and its position is fixed on the map of that colony accom- panying my paper read before this Society March t8, 1898. No. I. The Dippil Nation. The country occupied by this nation, No. i on the map, extends from the Upper Clarence in New South Wales to Port Curtis in ■Queensland. On the east it is bounded by the sea-coast, and on the south, west and north by the distinguishing line marked upon the map, and includes the Brisbane, Mary, Burnett, Dawson, Upper Condamine and other rivers ; together with Moreton, Stradbroke, Eraser and other islands on the adjacent coast. The following are a few of the principal and best known tribes who were formerly spread over this tract of country : Dippil, Turrubul, Paiamba, Kitabool, Kaiabara, Kooranga, Goonine, Murrungama. The people are divided into two primary groups, called Deeajee and Karpeun ; the former is again divided into two sections, called Bunda and Derwine, and the latter into two, called Banjoora^ and Barrang. The following synopsis shows which sections may inter- marry, and to what section the children belong : ^ In the Wide Bay district, Balcoin is used instead of Banjoora, with the fetu- dnine equivalent Balcoingan. 1S9R.] MATHEWS — DIVISIONS OF QUEENSLAND ABORIGINES. 829 Group. Kaq^eun Sec- Husband. Barrang Baujoora Deeajee Bunda Derwine Wife. Bundagan Derwinegan Offspring. Sons. Barrangan Banjooran Derwine Bunda Banjoora Barrang Daughters. Derwinegan Bundagan Banjooran Barrangan Descent is always reckoned on the female side, the children taking the group and totem name of their mother. They do not, however, belong to her section, but take the name of the other sec- tion in their mother's group, as exemplified in the above table. The pair of sections, Barrang and Banjoora, forming the group Karpeun, invariably marry the Bunda and Derwine pair, of the group Deeajee, but the rules of intermarriage of the individual sec- tions constituting the groups is different in different parts of the tribal territory. For example, in some districts, instead of the rules of marriage following the order laid down in the foregoing table, a Barrang, male, marries a Derwine, female, and vice versa ; a Banjoora, male, marries a Bunda, female, and vice vejsa. The descent of the children is not, however, affected by this variation — the offspring of a Derwinegan being always Bunda, no matter whether she marries a Banjoora or a Barrang husband. This law- applies, mutatis mutandis, to the offspring of the women belonging to the other three sections. Although marriages are generally regulated by the rules set out in the above table, and in the last paragraph, yet there are what I have, called family or sectional regulations, under which a man may, in certain cases only, marry a woman belonging to his own section, but of a different totem to that to which he himself belongs. For instance, a Barrang Opossum might be allowed to marry a Bar- rangan Porcupine. Marriage between persons of the same totem is strictly prohibited.^ The totems belonging to each of the primary groups are common ^ " The Kamilaroi Class System of Australian Aborigines," Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. A list, (Q.), X, 23-24.. 330 MATHEWS — DIVISIONS OF QUEENSLAND ABORIGINES. [Nov. 18, to the two sections of which it is composed. Thus, the totems attached to Karpeun are common to the sections Barrang and Ban- joora, and the Deeajee totems are common to the Bunda and Der- wine sections. I have found that certain totems which belong to Karpeun in a given district are reported to be attached to Deeajee in a different part of the tribal territory. It may be stated that I have observed similar local disagreements among the totems of other organizations.^ In the tribes inhabiting the country on the heads of the Clarence and' Condamine rivers, the following are some of the totems attached to the group Karpeun : kangaroo-rat, parrot, turtle, carpet snake, eaglehawk, codfish, sea, brown kangaroo, crow, opossum, scrub turkey and porcupine. Among the totems of the Deeajee group m the same district may be enumerated the plain turkey, red kangaroo, bat, common magpie, wallaroo, black snake, native cat, emu, iguana and platypus. Mr. A. W, Howitt reports that in the Turrubul tribe, one of those included in this Nation, ''descent is counted through the male."* In another place he makes the same assertion in regard to the Kaiabara, also belonging to this Nation.' There is, however, no question that he is in error in both instances, and has evidently been misinformed. I have drawn attention to the matter now, because on a former occasion I was misled by Mr. Howitt's conclu- sions respecting the line of descent of the Kaiabara tribe.* I have since, however, from personal inquiry, reported that descent is through the mother.^ I have before given the Rev. William Ridley the credit of being the first to report the Turrubul and Dippil tribes from Moreton Bay to Wide Bay, whence Mr. E. Palmer traced a siniiilar organization to Port Curtis/ 1 am the first to publish the existence of identical divisions on the sources of the Clarence and Dumaresq rivers ; down the Condamine, and across the country to the Dawson, 'including that river and its tributaries, as shown upon the map. ^jfourn. Roy, Soc. N. S. Wales, xxxi, 170. '^ Irani. Roy. Soc. Victoria (1889), i, 102. ^Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xviii, 50, ^Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. Aust. (Q.), x, 29. ^Journ. Roy. Soc. N. S. PVales, xxxii.. 81-82. *Loc. cit., p. 81. ^^^98.] MATHEWS — DIVISION'S OF QUBTfeN'SLAND ABORICrlNKS. 331 The names of the groups Dceajec and Karpeun, and the equiva- lence of the four sections to those of the Kamilaroi tribes, have also been first reported by me. No, 2. The Kogai-Yuipera Nation. The name is adopted trom the Kogai of the Maranoa and Yuipera of Mackay, the two tribes whose divisions were first made known in this area. The immense extent of country covered by the tribes and communities constituting this nation can be unlTier- stood better by a reference to the map than by any description of It. In a former paper, to which the reader is referred, *■ I detailed the original work done by the Rev. William Ridley, Mr. R. B„ Smyth, Mr. E. M. Curr, and Mr. E. Palmer, among different tribes of this organization. I have traced the same section names among the tribes of the Warrego, Paroo, Bulloo, Barcoo, Thomson, Diamantina, and oth^r rivers, thus covering all the country in which the section or class names had not been particularized by previous writers. The fol- lowing are a few out of a large number of tribes included in my inquiries : The Gnoree tribe of the Middle Warrego, the Murgoan of the Bulloo, the Moothaburra and Birria of the Thomson, the Koonkerri of the Barcoo, the Kurrawulla of the Diamantina, the Banthamurra of the Wilson, etc. In all the tribes of this Nation the people are divided into four sections, called Woongo, Koobaroo, Bunburri and Koorgilla, or else mere variations of these names. The people appertaining to the Woongo and Koobaroo sections together form a group called Wootaroo, and the Bunburri and Koorgilla sections constitute the group Yungaroo. In my previous article already referred to,' I gave a tabular arrangement of the groups and sections of the Yuipera tribe at Mackay, as reported by Mr. R. B, Smyth, in 1878, but as the names are slightly different in the interior, it will be better to supply a new table, as follows : ^Joiirn. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales, xxxii, 78-So. '^Journ. Roy. Soc. N. S. IVales, xxxii, 79. 332 MATHEWS — DIVISIONS OF QUEENSLAND ABORIGINES. [Nov. IS. Group. Section. Offspring. Husband. Wife. Sons. Koorgilla Bunburri Daughters. Wootaroo Woongo Koobaroo Bunburrian Koorgillan Koorgillan Bunburrian Yungaroo or Mallera Bunburri Koorgilla Woongoan Koobarooan Koobaroo Woongo Koobarooan Woongoan Mr. E. M. Curr reported that the name Mallera was used on the Belyando and other rivers instead of Yungaroo, and I have found the same name on the Warrego, Thomson and elsewhere. As every man and woman in the community bears the name of an animal, or some other natural object, it follows that there will be an aggregate of diverse totems known by the collective title of Wootaroo, and a corresponding variety of totems will be distributed under the distinguishing name of Yungaroo or Mallera. The tribes of this organization are so widespread that I shall not at present occupy the space to enumerate the lengthy lists of totem names collected by me in the various districts, but will reserve this task for a future occasion. Although the section names are practically the same over the vast territory shown as No. 2 on the map, yet the dialects and cus- toms of the people are more or less diverse in different parts of it. Throughout a wide zone of the western end of this nation, all the males are circumcised, and other rites are performed, which have been described by me elsewhere. The line from A to B on the map separates those tribes who practice circumcision from those who do not. Such a boundary would necessarily be varied slightly at different times by conquest, or by the intermarriage of neighbor- ing tribes on either side. The southwest and west boundaries of Queensland, separating that colony from South Australia, being arbitrary geodetic lines, cannot be expected to coincide with the boundaries of the aborig- inal nations. For the sake of simplicity, however, the Queensland boundary has, for the present, been adopted as the southwest limit of the Kogai-Yuipera people. I am preparing a map dealing with 3898.1 MATHEWS — DIVISIONS OF QUEENSLAND ABORIGINES. '333 some South Australian tribes, on which the actual boundary between them and the Queensland communities will be shown in its proper place. The northern boundary of the Barkunjee nation, No. 5 on the map hereto annexed, will also be more particularly defined in my forthcoming article. No. 3. The Kooinmerburra Nation. This nation comprises several small tribes, inhabiting the coastal district from Port Curtis via Keppel Bay, Port Bowen, Cape Town- shend and Shoalwater Bay to Broad Sound, together with Long Island, Curtis Island and some smaller ones off the coast. On the south they were bounded by the Dippil, and on the west and north by the Kogai-Yuipera nations, as represented by a distinguishing line upon the map, PI. XIII. The community is divided into two intermarrying groups, having the same names as their western neighbors, but with subdivisions bearing a different nomenclature. The primary group Wootaroo is divided into two sections, called Moonal and Karilburra, and the Yungaroo group into two, called Kooealla and Koorpal. The names of the groups and sections, showing how they inter- marry, and the names of the respective divisions to which the chil- dren belong, will be readily understood by referring to the follow- ing table : Group. Section. Offspring. Husband. WlFK. Sons, Daughters. Wootaroo Moonal Karilburra Kooeallan Koorpalan Koorpal Kooealla Koorpalan Kooeallan Yungaroo Kooealla Koorpal Moonalan Karilburran Karilburra Moonal Karilburran Moonalan Moonal and Karilburra are equivalent to Murri-Kubbi, and Kooealla and Koorpal to Kumbo-Ippai, of the Kamilaroi and Wiradjuri communities in New South Wales. In this community descent is always reckoned on the female side, 334''mathews — DIVISIONS of Queensland aborigines, [nov is, the same as in the two adjoining nations, the children of both sexes taking the totem name of their mother. The undermentioned are a few of the totems common to Moonal and Karilburra : curlew, wallaby, rain, russet hawk, bat, yellow-bellied snake. The Koo- ealla and Koorpal sections have the following totems amongst others : crow, boomerang, jackass, eaglehawk, salt water perch. The intermarriage of certain totems belonging to the same sec- tion, referred to in my explanation of the marriage laws of the Dippil nation, also prevails in the Kooinmerburra community. For example, a Moonal might, under certain restrictions, marry a Moonalan of a totem different to his own. For the particulars of the social structure of the Kooinmerburra, and their geographic range, I am much indebted to Mr. William H. Flowers, one of my most valued correspondents, who took a deal of trouble in replying to ray inquiries. In 1894, in an article treating of another tribe, ^ I incidentally referred to the Kooinmer- burra divisions reported by Mr. Flowers. The divisions of this tribe have also been briefly mentioned by Mr. A. W. Howitt.* The full details given in the present article, and the map defining the boundaries of the tract of country occupied by all the tribes of this organization, have never been published until now. Explanation of Plate XIII. No. I. The Dippil nation, at its southern end, extends a little way within the New South Wales frontier — the whole of the remainder being situated in Queensland. Moreton and Stradbroke islands appertain to this organization. No. 2. The Kogai-Yuipera nation adjoins the northern boundary of the Barkunjee and Kamilaroi nations of New South Wales, which encroach some distance within Queensland territory. All the tribes occupying the country to the west of the line AB practice the rite of circumcision, but to the east of that line the custom is not in force. No. 3. The Kooinmerburra nation inhabits a comparatively small territory fronting the sea-coast for some distance north and south of the Fitzroy river,. No. 4 is the northern extremity of the country of the Kamilaroi ^ Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. AusL (Q.), x., 27 '^yourn. Anthrop. Inst., xiii, 341. QOi\ Ooi) MINb'TES. [Nov.-:.. nation, which crosses the boundary between the colonies of Queens- land and New South Wales. No. 5 represents a portion of the Barkunjee territory, which also overlaps the Queensland frontier. For particulars of the country occupied by the Kamilaroi and Barkunjee nations, and the eastern limit of the custom of circum- cision in New South Wales, the reader is referred to my paper on the "Initiation Ceremonies of Australian Tribes," published in the Proceedings of this Society, Vol. xxxvii, pp. 54-73, PI- V. Adjonrned Meeting^ November ^5, 1898. Vice-President Sellers in the Chair. Present, 21 inernbers, including seven members of the Officers and Council. By unanimous consent, Dr. Frazer offered the resolutions of the Committees on the Masrellanic Fund and of the Hall (see proceedings of meeting Noveinber 4, 1898), and they Avere unanimously adopted. Mr. Dickson, on behalf of the Committee on the Rules of Administration and Order, called for the consideration of the same, and, after discussion and amendment, they were adopted in the form entered in the minutes of this date. On motion of Dr. Frazer, it was unanimously ordered that a ballot be prepared for the coming annual election bv the co- operation and with the approval of all the Secretaries, on which shall be printed the names of all the offices for which elections are to be held, and the number of candidates . for each office \\\ the order in which they sliall be nominated ; that furthermore, a copy of the ballot be sent to every mem- l)er who receives notice of the meeting. There being ho further business before the Society, the meeting was adjourned by the presiding officer. i>*9s.i mixutf:s. 337 Stated Meeting, December ^^ 189S. Vice-President Sellers in the Chair. Present, 11 members. I>etters were read from J. B. Hatcliei acce])ting member- ship, and from the London LiV)rary. The list of donations to the Library was laid upon the table. The Librarian reported that the third and fourth volumes of the manuscript Logau papers, and one volume of Penn's letters and ancient documents, which had been loaned by order of the Society to the Historical Society of Pennsyl- vania on April 23, 1879, had been returned. The Treasurer read his annual report, and it was ordered that this and all other annual reports be spread upon the minutes. The annual reports of the Treasurer, the Curators and of the Standino* Committees were read. o Mr. Dickson and Dr. Morris gave notice of certain proposed amendments to the Rules of Administration and Order. The Society Avas then adjourned by the presiding officer. Stated Meeting, December 16, 189S. Vice-President Sellers in the Chair. Present, 24 members. A letter was read from Dr. Kendall, declining a reuomina- tion as Vice-President of the Society. Dr. Frazer offered the following resolutions, which were unanimously adopted : Whereas, Prof. Kendall has served the Society twenty-seven years, or from 1849 ^^ 1876 (inclusive), as Secretary, and twenty one years, or from 1877 to date, as Vice-President ; Resolved, That the Society desires to express its liigh apprecia- tion of Prof. Kendall's long and faithful services in its behalf, 338 MINUTES. [Dec. 16, 1898. Resolved, That the Society assures him of its continued confi- dence and affection,- and wishes him the health and happiness which his unremitting labor for the good of others deserves. A letter was also read from Mr. Eobert Patterson, declining a renomination as a Councillor of the Society. The. Library Committee presented their annual report, which was accepted and ordered spread upon the minutes. The report of the Finance Committee was read and or- dered to be spread upon the minutes. Nominations for Ofhcers and Council for the ensuing year were then made. The Judges and Clerks for the next annual meeting were elected. The Tellers reported that the following-named gentlemen bad been elected members of the Society : Prof. Edward P. Crowell, Amherst, Mass. Prof. William Knight, St. Andrews, Scotland. Paul Leicester Ford, Brooklyn, N". Y. Francis Rawle, Philadelphia. Prof. Edward N. Keiser, Bryn Mawr, Pa. Prof. Ernest William Brown, Haverford, Pa. George F. Baer, Reading, Pa. Hon. John Hay, Washington, D. C. Henry S. Pancoast, Philadelphia. Charles M. Hall, Niagara Falls, N. Y. The amendments to the Eules of Administration and Order offered by Mr. Dickson at the meeting held December 2 were then unanimously adopted. The amendments to the sam^^ Pules offered by Dr. Morris at the same meeting were lost. The Society was adjourned by the presiding officer. INDEX TO VOLUME XXXVII. Page. Abbe ; Oa the Altitude of the Aurora above the Earth's Surface. . 4 Artiodactyls of the Uinta Formation, Selenodont; Scott 73 Aurora above the Earth's Surface, Altitude of the ; Abbe 4 Asphalt resembling Gilsoaite by the Distillation of a Mixture of Fish and Wood, The Production of; Day 171 Australian Tribes, Divisions of; Mathews 151 Initiation Ceremonies of ; Mathews 54 Bitumens, Genesis of as related to Chemical Geology ; Peckham lOS Brinton ; The Linguistic Cartography of the Chaco Region 178 On Two Unclassi6ed Vocabularies from South America 321 Chaco Region, The Linguistin Cartography of ; Brinton 178 Committees appointed. Standing 51 Day ; The Production of an Asphalt resembling Gilsonite, by the Distillation of a Mix- ture of Fish and Wood 171 Declaration of Independence, Facsimile exhibited 81 A Note on the History of the Jefferson Draught Manu- script of; Hays 88 Fort William Henry, MS. of a Journal kept during the Siege of ; Hays 143 Fraley, Frederick; Portrait of, presented .142,162 Grote ; Specializations of the Lepidopterous Wiug, the Pieri-Nymphalidte 17 Hays ; A Note on the History of the Jefferson Manuscript Draught of the Declaration of Independence 88 MS. of a Journal kept during the Siege of Fort William Henry, August, 1757 . . 143 Herpetological Notes ; Van Denburgli 139 Initiation Ceremonies of Australian Tribes ; Mathews 54 Kansan Drift in Pennsylvania, Notes on ; Williams 84 Kendall, Resolutions in regard to Dr 337 Laws of the Society adopted 155 Lesley, J. P.; Portrait of, presented 142,165 Librarian elected 7 Linguistic Cartography of the Chaco Region, The; Brinton 178 Magellanic Fund, Resolutions in regard to 325 Mathews ; Initiation Ceremonies of Australian Tribes 54 Divisions of Australian Tribes 151 Divisions of Queensland Aborigines 327 Members deceased : Bayard, Thomas F 176 Bessemer, Sir Henry. 54 Cattell, William C 53 De Mortillet, Gabriel 320 Ebers, George M. 176 Foggo, Edward A 54 Gladstone, William E 170 Hall, James • ■ 176 Legge, James . » 53 Muller, Friederich 176 Parvin, Theophilus 52 Pepper, William 176 Pulzsky, Francis 176 Trimble, Henry , 176 Members elected : Allen, Alfred H 170 Baer, George F 338 a' \ 340 in7)p:x. Members elected : Page. Brown, Ernest William 338 Bryant, Henry Grier 170 Ck)nverse, John H *. 170 Crowell, Edward P 338 Darwin, George H 5R De Lancey, Edward 1' 170 Emmet, W. L. K 53 Ford, Paul Leicester 338 Greene, .S. Dana 53 HaU, Charles M 338 Harkness, William 170 Hay, John 338 Hutchinson, Emlen 170 Jayne, H. LaBarre 170 Keiser, Edward N 338 Knight, William 338 Mengarini, G 170 Montgomery, Thomas H., Jr 53 Pancoast, Henry S 338 Patterson, Lamar Gray 170 Pettee, William H , 170 Piatt, Charles 170 Frescott, Albert B 170 Rawle, Francis 338 Redwood, Boverton 170 Scott, Charles F 53 Stillwell, L. B 53 Tiele, C. P 170 Whitfield, R. P 170 Meetings, Adjourned 155, 336 Stated 3,7,51.52,53,54,142,154,162,175,319,324,327,337 Miller ; On the Quarternion Group 312 Officers and Council elected 3 Old Broadside, with a Reference to the Throne of Congress ; Sachse 45 Peale ; Collection of Indian Antiquities, Photographs of 142 Peckham ; The Genesis of Bitumens as related to Chemical Geology 108 Pennsylvania, Notes on Kansan Drift in ; Williams 84 Pericles and Apollonius of Tyre, Shakespeare's ; Smyth 206 Pieri-Nymphalidae, Specialization of the Lepidopterous Wing; Grote 17 Quaternion Group, On the ; Miller 312 Queensland Aborigines, Divisions of ; Mathews . 327 Richardson ; Description of Four New Species of Rocinella, with a Synopsis of the Genus 8 Rocinella, Description of Four New Species, with a Synopsis of the Genus ; Richardson. 8 Rules of Administration and Order adopted 336, 338 Sachse ; An Old Broadside, with a Reference to the Throne of Congress 45 Scott ; Preliminary Note on the Selenodont Artiodactyls of the Uinta Formation ... 73 Shakespeare's Pericles and Apollonius of Tyre ; Smyth 206 Siege of Fort William Henry, A Journal Kept during ; Hays 142 Smyth ; Shakespeare's Pericles and Apollonius of Tyre 206 Specializations of the Lepidopterous Wing, the Pieri-Nymphalidse ; Grote 17 Standing Committees appointed 51 Throne of Congress, Old Broadside, with a Reference to ; Sachse 45 TJinta Formation, Preliminary Note on the SelenodoDt Artiodactyls of ; Scott 73 Van Denburgh ; Herpetological Notes 139 Vocabularies trom South America, On Two Unclassified ; Brinton 34 Williams; Notes on the Kansan Drift in Pennsylvania 84 5yo ' PROCEEDINGS AM. PHIL. SOC. VOL. XXX VH, NO. I57< PLATE I. Ill '";i+j +.1 Photolith. F. H. Bijdeker, Hildesheim, A. Radclifife Grote - Wing-s of Butterflies. PROCEEDINGS AM. PHIL. SOC. VOL. XXX VH, NO. 157, PLATE IL IIlJ"^+qjI VIII VII VIII fii, in, , m VIll VIII Vll III. 111. I'/./l VH V, 'illl l'/2/l " r \\\ Photohth. F. H. Bodeker, Hildesheim. A. Radcliffe Grote — Winors of Butterflies. PROCEEDINGS AM. PHIL. SOC. VOL. XXXVII, NO 157, PLATE IIL III, 111, Photolith. F. H. Bodeker, Hildesheim. A. Radcliffe Grote — Wings of Butterflies. PROCEEDINGS AM. PHILOS. SOC. VOL. XXXVII, No. 157, PLATE IV. S3efc5veib«iT(j einer feibmen Serviette. Sn'6er ^OJi.tte r^aScrviette iei'get(tc6 eine tn \3X()t\k gef^dfte^fapper-- ©ctlange, tt)o\)on Die !e^re im anmcbfe ijl; fte bejie^et ffc{) mif t)iei3* Dcreinigte Provinzen \>onNord America y Dereu 9?amen ftct) urn felbige r)erum 6cftnt>en, unD njefc^c eben DergleiAenScfifaiigen In i()rcn SBappcn fu^ren. SiefeS friccJenDeS^ier roirD in feiiien©efc()lccf)te fur Iki^ cD^Ifte uiitcr aWU geSalteu; mcif c^ niemaltS ettpag 55fe^ r^ut, foit« bevn t>klmc^ feiHcngeiuOe, l>«rc& fcin Slappern fcine ©esenwart fftcn ift , ftcllet NardAfnerica ^)or j man erblicf t t)afcl61t Da6 Portrait \mt^ Atnbajfadeurs amgranjbfifcbeiuoofe jg)rn.D(?flF.Ffjz^^/^^^^^ mif DcrUntcrf0nfr: Sa^SBuaoer imfreijcitcn. Ueber OicfenPor^rjiYbti fint)ctiiiit> berX&vott \)t^Co?igreffes ncb^ Dem neueti aufgefc^Iagenen ©r» ?|*Su^ uttt)Dem@(t)n>cri)t, a(gtt)elcf)eg 6ie^&(fe(!e©en)aU tJOJiMet 2[ttt5iefcm©efe|'53uc6 ijl aaf ^er einenSciteju Icfcn: LesTreizePro* vinc€sUniesyCX^vr>ki3.\>mmQUn^xo\>\nim,. uttfe ttuf Der anl)ecn0e(« fe; Independence te 4, luillet. 177 6. oDer Die Unabbdn^tflfcir D;4.;3ula 1776. S^©cunDerfci)eineteing5atmen-tBaiim, nuD an &ei)Den0etrm Diegran^bfifcbenSa^nen, M cm3eict)enDe$mlt3ranfrei*fle(($bjyemtt 55uuDniife& ©er ^Drbeerfranjr mldbcv 6cn auferiTcn3{anD UvServrettt oa^moi (ter; Reflet Da^SBilD Dec belo^ntenSapferfdt^Jor, mDc§cn4Scfenmaa cmc^ranjofifdKSilie jtiiDet, wcl4)c^i«cn S^il ^t>n\>cmNordAmericam^ f^en?5Jappen au^mad)et. itP(^rtrmts^ Der 4&eru6rttfen©cneraI5,jtJef*e t)Oit ^et ©bftinM/- weri?^6e9(eitet, imD i)on "Den ©legc^jeiitcn unDDengiwrert DetSlUfib^itr Dei?Sent)OJt ir)renS-ejTe(n I0&, funDfgt i^nen Du^rei>f)eit an, unD iritt Den3JeiD unD Die@daDeitr) iui« terfeUKgnffe, !4Dcr©&ttmMme>"i7^, t)fe.iut recbten fleber, m\>JVa^ shingto7i mx eincn ^ranje \>m Stdvcfi £an&, af* Dem ©innbilD ber ©tdr« fe,'fr5iK^ (l|ctemGe^2/>/yju5-u(Tat, t\jeld}ei: D^ng-nejben DerfunDigef, S)ie U6ei[fd)vijft u&^r Diefcg Portrait [mXtt alfo: General JVor shington II a pen d'Egaux enBravourePmdencje ct dans PArtMili" A BROADSIDE IN THE COLLECTION OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY. ^ai Portrait bc^&tmxalLee crinncrt im8 aii fcin ®efi5n8ni§, mU 6)ti Durc^ cinen^^uvm bejeic^net i(t, tDorait feineSfiBafferi unb3lu(?un9i ipie andb feine ^ettert an^e^e jfret (itiD, mit ber Ue5crf4>rlfft : GeneralLee^ TantdtFainqueur7a?2tdtVamcuj Da^ftcigt: ©eneralgec/ balbllC'* 6cvtDinbcr, talD u&eriuuuDein 3^m jur ©clten CeftDpen fid) einigeSlmc* rif anifc^e ©efangcne ^ rodd)^ fcin @ct)icf faf bcHaaen i unb Mar^ ^ieru&ec jure&er^, inbem fie nacb bemgncvlifcben^SJappeit ^inweifen. ^a^MedaiIlo?il)i:6&m^xalMontgomPiery mPfofil, Ijltjonbcc Srauvigfdt 6ey]leitet; todcbe duf DielUue ^injdgeti trJoritiB Die 5(fd)e bic^ fcg grogcn !0?anue6 aufbetua^ret iff. Uebcr i^n folgen bie 5S3ovte : Gem" rctlMontgonmieryThou do^Jlfall^ butFreedo?/iJiaU build herThrofie on thy Grave y ober : bu fallj^; aber ouf beincn ©rabe mi biegrcp^cit i^^ Z\^xon bauen. llotcr bcmMerf^//fe;? fieget man befien ©org, unb juc ® dtcit be6m ©rabwcft €in babei) (le^citber (rauvenber Genius mit ei« ncr umgcf e^tten 3on UfiUH mi{bem-@eofd6(l ti^xQintvalMontgommeri^eto^m n>ucbe. *?n>et)ten^# La Bataille deTrentvhe oii lesHeJ/bts fiirent defaitspav le Ge- neral Lee k 26 Decembre 1776. o^er liit Bataille loonTrentown woblc^^eflen Dm 25 December i7769cf(bla3enn)urberi. 5)rktcns ftebct mon tU Bataille ton Saratoga, bcni7.Dceobfr 1777. In wcU ^er ©eneral Bourgoine Durcb ®eneral Ga/^/ jum ^rlegdgefangcnen gemacbt wutbe^ mit bcrUntcrfd)rl(fc: La Bataille de Saratoga le ly.d^ OStobre 1777 dam laquelU U General Bourgoyne f tit fait Prifomiier par le General Gates^ 95lcrtcn6 , hicRetirade t)er SnqfanCir ^u$ Philadelphia unb nacb benen Ter^ feys 1778. mit ber Unterfcbtifft, Les TrouppesAngloifesfe retirent de Philadelphia ilerfeysV an 1768* Q^ntlicb ecblicf ct man ait^ jroer) unter clnen bll|enbcn$fmmf I In 13 ©f ucf get ^eiftf/ ^nbil«b a5>^t itt drJ jufammen qebracbfe S'rcnen, n)cf(f>»6 D(e2(6§dn$/3fdt urib ttti# obS/ongf^jhlt i>on Nord America tctjleBeC PROCEEDINQS AM. PHILOS. SOC. VOL. XXXVIl, No. 167, PLATE V. m toU Ta Ux im St rai th) 2!) ei net m\ tiiti Ziv %v Ge m ner Aei mil o h F i- -3 >i 1 ^ <■ i .^ \ Is 1 2 G:; PC 5 u ■^ 1 ^ t3- ! -3 ^ -^ JJt-^^^ t i o>- £1 Proceedings Am. Philos. Soc. Vol. XXXVII, No. 157 Plate X. Magellanic Prem'um. FOUNDED IN 1 786, BY JOHN HYACINTH DE MAGELLAN, OF London. 1899, The American Philosophical Society, Held at Philadelphia, for Promoting Useful Knowledge ANNOUNCIiS THAT IN DECEMBER, 1899, IT WILL AWARD ITS MAGELLANIC GOLD MEDAL to the author of the best discovery, or most useful invention, relating to Navi- gation, Astronomy, or Natural Philosophy (mere natural history only excepted) under the following conditions : 1. The candidate shall, on or before November i, 1899 deliver, free of postage or other charges, his discovery, invention or improvement, addressed to the President of the American Philosophical Society. No. 104 South Fifth Street, Philadelphia, U. S. A., and shcdl distmguish his performance by some motto, device, or other signature. With his dis- covery invention, or improvement, he shall also send a sealed letter containing the same motto, device, or signature, and subscribed with the real name and place of residence of the author. u n 1 2. Persons of any nation, sect or denomination whatever, shall be admitted as candidates for this premium. ...,,, ,u- ■^ No discovery, invention or improvement shall be entitled to this premium, which hath been already published, or for which the author hath been publicly rewarded elsewhere. A The candidate shall communicate his discovery invention or im- provement, either in the English, French, German or Latin language z A full account of the crowned subject shall be published by the Society, as soon as maybe after the adjudication, either in a separate publication, or in the next succeeding volume of their Transactions, or '"6°The premium shall consist of an oval plate of solid standard gold of the value of ten guineas, suitably inscribed, with the seal of the Society annexed to the medal by a ribbon. All correspondence in relation hereto should be addressed To THE Secretaries of the American Philosophical Society, No. 104 South Fifth Street, PHILADELPHIA, U. S. A. TRANSACTIONS OF THE American Philosophical Society, Held at Philadelphia, For Promoting Useful Knowledge. Vol. XIX, New Series. Part /, ^to, pp. iq8, with j Plates. Lately Published. CONTENTS. Art. I.— A New Method of Determining the General Perturba- tions of the Minor Planets. By William McKnight Ritter, M.A. Art II.— An Essay on the Development of the Mouth Parts of Certain Insects. By John B. Smith, Sc.D. Part II, ^^tOy pp. 2'/ 2, with ij Plates. Lately Published. Art. (II.— Some Experiments with the Saliva of the Gila Monster (Heloderma suspectum). By John Van Denburgh, Ph.D. Art. IV. - Results of Recent Researches on the Evolution of the Stellar Systems. By T. J. J. See, A.M., Ph.D. (Berlin). Art. V. - On the Glossophaginas. By HARRISON Allen, M.D. Art. VI.— The Skull and Teeth of Ectophylla alba. By HAR- RISON Allen, M.D. Part HI ^to, pp. i6S, with g Plates. Just Published. Art. VII.— The Osteology of Elotherium. By W. B. Scott. Art. VIII.— Notes on the Canidas of the White River Oligocene. By w; B. Scott. Art. IX. — Contributions to a Revision of the North American Beavers, Otters and Fishers. By Samuel N. Rhoads. SUBSCRIPTION— FIVE DOLLARS PER VOLUME. SLPARATE PARTS ARE NOT SOLD. Address THE LIBRARIAN OF THE American Philosophical Society, No. 104 South Fifth Street, Philadelphia, U. S A. 3 2044 093 310 514 wrm '^■r %-^'#-r:A mK^^^g^■^:■^ ^^a^^^H W^f -^^H k^ji^H i^^^^^lBr^'' 1*v - «HF ; ^^^^ ^^ .i~:|k^ \#' ,. .^'4 ^'i ^ L^- ^^^ >*5-^ . / J?' ^-^ ;^.,- ' ^.V